RetailRevolution

Demand Forecasting Engine

The Demand Forecasting Engine leverages advanced machine learning algorithms to analyze historical sales data and industry trends, generating accurate predictions for future inventory needs. This feature helps users anticipate market demands, allowing them to stock popular items proactively while avoiding excess inventory. As a result, retail businesses can enhance customer satisfaction and streamline operations by ensuring products are available when needed.

Requirements

Sales Data Integration

"As a retail manager, I want the Demand Forecasting Engine to automatically pull sales data from our POS system so that I can rely on accurate, up-to-date information for making inventory decisions."

Description

The Sales Data Integration requirement involves developing a system that seamlessly connects the Demand Forecasting Engine with existing sales data sources from various points of sale (POS) systems used by retailers. This will enable real-time access to historical sales data, allowing the forecasting engine to generate accurate predictions based on comprehensive and reliable datasets. The significance of this requirement lies in its ability to enhance the accuracy of demand forecasts, helping retailers to make informed inventory decisions that align with actual sales trends. As a result, businesses can effectively optimize stock levels, improve customer satisfaction, and reduce inventory costs associated with overstocking or stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Data Integration for Real-Time Inventory Monitoring

Given the integration of the Demand Forecasting Engine with the POS systems, When a sale is made at any location, Then the historical sales data should be updated in real-time to reflect the latest transaction.

Accurate Forecasts Based on Integrated Sales Data

Given that the sales data is integrated, When the forecasting engine processes the data, Then it should generate demand forecasts that are within 10% of actual sales for the next month 90% of the time.

User Access to Historical Sales Data

Given the completion of sales data integration, When a user accesses the reporting dashboard, Then they should be able to view historical sales data from all integrated POS systems within 2 seconds.

Error Handling for Data Integration

Given the sales data integration system is active, When a data update fails for any reason, Then an error message should be generated, and the error should be logged for review within 5 minutes.

Seamless Integration Setup Process

Given a new retail business using RetailRevolution, When they initiate the integration process for their POS data, Then the documentation provided should allow complete setup to be achieved in under 30 minutes without external help.

Compatibility with Multiple POS Systems

Given that several retailers use different POS systems, When data integration is performed, Then the system should successfully integrate with at least 95% of the most popular POS systems in the market.

Data Accuracy Checks After Integration

Given the completion of sales data integration, When the forecasting engine runs its initial calibration, Then at least 98% of the data points should match the original sales records reported by the POS systems.

Machine Learning Model Optimization

"As a data analyst, I want the Demand Forecasting Engine to regularly update its machine learning models with the latest sales data so that I can trust its predictions will adapt to changing market conditions."

Description

The Machine Learning Model Optimization requirement focuses on the continuous improvement of the machine learning algorithms used in the Demand Forecasting Engine. By implementing techniques such as regular retraining with new sales data and validation against emerging market trends, this requirement aims to increase the accuracy and reliability of demand predictions. This ongoing optimization process ensures that retailers receive the most relevant and actionable insights, taking into account shifting consumer behaviors and trends. It is crucial for maintaining enhanced forecasting capability, which in turn supports effective inventory management and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Demand Prediction Accuracy Improvement

Given a dataset of historical sales data from the past year, when the machine learning model is trained and validated, then the forecast accuracy should be at least 85% compared to actual sales data for the next month.

Real-time Data Integration

Given new sales transactions are processed in the retail system, when the inventory management platform retrieves and incorporates this data, then the forecasting engine should update its predictions within 10 minutes.

Trend Analysis Validation

Given the forecast generated by the machine learning model, when compared against industry trends and market reports, then the model should demonstrate at least a 75% correlation with recognized market trends.

Retraining Frequency Compliance

Given the set schedule for model retraining established as every two weeks, when the model is evaluated post-retraining, then it should reflect an update in predictions and adjustments in its decision-making algorithms accordingly.

User Alerts for Stock Predictions

Given a significant change in demand forecast for a specific product, when the machine learning model identifies this change, then the system should automatically alert users via email or app notification about potential stock implications.

Impact Assessment of Model Adjustments

Given a change in model parameters or algorithms, when assessing inventory performance after these adjustments, then the sales variations should not exceed a 10% deviation from predicted sales in subsequent months.

User-friendly Forecast Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want a clear, easy-to-read dashboard for the Demand Forecasting Engine so that I can quickly understand my inventory needs at a glance."

Description

The User-friendly Forecast Dashboard requirement entails developing a visually appealing and intuitive dashboard to display the forecasts and insights generated by the Demand Forecasting Engine. This dashboard will present key metrics such as predicted sales, stock levels, and restocking recommendations in an easily digestible format. The importance of this requirement is reflected in its ability to enhance user experience by enabling retail managers to quickly understand and act on the data visualizations provided. A well-designed dashboard will improve decision-making efficiency and increase engagement with the forecasting tool.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard User Access and Usability

Given a retail manager accesses the User-friendly Forecast Dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then the user should be able to view key metrics such as predicted sales, stock levels, and restocking recommendations without any latency issues.

Data Visualization Effectiveness

Given that the User-friendly Forecast Dashboard is displayed, When the user examines the visualizations, Then the user should find at least three key metrics easy to understand and interpret at a glance.

Integration with Demand Forecasting Engine

Given that historical sales data has been processed by the Demand Forecasting Engine, When predictions are generated, Then the dashboard should automatically update with the latest forecasts within five minutes of data processing.

Mobile Responsiveness

Given that a retail manager is accessing the User-friendly Forecast Dashboard on a mobile device, When the dashboard is opened, Then the layout should adjust seamlessly, maintaining usability across different screen sizes without loss of functionality.

User Feedback Loop

Given that the User-friendly Forecast Dashboard has been in use for one month, When users are surveyed about their experience, Then at least 80% of respondents should indicate that they find the dashboard helpful for their decision-making process.

Historical Data Comparison

Given the User-friendly Forecast Dashboard is being used, When a retail manager requests to view historical sales alongside predicted forecasts, Then the user should be able to seamlessly toggle between historical and forecast data without errors or delays.

Automated Alert System

"As a retail manager, I want to receive automated alerts about my inventory levels so that I can act quickly to avoid stockouts or overstock situations."

Description

The Automated Alert System requirement is designed to notify users when specific inventory thresholds are reached based on the predictions from the Demand Forecasting Engine. This includes alerting users when stock levels are predicted to drop below a certain point or when items are forecasted to become overstocked. Implementing this requirement will allow retail managers to react proactively rather than reactively to inventory challenges. Alerts can be configured based on user preferences and will help ensure that businesses maintain optimal stock levels, support sales, and enhance customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Triggering Alerts for Low Stock Levels

Given the user has configured a low stock threshold for a specific item, When the inventory level drops to that threshold, Then the system sends an automated alert notification to the user via their preferred communication method.

Triggering Alerts for Overstocked Items

Given the user has set high stock thresholds for items, When the inventory level exceeds this threshold based on forecasting, Then the system sends an alert to the user to review the stock levels and take necessary actions.

Customizing Alert Preferences

Given the user is setting alert preferences in the system, When the user specifies their preferred threshold values and notification methods, Then the system saves those preferences successfully and applies them for future alerts.

Viewing Historical Alerts Log

Given the user accesses the alert management feature, When they request to view the historical alerts, Then the system displays a log of all past alerts, including timestamps, affected items, and the type of alert (low stock or overstock).

Integrating Alerts with POS System

Given an active integration between the Automated Alert System and the existing POS system, When an inventory alert is triggered, Then the system updates the POS inventory status to reflect that an item is going out of stock or is overstocked.

Sending Alerts During Peak Hours

Given that the user has set a specific time frame deemed as peak business hours, When an alert triggers during these hours, Then the system ensures that the alert is sent immediately without delay to avoid impacts on sales operations.

User-Friendly Interface for Alert Configuration

Given that the user is in the settings area for configuring alerts, When they interact with the interface to set up their alerts, Then they should find it intuitive and easily able to adjust thresholds and notification settings without needing advanced technical knowledge.

Scenario Planning Tool

"As a retail manager, I want to run 'what-if' scenarios with the Demand Forecasting Engine so that I can plan for sales fluctuations based on different conditions."

Description

The Scenario Planning Tool requirement is focused on providing retailers with the ability to run different sales scenario simulations using the Demand Forecasting Engine. This would allow users to input variables such as promotional events, seasonal changes, or market trends and see how these changes could impact inventory levels. The significance of this requirement lies in enhancing strategic planning capabilities and helping businesses prepare for fluctuations in demand. By visualizing potential outcomes, retailers can make better-informed decisions about ordering and stocking practices during peaks and troughs in demand.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer inputs a promotional event date along with expected sales revenue to evaluate inventory needs for the event.

Given the retailer inputs a promotional event date and expected sales revenue, when the scenario is run, then the system should generate a forecast showing projected inventory levels before, during, and after the event.

Retailer enters seasonal data patterns to assess how upcoming seasonal changes may affect inventory requirements.

Given the retailer provides seasonal data patterns, when the scenario is executed, then the system must display inventory recommendations based on the historical effects of similar seasonal changes.

Retailer wants to evaluate the impact of competitor pricing changes on sales volume and inventory needs.

Given the retailer inputs competitor pricing changes, when the scenario is analyzed, then the output should include a forecast of sales volume and necessary inventory adjustments to maintain optimal stock levels.

Retailer tests multiple scenarios simultaneously, including promotions, seasonal changes, and competitor actions.

Given the retailer selects multiple scenarios to run, when executed, then the system should allow simultaneous comparisons and generate a concise report of projected inventory levels for each scenario.

Retailer evaluates the usage of historical sales data to draw insights for future stock requirements.

Given historical sales data is available, when the retailer runs the demand forecasting tool, then the system should present a detailed analysis of sales trends and future stock predictions based on this data.

Retailer wants to understand the long-term effects of market trends on inventory needs for a new product launch.

Given market trend data is inputted, when the simulation is conducted, then the system should provide insights on projected inventory levels and stock recommendations for the new product over a specified timeframe.

Seasonal Trend Analyzer

The Seasonal Trend Analyzer provides insights into how seasonal variations affect inventory demand. By identifying patterns in consumer purchasing behavior during different times of the year, this tool enables retailers to adjust their inventory strategies accordingly. Users can optimize stock levels in anticipation of seasonal spikes or drops, leading to reduced waste and maximized sales opportunities.

Requirements

Seasonal Trend Detection

"As a retail manager, I want to analyze seasonal trends in purchasing behavior so that I can optimize inventory levels and improve sales performance during different seasons."

Description

The Seasonal Trend Detection requirement focuses on accurately identifying seasonal patterns in consumer purchasing behavior from historical sales data. By analyzing variables such as date, product category, and sales volume, the system will generate reports that highlight peak purchasing periods and trends over time. This feature is essential for enabling retailers to forecast demand effectively and align inventory strategies accordingly. The ultimate goal is to minimize stockouts and overstock situations by providing data-driven insights that inform purchasing decisions and inventory management practices.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to analyze historical sales data for the past three years to identify purchasing patterns that change with the seasons.

Given the historical sales data is uploaded, When I run the Seasonal Trend Detection report, Then the system should accurately identify at least three distinct seasonal trends in consumer purchasing behavior.

As a retailer, I want to receive alerts for seasonal inventory adjustments based on detected trends.

Given the Seasonal Trend Analyzer detects a seasonal increase in sales for a specific product category, When the period for the trend is approaching, Then I should receive an automated alert with recommended inventory levels to meet projected demand.

As a store manager, I want to view reports that detail peak purchasing periods by product category for my store's location.

Given I access the Seasonal Trend Detection report, When I select a specific product category and time frame, Then the report should display clear visualizations of peak purchasing periods for that category with an accuracy of at least 95% compared to actual sales data.

As an inventory manager, I want to compare predicted seasonal trends against actual sales after a season ends.

Given the season has concluded, When I generate a post-season analysis report, Then the system should provide a comparison of predicted vs actual sales for each product category, highlighting any discrepancies larger than 10% for inventory adjustment insights.

As a retailer, I want to ensure that the seasonal trend detection is easily accessible on all devices.

Given I am logged into the RetailRevolution system, When I access the Seasonal Trend Detector feature from different devices (desktop, tablet, and mobile), Then the functionality should be consistent and responsive across all platforms without any errors.

As a user, I want to see user-friendly documentation that explains how to interpret the seasonal trend reports.

Given I access the Seasonal Trend Detection feature, When I open the help documentation, Then it should provide clear examples and user-friendly explanations of how to read and analyze the seasonal trend data reports.

As an operational manager, I want the system to integrate with existing inventory systems to update stock levels automatically based on seasonal trends.

Given the Seasonal Trend Analyzer detects a significant seasonal trend, When the trend is confirmed, Then the inventory levels for affected products should adjust automatically in the integrated inventory management system without manual intervention.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As a retail owner, I want to receive automated alerts for low or excess inventory based on seasonal trends so that I can take timely actions to adjust my stock levels and avoid waste."

Description

The Automated Inventory Alerts requirement entails the creation of a notification system that automatically informs retailers when stock levels deviate from predefined thresholds based on seasonal trends. Retailers can set optimal inventory levels for different products according to anticipated demand during various seasons. This feature ensures that users are proactively alerted of potential stockouts or overstock situations, facilitating timely reordering and adjustments to inventory management. The automated nature of this system will save retailers time and reduce manual oversight, enhancing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer sets optimal stock levels for winter clothing based on predictive analysis from the Seasonal Trend Analyzer.

Given that the retailer has set the optimal inventory level for winter clothing, when stock levels drop below this threshold, then an automated alert should be generated and sent to the retailer's device.

Retailer receives notifications for both stockouts and overstock situations as defined by their threshold settings.

Given that the retailer has configured both stockout and overstock thresholds, when inventory levels hit these thresholds, then the system should send two distinct types of alerts accordingly.

Retailer adjusts stock levels in response to alerts received from the Automated Inventory Alerts system.

Given that the retailer has received an alert regarding low stock levels, when they respond by adjusting inventory levels, then the system should verify and update the inventory to reflect these changes without manual oversight.

Retailer monitors inventory levels across multiple locations using the Automated Inventory Alerts feature.

Given that the retailer manages multiple locations, when an inventory level deviates from the set threshold in any location, then the retailer should receive location-specific notifications immediately.

Retailer analyzes historical data for more informed inventory threshold settings.

Given that the retailer accesses the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, when viewing historical data, then the suggested optimal thresholds for inventory based on seasonal trends should be clearly displayed and easy to adjust based on retailer input.

Retailer configurations for automated alerts are saved and retained across sessions.

Given that the retailer has set custom thresholds for inventory alerts, when they log out and log back in, then their previous alert configurations should be saved and readily accessible.

Retailer receives a comprehensive summary of alerts over a defined period.

Given that the retailer requests a summary of inventory alerts, when they select a time frame, then the system should generate and display a report of all alerts triggered within that timeframe, including response actions taken.

Historical Data Analysis

"As a data analyst in a retail business, I want to analyze historical sales data to uncover seasonal trends so that I can provide insights that help optimize our inventory strategy for upcoming seasons."

Description

The Historical Data Analysis requirement involves integrating a powerful analytics engine that processes past sales data to reveal seasonal purchasing patterns and trends. By utilizing historical sales records, this feature will allow retailers to visualize data through graphs and charts, making it easier to understand performance across different timeframes. Users will benefit from identifying which seasons or events (holidays, special promotions) drive sales, equipping them with actionable insights for future inventory planning and decision-making. This analysis will foster a deeper understanding of the factors influencing inventory demand.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Visualization for Seasonal Sales Analysis

Given the Historical Data Analysis feature is implemented, When a user selects a date range for past sales data, Then the system displays a graph visualizing sales trends for that period and indicates specific seasonal peaks and troughs.

Seasonal Patterns Identification

Given the user accesses the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, When they input historical sales data, Then the system identifies and lists the top three seasonal events that significantly influenced sales within the selected period.

User-Friendly Representation of Data Insights

Given the analytics engine processes past sales data, When the user views the visualization charts, Then the graphs should be intuitive and include tooltips that explain key data points and trends clearly.

Integration with Existing Inventory Management

Given that the Historical Data Analysis integrates with the existing inventory system, When seasonal trends are identified, Then the system suggests inventory adjustments based on predicted demand to avoid stockouts or overstocking.

Reporting for Actionable Insights

Given the Historical Data Analysis feature provides insights, When the user generates a report, Then the report should summarize key findings including seasonal demand trends and actionable recommendations for inventory management.

Performance across Different Timeframes

Given the user selects multiple timeframes to compare sales data, When they view the analysis, Then the system accurately shows performance metrics for each selected timeframe side-by-side in a comparative chart.

Notification of Seasonal Demand Changes

Given that a user sets alerts for significant seasonal changes, When historical data indicates a high demand spike during an upcoming season, Then the system sends a proactive notification to the user recommending an inventory review.

Trend Forecasting Dashboard

"As a retail strategist, I want to access a trend forecasting dashboard that visualizes seasonal inventory demands so that I can make data-driven decisions about our stock and purchasing strategies."

Description

The Trend Forecasting Dashboard requirement focuses on providing retailers with a visual dashboard that summarizes key insights and trends related to seasonal inventory demands. The dashboard will integrate various analytical tools and visualizations that display seasonal forecasts, trends, alerts, and historical data comparisons. This feature will aid retailers in visualizing their inventory strategies, allowing them to make informed decisions about stock levels and purchasing ahead of peak seasons. Additionally, users can customize the dashboard to prioritize specific metrics relevant to their business strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to view seasonal trends in a visual dashboard, so that I can make informed decisions about my inventory levels before peak shopping seasons.

Given a retailer logs into the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they select the seasonal trends tab, then they should see a graphical representation of inventory demand across different seasons for the past three years, with an option to filter by product category.

As a retailer, I want to set alerts for significant increases or decreases in seasonal demand, allowing me to respond quickly to changing market conditions.

Given a retailer is on the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they configure alerts for inventory thresholds, then the system should send notifications via email or SMS when demand exceeds the set parameters by 20% or more.

As a retailer, I want to compare historical data with predicted trends, helping me understand the accuracy of my past decisions.

Given a retailer is viewing the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they select the comparison feature, then they should see a side-by-side view of historical sales data and forecasted trends for the chosen season, including statistical accuracy metrics.

As a retailer, I want to customize my dashboard to highlight specific metrics that matter most to my business, ensuring I focus on what drives my success.

Given a retailer accesses the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they customize their dashboard settings, then they should be able to select and prioritize at least five relevant metrics such as 'Top-selling items' or 'Stock levels', which should be saved and displayed upon each login.

As a retailer, I want to receive data-driven insights on potential future trends, assisting me in preparing stock for upcoming seasons.

Given a retailer is using the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they access the insights feature, then they should see actionable recommendations based on historical data and current market trends for upcoming seasons, including suggested reorder quantities.

As a retailer, I want to be able to access the dashboard from multiple devices, allowing me to manage my inventory on the go.

Given a retailer accesses the Trend Forecasting Dashboard from a mobile device or tablet, when they log in with their credentials, then they should be able to view the dashboard and all its functionalities without loss of information or performance issues.

As a retailer, I want to implement a historical comparison to assess past performance and improve future forecasting accuracy.

Given a retailer utilizes the Trend Forecasting Dashboard, when they select the historical comparison tool, then they should be able to view a complete report comparing past seasonal performances against the current forecasts, including insights into variability and trends.

User Customization of Trend Settings

"As a store manager, I want to customize trend settings to reflect my retail goals so that the insights provided are directly relevant to my inventory management needs."

Description

The User Customization of Trend Settings requirement allows users to tailor the seasonal trend analysis based on their individual business needs. Retailers can define key parameters and metrics that matter most to their operations, such as target inventory levels, preferred product categories, or specific sales events. This flexibility ensures that the analytics is aligned with different retail contexts and enhances the user experience by making the tool more relevant and usable. Customization of alerts and reports will further empower retailers to act based on the specific trends that affect their business.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Trend Settings for Inventory Levels

Given a user with appropriate permissions, when they access the Seasonal Trend Analyzer and customize the target inventory levels, then the system should save these settings and reflect them in future trend reports.

User Defines Product Categories for Trend Analysis

Given a user is in the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, when they select specific product categories to focus on, then the analytics should only display trends related to those categories in the dashboard.

User Receives Alerts Based on Custom Trend Settings

Given a user has customized their alerts in the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, when a significant change in trend is detected (based on user-defined parameters), then the user should receive an email notification detailing the change and its implications.

User Generates Customized Reports Based on Trends

Given a user has set specific parameters for their trend analysis, when they request a report from the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, then the report should include only the relevant data that aligns with the user's defined parameters and preferences.

User Tests Real-time Inventory Adjustments

Given a user has configured their trend settings to adjust inventory levels automatically, when inventory reaches a predefined threshold due to seasonal demand changes, then the system should trigger an automated restock alert according to the user’s settings.

User Reviews Adjustable Time Frame for Trends

Given a user is utilizing the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, when they select a different time frame for trend analysis, then the analytics should accurately reflect trends for the newly selected period, preserving all custom settings.

User Validates Seasonal Trend Predictions with Historical Data

Given a user processes seasonal trend analysis, when they compare predicted trends against historical sales data, then the system should clearly indicate whether the predictions correspond with actual sales outcomes over the selected period.

Real-Time Inventory Adjuster

The Real-Time Inventory Adjuster monitors sales trends and automatically updates inventory forecasts as new data comes in. This dynamic feature ensures that retailers maintain optimal stock levels by providing timely recommendations for restocking or adjusting inventory based on recent performance. Users benefit from improved agility in inventory management, minimizing stockouts and overstock situations.

Requirements

Dynamic Inventory Forecasting

"As a retail manager, I want the system to automatically adjust inventory forecasts based on real-time sales trends so that I can maintain optimal stock levels without manual intervention."

Description

This requirement is focused on implementing a dynamic forecasting engine that utilizes real-time sales data to predict inventory needs. The system should analyze sales patterns, seasonal fluctuations, and historical data to generate accurate inventory forecasts. By continuously updating these forecasts as new sales data comes in, the platform ensures that retailers can make informed replenishment decisions, ultimately reducing both stockouts and overstock situations. This feature will integrate seamlessly with existing inventory management components, enhancing overall usability and efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic Inventory Forecasting for Seasonal Sales Promotions

Given a seasonal sales promotion event, when the sales data is collected in real time, then the inventory forecasting engine must update the stock level recommendations within 15 minutes to account for the increase in demand.

Real-Time Inventory Adjustments from Updated Forecasts

Given that the inventory forecasts have been updated due to recent sales trends, when a store manager reviews the inventory levels, then they should see updated stock suggestions for each product category reflecting current trends and forecasted needs.

Impact of Past Sales Data on Current Inventory Forecasts

Given an analysis report on past sales data from the previous year, when the dynamic inventory forecasting engine processes this data, then it should generate a forecast that accurately predicts stock needs with at least 90% accuracy based on historical trends.

User Notification for Critical Stock Levels

Given that the dynamic forecasting system detects critical stock levels for any item, when this condition is met, then the system must automatically notify the inventory manager via email and in-app alert within 5 minutes.

Integration with Existing POS System

Given that the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster is integrated with the existing POS system, when a sale is made, then the inventory levels must reflect the sale in real time without any discrepancies between systems.

Historical Data Utilization for Accurate Trend Forecasting

Given that historical sales data is available for at least one year, when the dynamic inventory forecasting engine analyzes this data, then the forecasts generated should include adjustments for seasonal trends and fluctuations documented in the past year.

Automated Restock Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive automatic alerts when my inventory is low so that I can reorder stock before running out and avoid lost sales."

Description

This requirement calls for the establishment of an automated alert system that notifies retail managers when inventory levels fall below pre-defined thresholds. The alerts should be customizable, allowing users to set specific stock level triggers based on their unique business needs. This feature ensures that retailers are proactively informed about when to restock, thereby mitigating the risk of stockouts and enhancing the responsiveness of inventory management practices. Integration with communication channels such as email and SMS is essential for timely notifications.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail managers need to receive notifications when inventory of a specific product drops below a specified threshold, allowing them to take timely restocking action.

Given that the inventory level for a product is monitored, When the stock falls below the user-defined threshold, Then an automated alert should be sent to the retail manager via email and SMS.

A retail manager customizes the alert thresholds for different products based on their sales patterns and inventory turnover rates to avoid stockouts and overstock situations.

Given that the user has access to the inventory management system, When the manager sets a new alert threshold for a product, Then the system should save the new threshold and reflect it in the alert system.

The retail manager needs to verify that they receive alerts consistently for critical items, ensuring no stockouts occur.

Given that critical items have been defined in the system, When the stock level of a critical item drops below its threshold, Then an alert should be sent immediately without delays.

Retail managers want to ensure that the alerts include relevant details for easier decision-making, such as product name, current stock level, and suggested action.

Given that an alert is triggered for low inventory, When the alert is sent, Then it should include the product name, current stock level, and a recommendation for restocking or adjustments.

Retail managers require integration with their existing communication tools to receive alerts without switching platforms.

Given that the user has configured their communication preferences, When an alert is triggered, Then the system should successfully send notifications via the configured channels (email/SMS).

The retail manager wants to test and confirm the functionality of the automated alert system before it goes live.

Given that the alert system is in testing mode, When the inventory level is adjusted to simulate low stock conditions, Then the alert should trigger as expected, confirming system functionality.

Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard

"As a retail analyst, I want to visualize sales trends over time so that I can identify patterns and optimize inventory accordingly."

Description

The requirement aims to create an intuitive dashboard that provides visual insights into sales trends and inventory performance over time. This dashboard will utilize graphs and charts to represent data clearly, making it easy for users to identify patterns and make quick decisions. The visualization tool will enhance the ability to understand how sales impact inventory levels and will be instrumental in strategic planning for promotions, seasonal changes, and overall inventory management. It should allow users to filter data by time periods, product categories, and locations.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Manager uses the dashboard to analyze sales trends over the last quarter to inform a promotional strategy.

Given the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard, when the user selects the last quarter as the time period, then the dashboard displays a line graph of sales trends with accurate data for each month of the selected quarter.

Store Manager filters the sales trend data by product category to identify top-performing items.

Given the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard, when the user selects a specific product category, then the dashboard updates to show only the sales trends for that category, including sales volume and inventory levels.

Retail staff examines the inventory performance alongside sales data during a team meeting to discuss stock levels.

Given the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard, when the user views the dual-axis chart comparing sales performance and inventory levels, then the chart accurately reflects real-time inventory data correlated with sales results.

Business owner analyzes seasonal sales trends to prepare for the upcoming holiday season.

Given the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard, when the user selects a custom time range leading up to the holiday season, then the dashboard generates a bar graph showcasing seasonal sales trends for the selected period.

Marketing team wants to visualize the impact of a recent promotion on inventory levels through the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization Dashboard, when the user selects the promotion period, then the dashboard highlights any significant changes in inventory levels compared to the sales data during and after the promotion.

Integration with POS Systems

"As a business owner, I want my inventory system to integrate with my POS so that I can get real-time updates on stock levels based on actual sales data."

Description

This requirement entails developing a robust integration mechanism that connects the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster to existing POS systems used by retailers. This integration will facilitate the real-time transfer of sales data to the inventory management platform, providing accurate updates on inventory levels. By ensuring that sales and inventory data are synchronized in real time, retailers can make better decisions regarding restocking and inventory adjustments, enhancing operational efficiency and reducing discrepancies between recorded sales and available inventory.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Real-Time Inventory Adjuster and POS System during a sales event.

Given that the POS system is operational, when a sale is made, then the inventory level in RetailRevolution should reflect the updated stock level within 5 seconds.

User checks inventory levels within RetailRevolution after a day of sales.

Given that multiple sales have occurred throughout the day, when the user accesses the inventory dashboard, then the displayed stock levels must accurately match the recorded sales data from that day.

User configures restocking thresholds based on sales data insights in RetailRevolution.

Given an integrated POS system, when the user sets a restocking threshold for an item, then the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster should automatically suggest restocking options once inventory falls below this threshold, based on the latest sales trends.

Retailer runs a weekly performance report on inventory and sales data.

Given that sales data is continuously fed from the POS system, when the retailer generates the report, then the report should include accurate representations of stock levels, sales trends, and restocking recommendations for the past week.

Testing the accuracy of data synchronization between the POS and the inventory management system under normal operating conditions.

Given that the POS system has been configured and is in use, when a series of sales transactions occur, then the data synchronization should demonstrate a maximum discrepancy of no more than 2% between POS sales data and RetailRevolution inventory data.

User receives automated alerts for inventory shortages after integration with POS system.

Given that the POS system has recorded sales leading to low inventory levels, when the stock of any item drops below the set threshold, then the user must receive an automated restocking alert within 10 minutes.

User Training and Support Module

"As a new employee, I want access to training materials for the inventory management system so that I can learn how to use it efficiently."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a comprehensive user training and support module that educates users on the functionality of the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster. It should include tutorials, FAQs, and access to customer support to assist users in navigating the new features effectively. Adequate training will ensure that users can maximize the potential of the system, leading to better inventory management practices and enhanced user satisfaction. This module will incorporate feedback mechanisms to continuously improve user content based on experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the User Training and Support Module for the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster for the first time.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to the User Training and Support Module, then they should see an interactive tutorial about using the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster.

User attempts to interact with the FAQ section of the User Training and Support Module.

Given the user is on the User Training and Support Module page, when they click on the FAQs, then they should be presented with a list of commonly asked questions and answers relevant to the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster.

User requests customer support through the User Training and Support Module.

Given the user is on the User Training and Support Module, when they click the 'Contact Support' button, then they should be able to submit a support request and receive confirmation that their request has been received.

User provides feedback on the effectiveness of the training content in the module.

Given the user has completed a tutorial, when they rate the content, then their feedback should be recorded and acknowledged with a thank you message.

User reviews the training content after updates have been made based on prior feedback.

Given the user revisits the User Training and Support Module, when they access the updated training materials, then they should see the improvements made based on user feedback clearly highlighted.

User finishes the entire tutorial for the Real-Time Inventory Adjuster functionality.

Given the user has completed all tutorial segments, when they finish, then they should see a completion certificate or acknowledgement that they have completed the training.

A new user onboards and uses the User Training and Support Module as part of their initial training.

Given a new user accesses the platform, when they complete the introductory training within the User Training and Support Module, then they should demonstrate understanding by successfully completing a knowledge check with at least 80% accuracy.

Integration with Market Dynamics

The Integration with Market Dynamics feature connects RetailRevolution with external market indicators such as economic trends, consumer preferences, and competitor analysis. By incorporating these factors into inventory predictions, retailers gain a more holistic view of market conditions. This feature empowers users to make informed inventory decisions that align with broader market trends, enhancing strategic planning.

Requirements

Market Indicator Integration

"As a retailer, I want the RetailRevolution platform to integrate with external market indicators so that I can make inventory decisions based on current economic trends and consumer behaviors, ensuring that my stock levels align with market demand."

Description

The Market Indicator Integration requirement involves developing a seamless connection between the RetailRevolution platform and external market data sources. This integration should include real-time access to economic trends, consumer preferences, and competitive analysis. The system should pull this external data automatically, process it, and utilize it to enhance inventory prediction models. By integrating these market dynamics, retailers can adjust their strategies based on a realistic assessment of market conditions. This will provide users with comprehensive insights that help in making informed inventory decisions, aligning stock levels with market demand patterns, and ultimately improving sales performance. The outcome will empower retailers to stay competitive and responsive to changes in the market landscape.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the RetailRevolution platform and views the dashboard where market dynamics indicators are displayed.

Given the user is logged into RetailRevolution, when they access the dashboard, then they should see market indicator data sourced from external market data including economic trends, consumer preferences, and competitor analysis.

Retailer sets up notification preferences for market indicator updates.

Given the user is on the notifications settings page, when they select the types of market indicators they wish to receive alerts for, then the system should save these preferences successfully without errors.

User compares inventory levels against updated market indicators to make stocking decisions.

Given that the market indicators have been updated in the system, when the retailer compares current stock levels against predicted demand based on these indicators, then they should receive actionable recommendations to adjust inventory levels.

System automatically integrates and updates market data in real-time.

Given that external market data sources are available, when new data becomes available, then the system should automatically pull and process this data without any manual intervention, updating the inventory prediction models accordingly.

User generates a report that includes market dynamics and its impact on inventory decisions.

Given the user is in the reporting tool, when they select to generate a report on market dynamics, then the report should include all relevant market indicators and their impact on recommended stock levels.

Retailer uses market data to forecast demand for upcoming seasons.

Given that the retailer has accessed the market data integration feature, when they input their past sales data alongside current market indicators, then the system should provide a forecast for the next season with confidence intervals based on statistical analysis.

Testing the accuracy of inventory predictions based on integrated market dynamics.

Given that a set of historical market dynamics data is available, when the predictions for inventory needs are generated, then the accuracy of those predictions should be evaluated against actual sales for that period with a variance margin of less than 10%.

Automated Report Generation

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated reports that incorporate market trend analyses so that I can quickly assess my inventory health and make data-driven decisions without manually compiling data."

Description

The Automated Report Generation requirement entails the creation of a feature that automatically compiles and generates detailed reports on inventory data influenced by market dynamics. This feature should enable retailers to receive customized reports at scheduled intervals or on-demand, showcasing key metrics such as stock levels influenced by market trends, overstock alerts, and demand forecasts. The reports must be easy to interpret and should highlight actionable insights, allowing users to identify opportunities for optimization more effectively. The integration of data from market indicators will ensure that these reports reflect a comprehensive view of inventory health, thus supporting strategic decision-making processes and enhancing overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Report Generation for Monthly Inventory Review

Given a retailer has set up a monthly report schedule, when the end of the month is reached, then an automated report should be generated and sent to the retailer's email with key metrics including stock levels, overstock alerts, and demand forecasts derived from market dynamics.

On-Demand Report Generation for Sudden Market Changes

Given a retailer requires immediate insights following a significant market change, when the retailer accesses the Automated Report Generation feature and selects ‘Generate Report’, then a report should be produced within two minutes that reflects the latest inventory data influenced by current market trends.

Customizable Report Templates for Different Retail Needs

Given a retailer wishes to customize their reports, when the retailer selects report criteria and layouts prior to generating the report, then the system should allow for at least five different customizable configurations that reflect the retailer’s specific focus areas and preferences.

User Training for Interpreting Automated Reports

Given that the automated report generation feature is implemented, when a retailer uses the feature for the first time, then they should have access to a training module that explains how to interpret the reports and highlights key metrics that inform inventory decisions.

System Performance Under Load

Given multiple retailers are generating reports simultaneously, when the system is under peak load, then it should maintain a report generation time of no more than three minutes per request without degradation of performance.

Data Integrity and Accuracy Checks

Given that reports are generated based on market dynamics, when an automated report is produced, then it should accurately reflect the current inventory levels and market indicators used for forecasting, matching the data in the inventory management system.

Integration Testing with External Market Data Sources

Given the integration with market dynamics, when generating a report, then the automated report should successfully incorporate data from at least three designated external market indicators and reflect any updates made up to the time of report generation.

User Dashboard Customization

"As a retailer, I want to customize my dashboard with market data widgets so that I can prioritize the information that is most relevant to my inventory management needs and make quicker decisions based on real-time insights."

Description

The User Dashboard Customization requirement focuses on allowing users to personalize their dashboard experience within RetailRevolution. Users should be able to add widgets that reflect important market dynamics, such as key performance indicators linked to external market data, historical sales performance, and other relevant metrics. This feature aims to enhance user engagement by offering a tailored view that showcases the information most pertinent to their specific inventory needs and market context. Additionally, it should allow users to rearrange and prioritize widgets according to their preferences, delivering a user-centric experience that fosters proactive management of inventory strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their dashboard by adding a sales performance widget that displays real-time sales data related to current market trends.

Given the user is logged into their RetailRevolution dashboard, when they select the 'Add Widget' option and choose the sales performance widget, then the widget should be displayed on their dashboard with the correct real-time sales data connected to market trends.

User rearranges the widgets on their dashboard to prioritize market dynamics information for quick access.

Given the user has multiple widgets displayed on their dashboard, when they drag and drop a market dynamics widget to the top of their dashboard, then the layout should update to reflect the new position of the widget immediately without any errors.

User wants to remove a widget that is no longer relevant to their inventory needs from the dashboard.

Given the user is on their dashboard, when they click the 'Remove' button on a specific widget, then that widget should be removed from the dashboard, and a confirmation message should display for successful removal.

User seeks to save their customized dashboard layout for future sessions.

Given the user has rearranged their widgets, when they click the 'Save Layout' button, then their customized layout should be saved and restored in subsequent sessions without requiring additional setup.

User adds a widget that displays competitor pricing trends to monitor market competition.

Given the user is on their dashboard, when they select the 'Add Widget' option and choose the 'Competitor Pricing Trends' widget, then the widget should appear on their dashboard populated with current competitor pricing data.

User accesses their customized dashboard on a different device and expects the same layout and widgets.

Given the user has saved their dashboard layout, when they log into RetailRevolution from a different device, then the dashboard should display the same arrangement and widgets as previously saved.

User receives an alert when new market dynamics data is available to enhance decision-making.

Given the user is on their dashboard, when new market dynamics data is integrated into the system, then the user should receive an instantaneous notification alerting them of the new information available for review.

Market Trend Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts about significant market trend changes so that I can proactively adjust my inventory levels and avoid potential stockouts or overstocking situations."

Description

The Market Trend Alerts requirement specifies the development of a notification system that alerts users to significant changes in market conditions that might impact inventory levels. This feature should leverage the integrated market data and provide real-time alerts for variables such as shifts in consumer preferences, emerging economic trends, or competitor movements. Users should be able to set thresholds and preferences for receiving alerts based on specific conditions relevant to their business context. The goal of this requirement is to ensure that retailers are always informed of critical market shifts, allowing them to respond proactively, thus minimizing risks related to stockouts or excess inventory.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets customized alerts for consumer preference changes based on sales data from the last quarter to improve inventory decision-making.

Given that the user has logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Market Trend Alerts section and set a threshold for significant changes in consumer preferences, then they should receive a real-time alert when those thresholds are met or exceeded.

A retailer receives an alert about an emerging economic trend indicating a potential increase in demand for specific product categories, prompting inventory adjustments.

Given that the Market Trend Alerts feature is active, when an economic trend report identifies a potential increase in demand for a specific product category, then the system should automatically send an alert to users who have opted in for notifications related to that product category.

A user wants to ensure they are notified of competitor movements in their market segment to adjust their inventory strategy accordingly.

Given that the user has selected competitor movement tracking in their preferences, when there is a documented movement by a competitor in the market (such as opening/closing stores or changing pricing), then the user should receive an alert notifying them of this competitor activity.

The retailer wants to receive alerts regarding stockout risks based on market trend analysis.

Given that the Market Trend Alerts are engaged, when the demand forecast indicates a high probability of stockouts for any product due to current market trends, then an alert is triggered to notify the retailer of the risk.

The user alters their alert settings to reduce the number of notifications received during peak business hours.

Given that the user is in the alert settings menu, when they adjust their notification timing preferences to limit alerts during specific hours, then alerts should respect these settings and not be sent during the specified peak business hours.

A retailer wants to review historical trend alerts to assess past inventory decisions and their outcomes.

Given that the retailer is on the Market Trend Alerts dashboard, when they access the historical alerts section, then they should see a comprehensive list of past alerts with timestamps, allowing them to analyze the impact of those alerts on inventory decisions.

A small retailer is interested in understanding how market trend alerts can influence their overall sales performance.

Given that the market trend alert feature is in use, when the retailer accesses their sales performance metrics post-alert utilization, then they should see an observable correlation between alerts received and positive changes in sales performance indicators over time.

Historical Data Analysis Tools

"As a retailer, I want to access tools that analyze historical inventory performance against market indicators so that I can identify patterns and inform my future inventory strategies based on past experiences."

Description

The Historical Data Analysis Tools requirement aims to integrate advanced analytical tools within RetailRevolution that allows retailers to examine past inventory performance alongside market dynamics data. Users should be able to visualize trends, run comparisons, and generate insights based on historical data that includes sales performance in relation to external market indicators. This feature should facilitate better understanding of how past market trends have affected inventory requirements, driving smarter, forward-looking inventory strategies that capitalize on lessons learned from the past. The output of this feature will support awareness of long-term market behaviors, fostering a data-driven approach to inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to analyze historical sales data alongside external market trends so that I can identify patterns and make informed inventory decisions for the upcoming season.

Given that the historical data analysis tool is integrated, when a user selects a specific date range and applies market trend filters, then the system should display a comprehensive visualization of historical sales data correlated with selected market indicators.

As a retailer, I want to compare past inventory performance with market dynamics so that I can understand how external factors affected my sales.

Given that the historical data analysis tool is functional, when a user runs a comparison report between previous years' inventory levels and corresponding market conditions, then the report should present clear insights indicating correlations and causations for easy decision-making.

As a retailer, I want to generate insights from historical data to forecast future inventory needs based on market dynamics, to better plan my stock levels accordingly.

Given that the data analysis tools have been implemented, when a user generates a forecasting report utilizing historical performance and external data, then the forecast should detail projected stock levels and highlight potential market fluctuations influencing those projections.

As a retailer, I want to visualize trends over time using historical sales data integrated with market dynamics, so that I can quickly understand shifts in consumer preferences.

Given that the visualization tools are integrated, when a user accesses the trend analysis section, then they should be able to view interactive graphs that dynamically illustrate sales trends in relation to varying market indicators over the selected period.

As a retailer, I want detailed reports that summarize past inventory performance against market conditions, enabling me to present insights to my stakeholders.

Given that the historical data analysis tools are operational, when a user opts to generate a summary report, then it should include a detailed breakdown of inventory levels, sales performance, and external market influences with actionable insights clearly defined.

As a retailer, I want access to a dashboard that aggregates historical data and market trends for a quick overview, so I can assess my inventory strategy at a glance.

Given that the dashboard feature has been developed, when a user logs into the RetailRevolution platform, then they should see a real-time summary view that includes key metrics derived from historical data and market analyses.

Alerts and Notifications Hub

The Alerts and Notifications Hub notifies users of any significant changes in predicted inventory needs based on new data inputs or shifts in market conditions. This proactive communication enables retailers to stay ahead of demand fluctuations and make timely adjustments to their inventory strategies, fostering a more responsive and effective operations framework.

Requirements

Real-Time Inventory Alert System

"As a retail manager, I want to receive real-time alerts about inventory changes so that I can make timely decisions to adjust stock levels and avoid potential losses due to stockouts or overstocking."

Description

The Real-Time Inventory Alert System will continuously monitor inventory levels and alert users proactively regarding significant changes or predicted shortages based on fluctuating market conditions and sales trends. It will benefit users by ensuring they are always informed about potential stockouts or overstock situations, thus enabling timely replenishment and optimized inventory management. This feature integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory databases and analytics engines within RetailRevolution, ensuring that alerts are based on accurate and up-to-date information. The outcome is a significant reduction in instances of both overstock and stockouts, resulting in improved cash flow and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives automatic alerts for low inventory when stock levels fall below the defined threshold after the sales trend indicates a decline.

Given that the inventory level is monitored continuously, When the stock level falls below the defined threshold, Then the user receives an alert notification via the application and email.

User receives alerts for predicted shortages based on new sales data added to the system.

Given that new sales data is inputted into the inventory management system, When there is a significant shift in predicted inventory needs based on this data, Then the user receives a notification alerting them of the potential shortage.

User checks their alerts for overstock items in response to an increase in supply purchases that exceed demand.

Given that a significant increase in inventory purchases is detected, When this increase leads to a projected overstock situation, Then the system sends an alert to the user detailing the items at risk of becoming overstocked.

User configures alert preferences via the settings to customize the threshold levels for receiving notifications.

Given that the user is in the alert settings section, When they set their preferred inventory threshold levels for alerts, Then the system saves these preferences and applies them in future alert notifications.

User receives alerts on a mobile device when inventory levels reach critical low points while on-the-go.

Given that the user enables mobile alerts, When inventory levels reach a critical low, Then the user receives a push notification on their mobile device.

User reviews historical alert notifications to analyze past inventory trends and adjust management strategies accordingly.

Given that the user accesses the alerts history section, When they consult the historical alert notifications, Then they can view a log of past alerts to inform their inventory management strategies.

Customizable Notification Preferences

"As a store owner, I want to customize my alert preferences so that I only receive notifications that are relevant to my business, allowing me to focus on what matters most."

Description

The Customizable Notification Preferences feature allows users to tailor alert settings according to their specific needs and preferences. Users can select the types of alerts they wish to receive (e.g., low stock, overstock, trends, etc.) and choose their preferred communication channel (email, SMS, in-app notifications). This customization enhances the user experience as it places control in the hands of the user, ensuring they receive information that is most relevant to their operations. This feature integrates into the existing user settings dashboard within RetailRevolution, ensuring an easy and intuitive setup process. The expected outcome is improved engagement with alerts, leading to better inventory management and user satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Notification Settings for Low Stock Alerts via In-App Settings

Given the user is logged into their RetailRevolution account, When they navigate to the Alerts and Notifications Hub and select low stock alerts, Then the user can choose to receive these alerts via in-app notifications, and their selection is saved successfully.

User Receives Confirmation of Changes to Notification Preferences

Given the user has updated their notification preferences in the Alerts and Notifications Hub, When they submit the changes, Then they should receive a confirmation message indicating that their preferences have been successfully updated.

User Chooses Multiple Communication Channels for Trend Alerts

Given the user is in the Alerts and Notifications Hub, When they select trend alerts, Then they can choose multiple communication channels (email, SMS, and in-app notifications) simultaneously, and these settings are applied correctly in the user profile.

User Tests Notification Delivery for All Communication Channels

Given the user has set up low stock alerts to be sent via email, SMS, and in-app notifications, When the inventory falls below the specified threshold, Then the user receives notifications through all selected channels without delay.

User Accesses Notification Settings on Different Devices

Given the user has custom notification preferences set on one device, When they log into their RetailRevolution account on a different device, Then their notification preferences should be consistent and accurately reflected in the Alerts and Notifications Hub.

User Deletes Notification Preferences and Confirms Changes

Given the user decides to remove a specific type of alert from their notification preferences, When they delete the preference, Then they receive a prompt for confirmation and the alert type is removed upon confirmation without affecting the other preferences.

User Views Historical Data on Notification Interactions

Given the user has been receiving alerts for a specified period, When they access the Alerts and Notifications Hub, Then they should be able to view a log of past notifications received and their statuses (read/unread).

Historical Data Analytics for Alerts

"As a data analyst, I want to access historical inventory data to better predict future stock requirements so that our inventory levels align more closely with actual customer demand."

Description

The Historical Data Analytics for Alerts requirement will provide users with insights based on historical inventory trends to enhance the effectiveness of alerts. By analyzing past data, users can better understand seasonal trends, demand fluctuations, and optimal reorder points. This will enable users to create advanced alerts that predict future inventory needs, rather than just reacting to current stock levels. This feature will be fully integrated with the existing analytics tools in RetailRevolution, ensuring streamlined data access and functionality. The expected outcome is a more proactive inventory management approach that leverages historical data to anticipate future needs, improving operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User views historical inventory analytics in the Alerts and Notifications Hub to set advanced alerts based on past trends.

Given that I am logged into RetailRevolution and have accessed the Alerts and Notifications Hub, when I view the historical inventory analytics, then I should see a detailed breakdown of past inventory trends, including seasonal patterns and demand fluctuations.

User sets an advanced alert for inventory restocking based on historical data analysis.

Given that I am on the Alerts and Notifications Hub, when I create an advanced alert using historical data, then the system should allow me to specify optimal reorder points and save the alert configuration successfully.

System triggers an alert based on a predicted inventory shortage due to historical trend analysis.

Given that I have set advanced alerts based on historical trends, when the system predicts an inventory shortage based on current data, then I should receive a timely notification indicating the predicted shortage and suggested actions.

User makes adjustments to inventory levels in response to alerts generated from historical data analyses.

Given that I have received an alert about a predicted inventory need, when I review the suggested actions, then I should be able to adjust the inventory levels directly within the platform and see updated stock statistics.

User evaluates the effectiveness of historical data analytics in predicting inventory needs after several implementation cycles.

Given that I have utilized historical data analytics to set advanced alerts for three months, when I evaluate the impacts of these alerts, then I should see a measurable improvement in inventory turnover rates and fewer instances of stockouts or overstocking.

Mobile Accessibility for Alerts

"As a retail manager on the go, I want to receive and manage inventory alerts on my mobile device so that I can respond quickly to changes in stock levels no matter where I am."

Description

The Mobile Accessibility for Alerts requirement will ensure that users can receive and manage inventory alerts on their mobile devices through a dedicated app or responsive web interface. This feature addresses the need for on-the-go access to important inventory notifications, enabling retail managers to remain responsive no matter where they are. The alerts will be synchronized with the desktop version to ensure consistency and reliability of information across devices. The integration will be seamlessly engineered within the existing Mobile App Development process for RetailRevolution. The anticipated outcome is enhanced user engagement and improved response times to inventory alerts.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an inventory alert notification on their mobile device while managing retail operations remotely.

Given that the user has the RetailRevolution mobile app installed, when an inventory alert is triggered, then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile device within 5 minutes of the alert being generated.

User interacts with the inventory alert notification to view details on their mobile device.

Given that the user receives a push notification for an inventory alert, when the user taps on the notification, then they should be directed to the detailed alert view within the app, displaying relevant inventory information.

User updates inventory levels from the mobile device in response to an alert.

Given that the user is viewing an inventory alert on their mobile device, when they choose to update inventory levels directly from the alert, then the updated levels should sync automatically with the desktop version and reflect changes instantaneously.

User checks the history of inventory alerts on their mobile device to assess past notifications.

Given that the user is in the mobile app, when they access the 'Alerts History' section, then they should see a chronological list of previous inventory alerts, including timestamps and alert details.

User ensures that the mobile app is synchronized with desktop notifications for consistency in inventory alerts.

Given that the user has received inventory alerts on both mobile and desktop, when they check the alert settings on either device, then both devices should indicate the same pending and acknowledged alert statuses.

User customizes notification settings for inventory alerts on their mobile device.

Given that the user is in the settings section of the mobile app, when they select notification preferences, then they should be able to customize alert types (e.g., stock levels, reorder alerts) and save the settings successfully.

User shares an inventory alert with team members through the mobile app.

Given that the user has received an inventory alert, when they select the share option and choose team members, then those selected team members should receive the shared alert notification via their mobile app or email.

Integration with Third-Party Market Data

"As a retail strategist, I want to integrate external market data into my alert system so that I can refine our inventory decisions based on broader trends and competitive insights."

Description

The Integration with Third-Party Market Data will enhance the Alerts and Notifications Hub by allowing it to utilize external market data sources, such as sales trends and competitor stock information, to provide more accurate and actionable alerts. This integration will allow retailers to refine their inventory strategies based on broader market movements and customer preferences. The feature will be implemented through APIs that connect RetailRevolution with selected third-party data providers. The expected outcome is a more informed approach to inventory management, resulting in better alignment with market conditions and customer demands.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of third-party market data to enhance inventory alerts.

Given that the integration with third-party market data has been successfully set up, when new market data is received, then the Alerts and Notifications Hub should update the inventory alerts within 5 minutes based on the new data.

User receives timely notifications based on updated market data.

Given that market conditions have changed and new competitor stock information is available, when a significant market trend is detected, then the user should receive an alert notification immediately on their dashboard and via email.

Accuracy of alerts based on integrated market data.

Given access to both internal sales data and third-party market data, when an analytics report is generated, then at least 90% of the inventory alerts should align with actual sales trends observed in the following week.

User options for customizing alert thresholds.

Given the Alerts and Notifications Hub is functional, when a user accesses the settings, then they should be able to customize alert thresholds for inventory reorders and receive notifications based on their specified criteria.

Testing API connections with third-party data providers.

Given the APIs are established for third-party data integration, when a connection test is conducted, then the system should successfully retrieve, parse, and store data from the third-party provider without errors.

Historical accuracy of inventory alerts post-implementation.

Given that the integration with third-party market data has been completed, when historical sales data is analyzed over a one-month period, then at least 85% of inventory decisions made based on alerts should reflect accurate stock levels needed for optimal sales.

User training and documentation availability.

Given the new feature has been implemented, when the user accesses the help section, then they should find comprehensive documentation and training materials covering how to utilize the third-party integration and understand alerts.

User-Friendly Insights Dashboard

The User-Friendly Insights Dashboard presents all predictive analytics in a clear, easily digestible format. Retailers can visualize inventory forecasts, trends, and key performance indicators (KPIs) at a glance, facilitating quick decision-making. This feature enhances user experience by ensuring that critical information is readily accessible and actionable, driving better business outcomes.

Requirements

Dynamic KPI Visualization

"As an inventory manager, I want to easily visualize and interact with key performance indicators so that I can quickly assess business performance and make informed inventory decisions."

Description

The Dynamic KPI Visualization requirement mandates the development of interactive and visually engaging charts and graphs that represent key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to inventory management. This feature will allow users to customize the view and track metrics such as stock turnover rates, sales trends, and inventory accuracy over time. The inclusion of drill-down capabilities will enable users to analyze the underlying factors behind the displayed metrics, providing a more comprehensive understanding of business performance. The anticipated outcome is a more informed decision-making process driven by vivid, accessible data representations that can highlight both opportunities and areas for improvement.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Dynamic KPI Visualization dashboard to monitor stock turnover rates at the end of a quarter, expecting to see clear graphs that highlight inventory activity.

Given the user is logged into the system, when they access the Dynamic KPI Visualization dashboard, then they should see interactive charts representing stock turnover rates with daily, weekly, and monthly options to customize the view.

A retailer analyzes sales trends through the Dynamic KPI Visualization dashboard during a promotional campaign to assess its effectiveness in real-time.

Given the user selects the sales trends option on the dashboard during the promotional period, when they apply filters for date range and product categories, then the dashboard should display real-time sales data overlaid on a graph for quick visualization.

An inventory manager needs to drill down into inventory accuracy to understand discrepancies after a stock audit.

Given the user selects the inventory accuracy KPI on the dashboard, when they use the drill-down feature, then they should be able to access detailed metrics showing discrepancies by product and location.

A business owner wants to view key performance indicators related to recent stockouts caused by supplier delays.

Given the user accesses the Dynamic KPI Visualization, when they navigate to the stockout trends section, then they should see an interactive graph displaying stockout incidents over the last three months and their effect on sales.

A retailer uses the dashboard to visualize the overall performance of multiple stores for a quick comparison of inventory metrics.

Given the user selects the multi-store view option, when they review the KPIs, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of all stores' key metrics, including inventory turnover and sales figures.

An analyst wants to generate a report on inventory trends over the last year to present to stakeholders.

Given the user selects the yearly trend report feature, when they initiate the report download, then the system should provide a comprehensive PDF report containing visualized trend data and insights on inventory performance over the last year.

A user seeks clarification on the trends in the Dynamic KPI Visualization by attending to the tooltips and explanatory legends provided by the system.

Given the user hovers over any data point on the dashboard, when they interact with the tooltips, then they should receive detailed descriptions and explanations of the data metrics displayed.

Automated Trend Alerts

"As a retail manager, I want to receive automated alerts about significant inventory trends so that I can take immediate action to prevent stock issues before they arise."

Description

The Automated Trend Alerts requirement involves creating a notification system that monitors real-time inventory data and identifies significant trends or anomalies. Users will receive alerts via email or within the dashboard when specific thresholds are exceeded or when patterns indicating overstocking or stockouts are detected. This proactive feature aims to keep users informed about critical inventory changes, allowing for timely interventions and better stock management. The integration with existing data feeds and machine learning algorithms will enhance its effectiveness, ensuring that alerts are relevant and actionable to drive optimal inventory practices.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an email alert when inventory levels for a specific product fall below a defined threshold.

Given the inventory threshold for low stock is set at 20 units, when the inventory for a product falls to 19 units or below, then an email alert is sent to the user.

User is notified within the dashboard when overstock conditions are detected after a restock event.

Given the maximum threshold for overstock is set at 100 units, when inventory levels exceed 100 units following a restock, then a notification appears on the user's dashboard.

User accesses the insights dashboard and views historical trend data to inform purchasing decisions.

Given the user is on the insights dashboard, when they select a specific product, then they can view a visual representation of the last 12 months of sales data and inventory levels.

Automated alerts are triggered by machine learning to reflect seasonal demand changes in inventory.

Given the machine learning algorithm has been trained with past sales data for seasonal products, when the algorithm identifies a pattern indicating increased demand for winter jackets, then it sends an alert for users to review inventory levels.

User wants to customize alert thresholds for various products based on unique sales patterns.

Given the admin interface allows configuration, when the admin sets a low stock threshold of 10 units for 'Product A' and a threshold of 30 units for 'Product B', then alerts are generated based on the customized thresholds for each product.

User receives real-time trend alerts when anomalies in sales data occur, such as sudden spikes in demand.

Given a predefined alert for sudden demand spikes is activated, when daily sales for a product increase by more than 50% compared to the previous week, then a trend alert is sent to the user via the dashboard.

Customizable Dashboard Layouts

"As a store owner, I want to customize the layout of my Insights Dashboard so that I can focus on the data that matters most to my business operations."

Description

The Customizable Dashboard Layouts requirement enables users to tailor the Insights Dashboard to meet their specific needs and preferences by rearranging, adding, or removing widgets. Users will have the option to select the metrics they deem most crucial, allowing them to create a personalized view that fits their workflow. By providing flexibility in layout design, this feature enhances user engagement and satisfaction, as individuals can prioritize information that aligns with their operational focus. The expected outcome is a more productive and user-centric dashboard experience that adapts to varying business needs.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to rearrange the dashboard widgets to prioritize metrics that are most relevant to my daily operations, allowing me to visualize critical data first thing in the morning.

Given I am logged into my RetailRevolution account, when I drag and drop the widgets to rearrange them, then the dashboard should update immediately to reflect the new layout without any errors.

As a user, I want to add widgets for specific KPIs that are essential for my stock management, so I can monitor those metrics continually from my Insights Dashboard.

Given I am on the Insights Dashboard, when I select 'Add Widget' and choose a KPI from the options presented, then the selected widget should appear on my dashboard without needing a page refresh.

As a retailer, I wish to remove widgets that I no longer find useful, enabling me to keep my dashboard uncluttered and focused on what matters most.

Given I have widgets on my dashboard, when I click the 'remove' icon on a widget, then that widget should disappear from the dashboard instantly, and I should receive a confirmation message.

As a user, I want my customized dashboard layout to be saved automatically, ensuring that I don't lose my preferred configurations every time I log in.

Given I have rearranged or customized my dashboard, when I log out and log back in, then my customized dashboard layout should be displayed as I saved it, retaining all widget positions and configurations.

As a user, I want the ability to reset my dashboard to the default layout in case I want to start fresh, allowing me to easily revert changes.

Given I am viewing my customized dashboard, when I click on 'Reset to Default', then all widgets should return to their original positions, and a notification confirms the reset action.

As a retailer using multiple locations, I want to customize the dashboard layout differently for each location to focus on location-specific metrics and KPIs.

Given I have access to the dashboard for different retail locations, when I switch between location profiles, then the dashboard should display the appropriate layout and widgets specific to that location without overlap.

Mobile-Friendly Interface

"As a retail manager, I want to access the Insights Dashboard on my mobile device so that I can monitor inventory data and trends while away from my desk."

Description

The Mobile-Friendly Interface requirement ensures that the Insights Dashboard is fully responsive and accessible on mobile devices. This feature aims to provide retail managers the ability to track and analyze inventory data on-the-go. Optimizing the dashboard for various screen sizes and touch interactions will enhance usability, allowing users to monitor KPIs and receive notifications seamlessly from their smartphones or tablets. By implementing mobile functionality, the goal is to support retail professionals in making real-time, informed decisions, regardless of their location.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager checking inventory levels while on a business trip to ensure stock availability for an upcoming sale.

Given the mobile app is open, when the user reviews the insights dashboard, then the dashboard should display real-time inventory levels accurately across all locations within 2 seconds of the last update.

A retail manager receiving a notification on their mobile device about low stock levels for a fast-selling product.

Given a product is selling quickly, when the stock level falls below the defined threshold, then the mobile app must send an automatic alert to the user within 5 minutes of the threshold being met.

Store managers analyzing sales trends on their tablets during a team meeting.

Given the mobile interface is accessed, when the managers select the 'Sales Trends' tab, then the system should display the sales trends graphically, adjusting to the screen size without loss of data detail or clarity.

A retail professional trying to navigate the insights dashboard on a smartphone while walking through the store.

Given the mobile-friendly interface, when the user navigates through various dashboard sections, then all elements must be easily clickable without zooming, maintaining visibility and interactivity for the user.

A store manager reviewing KPIs on their tablet before making purchasing decisions.

Given the dashboard is accessed on a tablet, when the user selects different KPIs, then the information must be presented within 3 taps and provide all relevant details needed to inform purchasing decisions immediately.

In-depth Data Filtering Options

"As a data analyst, I want to filter inventory data based on specific criteria so that I can conduct thorough analyses and derive actionable insights."

Description

The In-depth Data Filtering Options requirement focuses on enhancing the analytical capabilities of the Insights Dashboard by allowing users to apply various filters to the displayed data. Users will be able to filter information based on criteria such as product categories, time frames, or sales channels. This capability is essential for conducting detailed analyses of inventory performance and trends, enabling retailers to uncover insights that would otherwise remain hidden. The expected benefit is a more robust analytical toolkit that empowers users to make data-driven decisions tailored to specific aspects of their business operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User applies filters to view sales data for a specific product category over the last quarter.

Given that the user has selected a specific product category and time frame, when they click on the 'Apply Filters' button, then the dashboard should update to only display sales data for the selected category and time period.

User wants to analyze sales performance across different sales channels for the past month.

Given that the user selects multiple sales channels and sets the time frame to the last month, when the user applies these filters, then the Insights Dashboard should refresh to show analytics relevant only to the chosen sales channels and date range.

User needs to track inventory forecasts for different product categories in real-time.

Given that the user is on the Insights Dashboard, when they choose to filter by product category and apply the filter, then the dashboard should display real-time inventory forecasts relevant to that category.

User wants to view comparison metrics between two selected time frames.

Given that the user selects two different time frames for comparison, when they apply these filters, then the dashboard should provide comparative analytics showcasing trends and KPIs between the selected periods.

User attempts to reset all filters applied to the Insights Dashboard.

Given that the user has applied multiple filters to the dashboard, when they click on the 'Reset' button, then all filters should clear, and the dashboard should return to the default view displaying all data.

User seeks to visualize top-performing products across selected regions over the past year.

Given that the user filters data by regions and the last year, when they click 'Apply Filters', then the dashboard should display a list of top-performing products specifically for the selected regions and time frame.

User wishes to save their frequently used filter settings for future analysis.

Given that the user has configured a specific set of filters, when they choose to save these settings and name the configuration, then their filter settings should be retrievable for future sessions.

Scenario Planning Simulator

The Scenario Planning Simulator allows users to test various inventory management strategies based on different predictive inputs. Retailers can visualize outcomes of stocking decisions, seasonal shifts, or market changes, enabling them to strategize more effectively. This feature supports data-driven decision-making, allowing users to explore potential impacts before implementing changes.

Requirements

Dynamic Scenario Inputs

"As a retail manager, I want to input various market data scenarios into the simulator so that I can assess the potential impact of different inventory management strategies and make informed decisions to maximize sales and reduce waste."

Description

The Dynamic Scenario Inputs requirement enables users to input and modify variables such as stock levels, seasonal trends, and market shifts in real time. This functionality allows users to simulate varying conditions, enhancing their ability to plan inventory strategies effectively. By gathering data from various sources and presenting it cohesively, this requirement is crucial for users to explore potential outcomes and make informed decisions about their inventory management. The integration with existing data streams ensures responsiveness to current market dynamics, ultimately enabling retailers to optimize stock levels and improve their competitive edge.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully inputs seasonal trend data and modifies stock levels for the upcoming holiday season.

Given the user has accessed the Scenario Planning Simulator, when they input seasonal trends and adjust stock levels, then the system should display updated projected outcomes reflecting these inputs.

User tests the impact of a market shift on existing inventory levels using dynamic inputs.

Given the user selects a market shift scenario, when they adjust the relevant inputs, then the simulator should calculate and present potential stock adjustments required to meet projected demand.

User utilizes real-time market data to modify inventory strategies based on current consumer trends.

Given the user is logged into the platform, when they enable real-time integration with market data sources, then the system should automatically update inputs allowing the user to visualize new outcome scenarios.

User analyzes different stocking decisions for various product categories using dynamic inputs.

Given the user has created multiple scenarios for different product categories, when they run simulations, then the results should display comparative outcomes for each category, allowing for strategic decision-making.

User saves custom scenarios for later review and adaptation.

Given the user has created different input variations for scenario planning, when they opt to save these scenarios, then the system should provide confirmation that scenarios are saved and easily retrievable.

User evaluates the effectiveness of different inventory strategies against historical sales data.

Given the user has access to past sales data, when they input these data points into the scenario simulator, then the impact of historical data on current strategies should be clearly visualized for decision-making.

Visualization of Outcomes

"As a retail analyst, I want to see visualizations of the scenario outcomes so that I can easily communicate the effects of different inventory strategies to my team, enhancing our strategic discussions."

Description

The Visualization of Outcomes requirement provides graphical representations of the predicted impacts based on user-defined scenarios in the Scenario Planning Simulator. This includes charts, graphs, and dashboards that clearly depict key metrics such as projected sales, stock levels, and overstock risk. By visually displaying potential outcomes, this requirement enhances user comprehension and facilitates quicker decision-making. The integration of visual analytics empowers retailers to share insights with stakeholders easily, ensuring everyone is aligned on strategic decisions and enabling collaborative planning efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a short-term inventory scenario for the upcoming holiday season to assess required stock levels.

Given a user-defined scenario, When the user requests the visualization of outcomes, Then the system displays a dashboard showing projected sales, stock levels, and overstock risk using clear charts and graphs.

A retailer simulates the impact of a delayed shipment on inventory levels during a high-demand month.

Given a simulated scenario of delayed shipments, When the visualization is generated, Then the dashboard must accurately reflect decreased stock levels and adjusted projected sales metrics.

The user evaluates different restocking strategies to find the most cost-effective method for their store.

Given the availability of multiple restocking strategies, When visualizing outcomes, Then the system should allow the user to compare metrics like total cost, projected sales, and stockout risks side-by-side in an intuitive layout.

A store manager needs to present inventory forecasts to their team during a strategy meeting.

Given a completed scenario planning exercise, When the manager accesses the visualization tool, Then the system enables export of dashboards and charts for presentation purposes without loss of data quality or detail.

A retailer reviews outcomes post-implementation of a new marketing strategy to assess its effectiveness.

Given previous and current data, When comparing visualized outcomes of the marketing strategy, Then the graphs must clearly illustrate the sales increase and changes in stock levels due to the strategy.

Automated Forecast Adjustments

"As a supply chain director, I want the simulator to automatically adjust forecasts based on the latest data inputs so that we can stay ahead of market trends and make proactive decisions for inventory management."

Description

The Automated Forecast Adjustments requirement allows the Scenario Planning Simulator to automatically update predictions based on new data inputs and changing market conditions. This ensures that predictions remain accurate and relevant, adapting to real-time changes such as sales trends, customer behaviors, and external factors like economic shifts. By minimizing manual updates, this feature enhances operational efficiency, allowing users to focus on strategic planning rather than data upkeep. Integration with machine learning algorithms enhances prediction accuracy, thereby supporting data-driven decision-making in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a scenario planning session in the Scenario Planning Simulator to test the automated forecast adjustments feature.

Given a valid retail data input, When the user submits the data through the simulator, Then the system automatically updates the inventory forecast based on the new data inputs and displays the adjusted forecasts.

A retailer notices a market trend shift during a seasonal change and wants to assess its impact on inventory levels.

Given that a market trend is detected, When the Scenario Planning Simulator processes this trend, Then it updates the forecasts accordingly and suggests inventory adjustments based on the predicted outcomes.

The retailer reviews forecast accuracy through reports generated after implementing automated forecast adjustments based on real-time sales data.

Given that the user accesses the report section, When the report is generated, Then it displays forecast accuracy metrics showing at least a 15% improvement compared to prior manual forecasting techniques over the last quarter.

A user manually enters unexpected external factors affecting customer behavior into the simulator.

Given an input of external factors, When these factors are processed through the automated forecasting system, Then the forecasts must reflect changes in anticipated customer behaviors with accurate predictions.

The retailer implements a new promotional strategy that could affect stock levels and inventory management practices.

Given the new promotional data, When the Scenario Planning Simulator is run with this data, Then the system must adapt the forecasts to reflect the expected increase or decrease in demand for the promotional items.

The retailer receives a notification alert regarding an economic shift and must quickly assess its effect on inventory forecasts.

Given the notification of economic change, When the user runs the automated forecast adjustment, Then the system updates the inventory predictions in real-time, enabling the user to view potential impacts immediately.

A user wants to ensure that data integration with machine learning algorithms is functioning correctly.

Given a set of historical retail data, When the system processes this data with the machine learning algorithm, Then the updated forecasts should demonstrate enhancements in accuracy and relevancy compared to previous forecasts.

Scenario Comparison Tool

"As a business owner, I want to compare different inventory strategies using the simulator so that I can determine the best approach for maximizing efficiency and profitability."

Description

The Scenario Comparison Tool requirement empowers users to compare multiple inventory management strategies side-by-side. This feature allows users to analyze varying outcomes for different stock scenarios, pricing strategies, and promotional activities. By facilitating direct comparison, it aids retailers in identifying the most effective approach quickly and efficiently. This capability is essential for strategic planning and improves the user’s ability to select optimal inventory strategies based on comprehensive data analysis and real-time insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Functionality of the Scenario Comparison Tool for Retailers

Given a user has accessed the Scenario Comparison Tool, when they input multiple inventory management strategies and submit them for comparison, then the tool should display a side-by-side analysis of the selected strategies with relevant metrics such as projected inventory levels, estimated revenue, and cost implications.

User Interaction with the Scenario Comparison Tool

Given a retailer is utilizing the Scenario Comparison Tool, when they select different parameters such as stock scenarios, pricing strategies, and promotional activities, then the system should allow them to easily toggle between selections and visualize changes in outcomes without errors.

Data Accuracy in the Scenario Comparison Tool

Given that the user has simulated various inventory management strategies, when the user compares the outcomes, then the data presented should be accurate and consistent with the input data, reflecting real-time analytics without discrepancies.

Usability of the Scenario Comparison Tool

Given a user is using the Scenario Comparison Tool, when they interact with any of the features provided, then the tool should be intuitive, with accessible help prompts or tooltips that guide the user through comparisons without causing confusion.

Integration of the Scenario Comparison Tool with Existing Systems

Given the Scenario Comparison Tool is deployed, when users link the tool with their existing POS systems, then the tool should seamlessly integrate and pull historical inventory data automatically for accurate decision-making.

Performance of the Scenario Comparison Tool Under Load

Given multiple retail users are accessing the Scenario Comparison Tool simultaneously, when they perform comparisons and analyses, then the tool's response time should remain under two seconds per action, ensuring a smooth user experience.

Reporting Capabilities of the Scenario Comparison Tool

Given a user has conducted a series of inventory comparisons, when they choose to export their findings, then the tool should generate a comprehensive report that includes charts, graphs, and detailed metrics for easy sharing and review.

User-Friendly Interface

"As a store associate, I want the scenario simulator to be easy to use so that I can effectively participate in decision-making processes without needing extensive training."

Description

The User-Friendly Interface requirement is designed to ensure that the Scenario Planning Simulator is intuitive and accessible for all users, regardless of technical proficiency. This includes simplifying navigation, providing onboarding tutorials, and offering contextual help throughout the simulation process. An easy-to-use interface enhances user engagement and reduces the learning curve, ensuring that all retail staff can leverage the simulator effectively. By making the simulator more approachable, this feature encourages broader adoption across the organization, helping to embed data-driven decision-making into the company culture.

Acceptance Criteria

Scenario for navigating the Scenario Planning Simulator as a new user without any prior experience.

Given a new user opens the Scenario Planning Simulator for the first time, When they land on the main dashboard, Then they can access a guided tutorial that walks them through each feature and how to use it effectively.

Scenario for contextual help during the simulation process to assist users in making decisions.

Given a user is actively using the Scenario Planning Simulator, When they hover over various options and features, Then they receive tooltips or contextual help that explains each option in simple language.

Scenario for onboarding training for new staff members on using the Scenario Planning Simulator.

Given a new staff member joins the retail team, When they complete the onboarding process, Then they have access to at least three training sessions that cover the basics of the Scenario Planning Simulator and its functionalities.

Scenario for testing the interface responsiveness across different devices and screen sizes.

Given a user accesses the Scenario Planning Simulator on various devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), When they navigate through the interface, Then the layout remains user-friendly and functional on all device types without any loss of features or user experience.

Scenario for user feedback collection on the interface after using the Scenario Planning Simulator.

Given a user has completed a simulation in the Scenario Planning Simulator, When prompted for feedback, Then they can submit their opinions on the usability of the interface, and at least 80% of users report they found it easy to use.

Scenario for emergency support options during simulation use for users encountering issues.

Given a user is utilizing the Scenario Planning Simulator, When they encounter any technical difficulties, Then they can easily access support through a visible help button that connects them to live chat or a help desk within 2 clicks.

Real-Time Inventory Alignment

This feature ensures instantaneous synchronization of inventory levels across all sales channels—both online and offline—enabling retailers to maintain consistent stock visibility at all times. Users benefit from enhanced accuracy in stock reporting, which minimizes the chances of stockouts or overstock situations. This not only improves customer satisfaction by ensuring product availability but also streamlines operational efficiency in inventory management.

Requirements

Centralized Inventory Dashboard

"As a store manager, I want to view all my inventory levels in one central dashboard so that I can quickly identify restocking needs and avoid overstocking."

Description

The Centralized Inventory Dashboard provides a comprehensive view of all inventory levels across various sales channels in one place. It allows users to monitor stock levels in real-time, with an intuitive interface that aggregates data from online and offline sales. This feature enhances visibility into inventory management, enabling retailers to make informed decisions quickly. The dashboard displays critical metrics such as stock levels, sales trends, and alerts for low stock conditions, streamlining inventory oversight and minimizing the risk of stock discrepancies across multiple channels.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to view all my inventory levels across different sales channels on a single dashboard to ensure I make informed reordering decisions.

Given I am logged into the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I navigate to the inventory view, then I should see the current stock levels for all products aggregated from both online and offline sales channels.

As a manager, I need the dashboard to provide alerts for low stock items so that I can take action before stockouts occur.

Given I have set thresholds for stock levels in the dashboard, when the stock of any item falls below the threshold, then I should receive an alert notification within the dashboard.

As a store owner, I want to monitor sales trends over time to optimize my inventory levels and avoid overstock situations.

Given I am on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I access the sales trends feature, then I should be able to view trends for the past month, including best-selling and slow-moving products.

As a user, I want to filter inventory data by product category so that I can analyze stock levels specific to different segments of my store.

Given I am using the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I apply a filter for a specific product category, then only products within that category should be displayed along with their respective stock levels.

As a retailer, I want to see historical inventory data to evaluate stock management performance over time.

Given I am on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I select the historical view option, then I should be able to see inventory levels and sales data for the past three months aggregated by day.

As a business owner, I want the dashboard to be accessible across all devices so that I can review inventory levels on the go.

Given I access the Centralized Inventory Dashboard from a mobile device, when I log in, then I should be able to access all functionalities of the dashboard as I would from a desktop.

As a user managing multiple locations, I want to see inventory levels for each store location clearly displayed on the dashboard.

Given I am on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I select the 'View by Location' option, then I should see inventory levels displayed separately for each of my store locations.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a retail owner, I want to receive automatic alerts when inventory is low so that I can restock in time and prevent stockouts."

Description

The Automated Restocking Alerts feature sends proactive notifications to users when inventory falls below predefined thresholds. This functionality ensures that retailers can maintain optimal stock levels, reducing the likelihood of stockouts and lost sales. Users can customize alert settings based on product categories and sales velocity, allowing for tailored inventory management strategies. By implementing this feature, RetailRevolution empowers retailers to make timely replenishment decisions, enhancing customer satisfaction by ensuring product availability.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a restocking alert when inventory of a frequently sold product falls below the predefined threshold during a peak sales period.

Given that the inventory level of a frequently sold product is below the predefined threshold, when the threshold is crossed, then the system sends a restocking alert to the designated user via email and push notification.

A user customizes restocking alert thresholds for different product categories and verifies the system reflects these changes accurately.

Given that the user sets different thresholds for various product categories, when the user saves these settings, then the system must update the thresholds accordingly and reflect them in the inventory management dashboard without errors.

Inventory for a product is replenished, and the user checks if the automated restocking alert ceases once inventory levels are restored above the threshold.

Given that the inventory level of a product has been replenished above the predefined threshold, when the replenishment is confirmed in the system, then the automated restocking alert for that product should no longer be active until future inventory drops below the threshold.

When inventory levels are updated in the system, users verify that the restocking alerts adjust in real-time based on the latest inventory figures.

Given that inventory levels are updated either manually or through a new shipment entry, when the new levels are processed, then the system recalculates and adjusts the restocking alert notifications based on the updated inventory data.

Users test the responsiveness and delivery method of restocking alerts by temporarily lowering the inventory of a critical item and observing the notifications received.

Given that the user lowers the inventory level of a critical product below the threshold, when this occurs, then the user should receive a restocking alert via the selected communication method (email/push notification) within 5 minutes.

Multi-Channel Synchronization

"As a customer, I want to see the accurate availability of products across all shopping channels so that I can make informed purchasing decisions."

Description

The Multi-Channel Synchronization feature ensures that inventory data is consistently updated across all sales platforms, including e-commerce websites, brick-and-mortar stores, and mobile apps. This synchronized approach eliminates discrepancies and ensures that customers see accurate inventory levels, thereby enhancing their shopping experience. Retailers will appreciate the seamless integration of sales data, which supports informed decision-making and reduces operational errors related to inventory management. This functionality is crucial for businesses aiming to provide a cohesive and fluent omnichannel experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Update After Sale in a Brick-and-Mortar Store

Given a sale is made in a brick-and-mortar store, when the POS system updates the inventory, then the stock level for that item should reflect the sale in all connected sales channels within 5 minutes.

Online Order with Multiple Stock Locations

Given an online order is placed for a product available in multiple stock locations, when the inventory is synchronized, then the inventory levels across all channels should update to reflect the true availability within 10 minutes.

Product Return Processed

Given a product is returned to a brick-and-mortar store, when the return is processed in the POS system, then the inventory levels should be updated in real-time across all sales channels to include the returned product.

Stock Level Alert for Low Inventory

Given an item in inventory falls below a predefined threshold, when the inventory is synchronized, then an automated restocking alert should be generated and shown to the retailer in the inventory management dashboard.

Synchronization During High Traffic Events

Given a high-traffic sales event (like a holiday sale), when customers are shopping across channels, then the inventory levels should reflect real-time changes without any noticeable delays or discrepancies across all sales platforms.

Integration with E-Commerce Platform

Given that RetailRevolution is integrated with an e-commerce platform, when inventory changes occur in any channel, then the updated stock levels should be accurately displayed on the e-commerce site within 2 minutes.

Inventory Trend Forecasting

"As an inventory manager, I want to forecast future inventory needs based on sales trends so that I can efficiently manage stock levels throughout the year."

Description

The Inventory Trend Forecasting feature leverages historical sales data to predict future inventory needs accurately. By analyzing patterns in sales trends, seasonal fluctuations, and other factors, this tool helps retailers optimize their stock levels and prepare for demand surges. The forecasts are displayed in an easy-to-understand format, making it straightforward for users to adjust their inventory strategies proactively. This capability drives efficiency in inventory management and supports sustainable growth by preventing both overstocking and stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory data is accurately updated in real time across all sales channels when a sale is made, ensuring stock visibility is maintained without delay.

Given a sale is completed, when the inventory data is updated, then the inventory levels should reflect the sale in real time across all connected sales channels.

Users can view and interpret the inventory trend forecasts on the dashboard for decision-making purposes, allowing for proactive inventory adjustments.

Given the user accesses the trend forecasting dashboard, when the data loads, then the forecast should display in an easy-to-understand format, including historical data and future predictions for at least three months ahead.

Retailers can set automated alerts for restocking based on forecasted trends to prevent stockouts or overstock situations.

Given that a stock level reaches the defined threshold based on forecasted demand, when inventory levels drop below this threshold, then an automated restocking alert should be generated and sent to the user via their preferred communication method.

Historical sales data is successfully analyzed to generate accurate inventory forecasts without any discrepancies or errors.

Given the retailer has historical sales data available, when the Inventory Trend Forecasting feature processes this data, then the output forecast must not have discrepancies exceeding 5% when compared with actual sales for the same period.

Retailers view accurate forecasts that take into account seasonal trends and promotional periods to help plan their inventory accordingly.

Given that the user selects a date range including a promotional event, when the forecast is generated, then it should accurately reflect anticipated sales increases during that promotion based on historical data from previous years.

Integration with the existing POS systems ensures the seamless flow of data for precise inventory tracking and forecasting.

Given that the POS system is connected to RetailRevolution, when a sale occurs, then the inventory level should automatically adjust in both the POS and the RetailRevolution platform without lag or manual input.

Users can easily adjust their inventory strategies based on the data provided by the trend forecasting feature, allowing them to make informed decisions.

Given the user accesses the Inventory Trend Forecasting feature, when they review the forecast data, then they should have the ability to make and save adjustments to their inventory quantities within three clicks, with all changes being reflected in real-time.

Mobile Access and Notifications

"As a retail manager, I want to access my inventory system on my mobile device so that I can manage stock levels even when I’m not in the store."

Description

The Mobile Access and Notifications feature allows users to access inventory information and receive critical alerts via mobile devices. This functionality caters to the on-the-go lifestyle of retail managers, enabling them to stay connected to their inventory management tasks anytime, anywhere. Users can view real-time stock levels, receive alerts for low inventory, and make decisions while away from their physical store locations. This flexibility not only increases operational efficiency but also empowers retailers to respond quickly to inventory changes and customer inquiries.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses inventory information via a mobile app while attending a retail conference and receives a notification about low stock levels for a trending product.

Given the user is logged into the mobile app, When the inventory level for a product falls below the predefined threshold, Then the user should receive a real-time notification alerting them of the low stock.

Retail managers view stock levels on their mobile devices during a sales event to ensure popular items are readily available.

Given the user opens the mobile app during an event, When they navigate to the inventory section, Then the app should display real-time stock levels for all products accurately.

A store manager receives an alert on their mobile device about a restock requirement for a seasonal item while on a business trip.

Given the user has set up notifications for specific products, When the inventory for one of those products falls below the minimum level, Then the system should send a push notification to the user's mobile device immediately.

The user accesses inventory data remotely while traveling to evaluate stock levels for multiple locations in real-time.

Given the user is in the mobile app, When they select a specific store location, Then the app should display the current inventory status and sales information for that location without delay.

A retail manager wants to update inventory levels from their mobile device after receiving a notification about low stock on a fast-selling item.

Given the user receives a notification for low stock, When they select the option to update stock levels, Then they can input and submit the new quantity which reflects immediately in the inventory system.

User uses the mobile app to view analytics on inventory turnover while away from the office to make informed restocking decisions.

Given the user is logged into the app, When they navigate to the analytics section, Then they should be able to view inventory turnover rates and trends for the past month in real-time.

The user needs to review restocking alerts while in a meeting to ensure they don’t miss an important reorder.

Given the user is attending a meeting and has the mobile app open, When a restock alert is triggered, Then the app should provide a banner alert visible without interrupting other activities on the device.

Automated Stock Level Adjustments

Automated Stock Level Adjustments dynamically update inventory counts in real time as sales are made across different channels. This feature allows retailers to respond quickly to changes in demand, ensuring that stock levels are always reflective of the current situation, thus preventing sales loss due to untracked sales fluctuations. The direct impact is improved operational efficiency and the ability to capitalize on sales opportunities.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Synchronization

"As a retail manager, I want real-time inventory synchronization so that I can ensure stock levels are always accurate across all sales channels, minimizing the risk of overselling and improving customer satisfaction."

Description

Real-time Inventory Synchronization ensures that all inventory counts are updated instantly across all sales channels as transactions occur. This requirement is critical to maintaining accuracy in stock levels, providing retailers with a true representation of inventory available for sale. By integrating with POS systems and e-commerce platforms, this functionality enables retailers to monitor stock levels effectively, reducing the risk of overselling and ensuring a seamless customer experience. Improved inventory accuracy directly correlates with increased sales opportunities and operational efficiency, as retailers can respond promptly to changes in demand based on accurate data.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory updates occur in real-time across all sales channels during active sales periods, ensuring that stock levels reflect accurate counts at any moment.

Given an inventory count of 100 units, when a sale of 5 units is made across any sales channel, then the system should update the inventory count to 95 units within 5 seconds.

A retailer accesses their dashboard after a sale has been made to check the current inventory levels, expecting to see an accurate count post-sale.

Given a recent sale transaction has occurred, when the retailer refreshes the dashboard, then the displayed inventory levels should reflect the reduced amount based on the sale instantly.

An automated alert is triggered when stock levels fall below a predetermined threshold across all sales channels due to sales activity.

Given stock levels fall below the defined threshold of 20 units, when sales transactions occur that reduce stock, then the system should generate an automated restock alert to designated personnel.

A customer attempts to purchase a product that is low in stock during peak shopping hours, requiring immediate inventory adjustments to prevent overselling.

Given the stock level of a product is at 2 units, when a customer attempts to purchase that product, then the system should prevent the sale if it cannot update to reflect real-time availability, ensuring no overselling occurs.

The retailer integrates a new e-commerce platform with the existing inventory management system to ensure real-time stock levels are synchronized.

Given the new e-commerce platform goes live, when products are sold through this channel, then the inventory counts should update in real-time across all platforms without manual intervention.

Inventory levels are monitored during a promotional event to evaluate sales performance and stock usage.

Given a promotional event is ongoing, when inventory sales surpass expectations, then updates to stock levels should occur in real-time more than once per minute, showcasing accurate sales data.

Management requires a comprehensive report at the end of the day to understand inventory changes across all sales channels.

Given the end of day report is generated, when reviewed, then all inventory adjustments from the day's sales should be accurately reflected in the report with no discrepancies.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a store owner, I want automated restocking alerts so that I can replenish critical stock before it runs out, thereby preventing lost sales and ensuring customer satisfaction."

Description

Automated Restocking Alerts trigger notifications to retail managers when stock levels fall below a predefined threshold. This proactive requirement allows retailers to maintain optimal inventory levels by ensuring timely restocking before items run out. The integration of this feature with current sales data and inventory levels will provide insights on restock timings, which ultimately prevents stockouts and maximizes sales potential. By reducing the chances of running out of popular items, retailers can enhance customer satisfaction and loyalty while safeguarding sales revenue.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager receives a notification when the stock level of a high-demand product falls below the predefined threshold level.

Given that the stock level of a product falls below the predefined threshold, when sales data is updated, then the retail manager should receive a notification via the inventory management system.

The system integrates with POS systems to track sales in real time, updating stock levels automatically.

Given that a sale is made at the POS, when the transaction completes, then the stock level in the inventory management system should update in real time to reflect the new count.

Retail manager checks the automated restocking alerts dashboard for products that need restocking.

Given that the retail manager accesses the restocking alerts dashboard, when the dashboard loads, then it should display a list of products that are below the threshold and require restocking, including suggested restock quantities.

Retail manager validates the accuracy of stock level updates after multiple sales transactions.

Given that multiple sales have occurred, when the retail manager reviews the stock levels in the inventory management system, then the stock levels should reflect the exact quantity sold and match the expected stock levels.

Alerts are generated for products reaching the threshold across different retail locations.

Given that products are sold across multiple locations, when the stock level of a product falls below the predefined threshold at any location, then alerts should be sent to the respective location's retail manager.

The system offers suggested restock times based on sales trends.

Given that the automated restocking alerts are triggered, when the retail manager reviews the alerts, then the system should provide suggested restock times based on historical sales data for those products.

Multi-Channel Sales Tracking

"As a retail analyst, I want multi-channel sales tracking so that I can analyze how different sales channels perform, allowing me to make informed decisions about marketing strategies and inventory allocation."

Description

Multi-Channel Sales Tracking provides retailers with the capability to monitor sales performance across various channels such as online, in-store, and mobile. This requirement involves integrating data from different sales channels into a unified dashboard, offering actionable insights and allowing retailers to identify trends and performance metrics. By understanding where sales are coming from, retailers can better allocate resources, tailor marketing efforts, and adapt inventory strategies to align with consumer behavior, increasing profitability and growth opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

Tracking Sales Across Multiple Channels in Real Time

Given a retail business using the RetailRevolution platform, when a sale is made through any sales channel (online, in-store, or mobile), then the inventory should automatically adjust in real-time to reflect the new stock levels without manual input.

Generating Unified Sales Reports Across Channels

Given that sales data has been captured from multiple channels, when a retailer accesses the unified dashboard, then they should see aggregated sales performance metrics from all channels displayed clearly within a single report.

Identifying Sales Trends by Channel Over Time

Given that the Multi-Channel Sales Tracking feature is fully implemented, when a retailer views the sales report over a specified period, then they should be able to analyze trends and performance metrics for each individual channel.

Automated Alerts for Stock Adjustments Based on Real-Time Sales

Given that automated stock level adjustments are enabled, when stock levels decrease below predetermined thresholds due to sales, then the system should send automated alerts to the retailer for restocking.

Evaluating the Effectiveness of Marketing Campaigns by Channel

Given that the Multi-Channel Sales Tracking feature is utilized, when a marketing campaign is launched, then the retailer should be able to assess which channel generated the most sales and determine the ROI of the campaign.

Integrating POS Data with Inventory Management in Real Time

Given that RetailRevolution is integrated with existing POS systems, when a transaction occurs, then the sales data should be transmitted to the inventory management system immediately, ensuring accurate stock levels.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Inventory Management

"As a retail employee, I want a user-friendly dashboard for inventory management so that I can efficiently access stock information and respond quickly to operational needs."

Description

A User-Friendly Dashboard for Inventory Management centralizes vital inventory data, presenting it in a visually appealing and easily navigable format. This requirement focuses on design and usability, ensuring that users can quickly access critical information such as stock levels, sales trends, and alerts. By providing accessibility to real-time data through an intuitive interface, retailers can make quick decisions, improve responsiveness to market changes, and elevate operational efficiency. A well-designed dashboard will help users engage more effectively with their inventory management process.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the dashboard on a mobile device while on the sales floor to quickly check stock levels during a busy retail period.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they navigate to the stock levels section, then the dashboard displays real-time inventory counts and is responsive within 2 seconds.

User customizes their dashboard view to prioritize specific metrics related to sales trends and alerts.

Given the user is on their dashboard, when they select preferred metrics and save the layout, then the dashboard should retain the customized view upon refresh and logout.

The user receives automated alerts on the dashboard when stock levels fall below a predefined threshold.

Given the user has set stock thresholds for specific items, when an item’s stock falls below that threshold, then an alert is displayed prominently on the dashboard.

User interacts with the dashboard to analyze sales trends over the past month to inform restocking decisions.

Given the user selects the sales trends option and filters for the past month, when they view the graph, then the graph accurately reflects sales data and can be exported as a CSV file.

User logs into the dashboard from a desktop to review daily sales and inventory data at the start of a reporting period.

Given the user logs into the dashboard, when they land on the homepage, then the homepage displays key performance indicators (KPIs) for the previous day and the ability to drill down for more detailed views.

User wants to ensure they can easily navigate between different inventory locations through the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they select a specific location from the location dropdown menu, then the dashboard updates to display relevant inventory data for that location without artifacts or delays.

Historical Data Analytics for Inventory Forecasting

"As a supply chain manager, I want historical data analytics for inventory forecasting so that I can predict future inventory needs based on past sales data, allowing for more accurate restocking decisions."

Description

Historical Data Analytics for Inventory Forecasting leverages past sales data to predict future demand, enhancing planning capabilities for retailers. This requirement involves employing data analytics tools to identify trends and seasonality that influence inventory needs. Retailers can use these insights to optimize stock levels, reduce excessive holding costs, and prevent stockouts during peak periods. By understanding historical purchasing behavior, retailers can implement data-driven strategies that align inventory with consumer demand, leading to increased efficiency and profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical data analytics allows a retailer to forecast inventory needs based on sales patterns from the previous year.

Given that I have access to historical sales data for the past year, When I utilize the predictive analytics tools in RetailRevolution, Then I can generate an accurate forecast report for upcoming inventory needs, which includes projected quantities for each product based on sales trends.

A retailer uses the system to view seasonal sales trends to adjust inventory levels ahead of peak shopping seasons.

Given that a specific holiday season is approaching, When I analyze the seasonal sales trends report in RetailRevolution, Then I must see a recommendation for adjusting stock levels for each product based on historical sales data for that season.

The retailer needs to adjust inventory after analyzing weekly sales data to prevent stockouts during a sales promotion.

Given that I am running a sales promotion, When I access the historical data analytics feature, Then I should receive an automated alert to increase stock for products that have historically sold out during similar promotions.

Inventory levels are adjusted in real time based on historical purchasing behavior during specific times of the year.

Given that I have enabled real-time stock adjustments, When a surge in demand occurs based on historical trends, Then the system automatically updates stock levels to reflect the increased demand without manual intervention.

A retailer evaluates the impact of promotional events on inventory to better forecast future campaigns.

Given that I have conducted promotional events in the past, When I analyze the historical data following each event, Then I should be able to identify which products experienced an increase in sales and need to be stocked more for future campaigns.

The retailer compares projected inventory needs against actual sales data after a season.

Given that the season has concluded, When I review the inventory reports provided by RetailRevolution, Then I can compare the forecasted inventory needs against the actual sales data to measure forecasting accuracy and plan improvements.

During inventory reviews, a retailer should be able to identify slow-moving products using historical data analytics.

Given that I am reviewing inventory reports, When I analyze the sales data for the last six months, Then I should see a list of products categorized as slow-moving, with recommendations for reducing inventory levels or promoting sales for those items.

Cross-Platform Sales Insights

Cross-Platform Sales Insights provides comprehensive analytics that aggregate data from all sales channels. Retailers gain valuable insights into which products are performing best in each environment, allowing them to make informed decisions about inventory distribution. This feature empowers users to tailor their inventory strategies based on actual performance metrics, ultimately driving sales and enhancing profitability.

Requirements

Omni-Channel Data Aggregation

"As a retail manager, I want to view sales data from all of my channels in one dashboard so that I can easily analyze performance and make informed inventory decisions based on comprehensive insights."

Description

The Omni-Channel Data Aggregation requirement involves compiling sales data from various platforms such as e-commerce, brick-and-mortar stores, and mobile applications into a centralized dashboard. This feature enables retailers to view real-time performance metrics across all channels in one unified interface, enhancing visibility into sales trends and inventory turnover. By aggregating data effectively, retailers can identify top-selling products, seasonal patterns, and underperforming items, leading to informed decision-making on stock distribution and marketing strategies. This requirement is crucial for promoting a data-driven approach to retail management, allowing businesses to adapt swiftly to market changes and optimize their inventory strategies for maximum profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Data Visualization on Dashboard

Given that a retailer logs into the RetailRevolution platform, When they navigate to the Omni-Channel Data Aggregation dashboard, Then they should see real-time sales data aggregated from e-commerce, brick-and-mortar stores, and mobile applications displayed in a user-friendly interface.

Automated Performance Alerts for Top-Selling Products

Given that sales data is being continuously updated, When a product reaches a predefined sales threshold, Then the retailer receives an automated alert highlighting the top-selling product for potential restocking or promotion.

Cross-Channel Inventory Insights Generation

Given the retailer has multiple sales channels, When they apply filters on the Omni-Channel Data Aggregation dashboard for specified time periods, Then the platform should generate insights detailing inventory turnover rates and performance metrics for all sales channels during that period.

Identification of Underperforming Items

Given that sales data from all channels is aggregated, When the retailer requests a report on underperforming items, Then the system should provide a list of products with sales below the average threshold for a defined time frame.

Seasonal Sales Trend Analysis

Given the availability of historical sales data, When the retailer selects a seasonal timeframe on the dashboard, Then the system should display trend analysis graphs indicating sales performance variances across different channels for that season.

Data Export for Offline Analysis

Given that the retailer wants to analyze data offline, When they click on the 'Export' option in the Omni-Channel Data Aggregation dashboard, Then the system should allow them to download sales data in multiple formats (CSV, Excel) for offline analysis.

Integration with Existing POS Systems

Given that the retailer has an existing POS system, When they set up the Omni-Channel Data Aggregation feature, Then all sales data from the POS should sync automatically and be visible in the centralized dashboard within five minutes.

Custom Report Generation

"As a retail analyst, I want to generate custom reports that reflect the metrics I need so that I can focus my analysis on the aspects of our sales performance that are most crucial to our business."

Description

The Custom Report Generation requirement provides users with the capability to create tailored reports based on specific parameters such as time frame, product categories, sales performance, and geographical data. This feature will empower retailers to analyze data that is most relevant to their business needs, facilitating deeper insights into sales trends, customer preferences, and inventory effectiveness. The ability to generate custom reports enhances the overall functionality of the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature by allowing users to focus on the metrics that matter most to them, leading to better strategic planning and more targeted marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating a custom report for sales performance over the last quarter to analyze trends and identify best-selling products.

Given a user is on the Custom Report Generation page, when they select the time frame as 'Last Quarter' and the report type as 'Sales Performance', then they should be able to generate the report successfully and view detailed metrics of sales per product.

Creating a custom report that filters products by category to understand the performance of specific inventory segments.

Given a user is on the Custom Report Generation page, when they filter the products by selecting 'Electronics' and submit the report, then the report should display sales data and performance metrics only for 'Electronics' products.

Exporting a custom report to analyze sales data geographically to assist in targeted marketing efforts.

Given a user has generated a custom report that includes geographical data, when they choose to export the report as a CSV file, then the file should download successfully and contain all relevant geographical sales data.

Generating a custom report based on a combination of multiple parameters such as time frame, product categories, and geographical regions.

Given a user selects multiple parameters including 'Last Month', 'Clothing', and 'West Region', when they generate the custom report, then the report should accurately reflect the sales performance for the selected criteria without any discrepancies.

Saving a frequently used custom report template for future use to streamline reporting processes.

Given a user has generated a custom report, when they save the report as a template with a specified name, then the template should be saved and available for future report generation with the same parameters.

Generating a custom report and applying filters to exclude certain data to assess performance without outlier effects.

Given a user selects a report to generate and applies filters to exclude products with sales below a certain threshold, when they run the report, then the output should not include any products that fall below the specified sales threshold.

Scheduling a custom report to be generated and emailed to users at regular intervals for ongoing analysis.

Given a user sets up a custom report to be generated weekly and specified recipients are entered, when the scheduled time arrives, then the report should be automatically generated and emailed to the specified recipients accurately.

Interactive Data Visualization

"As a store owner, I want to see my sales data visualized so that I can quickly spot trends and make proactive inventory adjustments based on the insights I derive."

Description

The Interactive Data Visualization requirement seeks to enhance user engagement with sales data by presenting insights through interactive charts and graphs. This feature will enable retailers to visualize complex data sets in an easily digestible format, facilitating better understanding of trends and patterns in sales performance. Users can hover over data points for additional context, filter by various criteria, and drill down into specifics for greater insight. This enriching visual representation of data can lead to quicker decision-making and a more proactive approach to inventory management, as it allows users to identify opportunities and issues at a glance.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction with Interactive Data Charts

Given a user is logged into the application, when they navigate to the sales insights section and hover over a data point on the interactive chart, then detailed information about that data point should be displayed.

Filtering Data by Various Criteria

Given a user is viewing the interactive sales data visualization, when they apply filter options for product categories, then the displayed chart should update to reflect only the selected categories.

Drill Down into Sales Data by Time Period

Given a user is viewing the sales performance chart, when they select a specific time period from the dropdown menu, then the chart should refresh to show data only for that selected time frame.

Real-Time Data Refresh on Interactive Visualizations

Given a user is engaged with the interactive sales visualization, when a data update occurs in the backend system, then the chart should automatically refresh to display the latest data without needing to refresh the page manually.

User Customization of Visual Representation

Given a user is interacting with the data visualization, when they select different graph types (e.g., bar, line, pie) from the customization options, then the chart should instantly update to reflect the selected graph type.

Accessibility Features in Data Visualization

Given a user with accessibility needs views the interactive charts, when they use assistive technology, then all data points and chart information should be fully accessible and read aloud appropriately.

Exporting Data from Interactive Charts

Given a user is satisfied with the data insights displayed, when they choose to export the data from the interactive chart, then the data should be available for download in a CSV format.

Automated Insights Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts when sales fall below a certain threshold so that I can take immediate action to restock or promote those products."

Description

The Automated Insights Alerts requirement involves setting up notifications for key performance indicators (KPIs) related to sales performance, inventory levels, and other crucial metrics. Retailers can configure alerts based on their specific thresholds, such as a drop in product sales or inventory levels reaching a certain point. This proactive feature ensures that users are immediately informed of important changes, allowing them to respond swiftly to potential issues before they escalate. By offering real-time alerts, this requirement enhances the user's capability to manage inventory effectively, reduces the risk of stockouts, and supports timely restocking efforts leading to increased sales.

Acceptance Criteria

User Configures Sales Threshold Alerts for an Underperforming Product

Given a user accesses the Automated Insights Alerts settings, when they set a sales threshold alert for a specific product to notify them when sales drop below 10 units in a week, then the system should successfully save this alert configuration and send a notification to the user when the threshold is met.

User Receives Notifications for Low Inventory Levels

Given a retailer has configured alerts for low inventory levels, when the inventory for a product drops below the configured threshold of 20 units, then the user should receive a real-time notification alerting them of the critical inventory status.

User Tests Alert Settings for Accuracy

Given a user has set multiple alerts for different KPIs, when they simulate conditions that meet these thresholds (e.g., sales drop or inventory level drop), then the system should trigger the correct notifications as configured in the alert settings within 5 minutes.

User Deletes an Unneeded Alert

Given a user views the list of their configured alerts, when they select an alert and choose to delete it, then the system should remove the alert from the list and confirm the deletion to the user.

User Receives Summary of Alerts in Daily Digest

Given that multiple alerts have been triggered throughout the day, when the user checks their daily alert summary, then they should see a comprehensive list of all alerts that were activated, including the type and time of each alert.

User Adjusts Alerts Based on Seasonal Trends

Given a retailer wants to adjust alerts based on upcoming seasonal demand, when they modify the thresholds of existing alerts for specific products, then the system should successfully save the new settings and confirm the changes to the user.

User Reviews Historical Alert Data for Decision Making

Given a user accesses the historical alert data feature, when they request data for the past 30 days, then the system should display a detailed report of all alerts triggered during that time, including dates, times, and reasons for the alerts.

Integration with Third-Party Tools

"As a marketing manager, I want to integrate our sales data with our email marketing tool so that I can tailor campaigns based on customer purchase behavior for more relevant communication."

Description

The Integration with Third-Party Tools requirement allows the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature to connect seamlessly with other software applications such as CRM systems, email marketing platforms, and financial software. This integration will enable retailers to pull in additional data sources and leverage them for more comprehensive analysis. For instance, combining sales data with customer relationship information can help identify purchasing patterns and foster better targeted marketing initiatives. Making the insights more actionable by integrating with existing tools will streamline operations and improve the retail experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers can seamlessly integrate their existing CRM system with the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature to generate comprehensive reports.

Given the retailer has configured their CRM system, when they request integration within the Cross-Platform Sales Insights interface, then the system should successfully pull customer data and display it within the analytics dashboard without errors.

A retailer wants to analyze sales data alongside their email marketing metrics to optimize campaigns.

Given the retailer has connected their email marketing platform, when they access the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature, then the analytics should display a combined view of sales data and email marketing results for the selected time period.

To measure the impact of sales trends on inventory management, a retailer integrates their financial software into the insights platform.

Given the retailer has linked their financial software, when they run a financial analysis report from the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature, then the report should include financial performance metrics derived from the integrated software alongside inventory data.

A user wants to extract actionable insights from the integrated data sources to inform inventory decisions.

Given the retailer has active integrations with multiple third-party tools, when they generate a report on inventory performance, then the insights should highlight the best-selling products across all channels with clear recommendations for stock adjustments.

A business owner needs to verify if the integration setup is user-friendly and does not require extensive technical knowledge.

Given the user accesses the integration setup wizard, when they follow the prompts to connect a third-party tool, then they should complete the integration process within 10 minutes without requiring external support or documentation.

Retailers want to ensure that all integrated data remains up-to-date and accurately reflects real-time metrics in their analytics dashboard.

Given the third-party tools are integrated, when a user logs into the Cross-Platform Sales Insights feature, then the data displayed should be updated in real-time, reflecting any changes from the connected platforms within a one-minute interval.

Retailers want to ensure data security and compliance during the integration process with their operational tools.

Given the retailer initiates the integration process, when they review the data sharing permissions and security protocols, then there must be clear, compliant options presented that adhere to industry standards for data protection.

Inventory Health Monitoring

This real-time monitoring solution alerts users to discrepancies or irregularities in stock levels across channels, such as mismatched inventory counts or trends suggesting impending stockouts. Users can proactively address these issues, ensuring a healthier inventory and improved customer experience. The feature facilitates better risk management and minimizes potential revenue loss due to inventory mismanagement.

Requirements

Real-Time Stock Discrepancy Alerts

"As a retail manager, I want to receive real-time alerts about stock discrepancies so that I can address inventory issues promptly and maintain optimal stock levels for better customer satisfaction."

Description

This requirement focuses on the implementation of a real-time alert system that notifies users about discrepancies in stock levels across various sales channels. The alert system is crucial for immediately addressing mismatched inventory counts or unusual trends that suggest impending stockouts. By integrating this feature into the Inventory Health Monitoring system, users can proactively manage their inventory, significantly reducing the risk of stockouts and ensuring optimal stock levels. The expected outcome is a more reliable inventory management process, leading to increased customer satisfaction and minimized revenue loss due to stock mismanagement.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives real-time alerts on their mobile device when stock discrepancies occur during sales transactions in the retail store.

Given the inventory discrepancy threshold is set, when a mismatch occurs during a sale transaction, then the user should receive an immediate push notification on their mobile device informing them of the discrepancy.

Store managers check inventory levels through the dashboard and are notified of impending stockouts before it affects sales.

Given the inventory levels are monitored continuously, when a product's stock falls below the defined threshold, then an alert must be sent to the store manager's dashboard within two minutes.

An employee audits the inventory at the end of the day and receives alerts about discrepancies that arose during the day’s transactions.

Given that discrepancies were detected throughout the day, when the employee accesses the audit report at the end of the day, then the report should list all discrepancies and their timestamps for review.

A user wants to set custom alerts for specific products to prevent stockouts.

Given the user is logged into the Inventory Health Monitoring system, when they set a custom stock alert for a specific product, then the system must confirm the alert criteria and start monitoring that product.

A user receives a summary of stock discrepancies via email at the end of the week for better inventory analysis.

Given that the user has opted into weekly summaries, when the week ends, then an email should be sent containing all stock discrepancy alerts and trends for that week.

A retailer wants to view trend data on stock discrepancies over the last month.

Given the retailer accesses the trend analytics section, when they select the past month for review, then the system should display a graphical representation of stock discrepancies over that timeframe, highlighting peak periods.

During a stock replenishment period, users check alerts to ensure no critical items are running low before placing orders.

Given the user opens the inventory overview, when they check for alerts, then all critical low-stock alerts must be displayed prominently for review before making replenishment decisions.

Multi-Channel Inventory Tracking

"As a small retailer, I want to track my inventory levels across all my sales channels in one place so that I can manage stock levels more efficiently and reduce the chances of overstocking or stockouts."

Description

This requirement entails enhancing the inventory monitoring system to allow seamless tracking of stock levels across multiple sales channels, such as brick-and-mortar stores, e-commerce platforms, and third-party retailers. The integration will provide a unified dashboard giving users a comprehensive view of their inventory status at all times. This functionality is vital for small to medium-sized retailers who may struggle with fragmented inventory management. The expected benefit is a clearer understanding of where products are located and better forecasting and planning capabilities, ultimately leading to improved inventory accuracy and reduced operational inefficiencies.

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Channel Inventory Visibility for Real-Time Stock Levels

Given that a user accesses the unified dashboard, when they view the inventory levels, then the system should display real-time stock counts for each sales channel (brick-and-mortar, e-commerce, third-party retailers).

Automated Alerts for Discrepancies in Stock Levels

Given that an inventory discrepancy occurs between sales channels, when the discrepancy is detected, then the system should automatically generate and send an alert to the user explaining the nature of the discrepancy and suggested actions to address it.

Comprehensive Reporting on Inventory Trends

Given that a user selects the reporting feature, when they analyze inventory data, then the system should provide a report that includes historical trends, potential stockouts, and recommendations for restocking based on forecasted demand.

Integration with Existing POS Systems

Given that a retailer has an existing POS system, when the user connects their POS to the inventory management platform, then the system should successfully retrieve and display stock levels without any data loss or duplication.

User Role-Specific Access to Inventory Information

Given that there are different user roles (e.g., manager, staff, accountant), when a user logs into the system, then they should only see inventory information relevant to their role, ensuring data security and privacy.

Mobile Access to Inventory Monitoring

Given that a user accesses RetailRevolution via a mobile device, when they navigate to the inventory section, then they should be able to view and manage inventory levels seamlessly, with fully responsive design and functionality.

Historical Data Analysis for Improved Inventory Management

Given that the user wants to analyze historical inventory data, when they request historical reports, then the system should provide accurate reports on inventory levels, sales patterns, and trends over specified time periods.

Automated Inventory Analysis Reports

"As a store owner, I want to receive automated inventory analysis reports so that I can make data-driven decisions about my stock management without manually compiling information."

Description

This requirement centers on creating a feature that automatically generates inventory analysis reports at scheduled intervals. These reports would summarize key insights regarding inventory health, including turnover rates, stock performance, and potential issues. The feature should allow users to customize report frequency and specific metrics they wish to analyze. Having these reports readily available is crucial for making informed inventory decisions, conducting trend analyses, and engaging in proactive inventory management strategies. The anticipated outcome is enhanced decision-making capabilities for retailers, resulting in optimized stock levels and improved financial performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Inventory Analysis Report Generation Based on User Customization

Given a user has set up their report preferences, When the scheduled time arrives, Then the system automatically generates the inventory analysis report according to the user's specified frequency and metrics requested.

User Accessibility to Generated Reports Across Devices

Given the user generates inventory analysis reports, When the user logs into the RetailRevolution platform from any device, Then the user should be able to access and download the latest generated inventory analysis report without issues.

Notification of Report Generation Completion

Given a user has scheduled a report, When the report is successfully generated, Then the system sends a notification to the user confirming that their inventory analysis report is ready for review.

Inclusion of Key Metrics in Reports

Given a user has selected specific metrics for their report, When the report is generated, Then it includes all selected key metrics like turnover rates, stock performance, and discrepancies clearly displayed.

Correctness of Report Data

Given that the inventory has been updated prior to report generation, When the user reviews the report, Then the data represented in the report accurately reflects the current inventory status and health.

User Review and Feedback on Report Quality

Given a user has accessed the generated inventory analysis report, When the user submits feedback through the platform, Then the system logs the feedback successfully and sends a confirmation to the user.

Performance During Peak Times

Given that many users are generating reports at the same time, When the system processes multiple report requests, Then all users should receive their reports within a reasonable time without performance degradation.

User-Friendly Dashboard Interface

"As a retail employee, I want a clear and intuitive dashboard interface so that I can quickly understand my inventory status and respond to alerts without confusion."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a user-friendly dashboard that visually represents inventory health metrics in an easily digestible format. The dashboard should include visual indicators for stock levels, alerts, and trends, allowing users to quickly assess their inventory status at a glance. An intuitive user experience is essential for ensuring that all users, regardless of technical skill, can effectively utilize the inventory monitoring tools. The primary benefit of this requirement is to facilitate quicker decision-making and enhance user engagement with the inventory system, ultimately leading to a more proactive approach in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the inventory dashboard after logging into the RetailRevolution platform to check current stock levels and health metrics before making a purchasing decision for a new product line.

Given the user is on the dashboard page, when they access the inventory health section, then they are presented with clear visual indicators for stock levels, with color-coded alerts for low stock and overstock situations.

A user receives an automated alert from the dashboard indicating a potential stockout for a popular item that has seen increased demand based on recent trends in inventory health monitoring.

Given the user has notifications enabled, when the inventory count for a specific item decreases below the predefined threshold, then an alert is sent to the user via the dashboard and email.

A retail manager needs to quickly assess inventory across multiple locations using the dashboard to ensure optimal stock distribution.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they select a specific location from the multi-location feature, then they should see tailored inventory metrics for that location alongside the overall stock performance.

A user checks the historical trends on the dashboard to analyze inventory data over the past few weeks to forecast future demand.

Given the user selects the 'trend analysis' feature on the dashboard, when they view the historical inventory data, then the system displays graphical trends showing stock levels and alerts for the selected period.

A new employee is being trained to use the dashboard for inventory management and needs to understand the various metrics displayed.

Given the new employee is using the dashboard, when they hover over any metric or alert, then a tooltip provides a brief description of that specific metric and its implications for inventory health.

A user wants to customize their dashboard to prioritize the metrics that are most relevant to their specific business needs.

Given the user is on their dashboard, when they select the 'customize dashboard' option, then they can rearrange, add or remove widgets displaying specific inventory metrics based on their preferences.

Integrated Returns Management

Integrated Returns Management streamlines the returns process across all sales channels. When a product is returned, the system automatically updates inventory levels in real-time, allowing for effective handling of stock that is back in circulation. This feature enhances operational efficiency, reduces manual entry errors, and ensures accurate inventory records, which is vital for maintaining customer satisfaction and operational effectiveness.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Update

"As a store manager, I want the inventory levels to update automatically when a product is returned so that I can maintain accurate stock records without manual adjustments."

Description

The Real-time Inventory Update requirement ensures that whenever a return is processed, the system automatically reflects the updated inventory levels without any delay. This includes adding back returned items and adjusting stock counts for the relevant products in all sales channels. This capability is critical as it improves accuracy in stock management, allows retailers to have a live view of their inventory, and supports efficient order fulfillment, thereby minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstock situations.

Acceptance Criteria

Return Processing for Online Order

Given an online order has been returned, When the return is processed in the system, Then the inventory level for that product should automatically increase by the quantity of the returned item and reflect this change in real-time across all sales channels.

Return Processing for In-Store Purchase

Given an item purchased in-store is returned, When the cashier processes the return through the POS, Then the system should immediately update the inventory count for that item to reflect the addition of the returned item and sync with the central inventory database.

Bulk Return from Multiple Channels

Given multiple returns from various sales channels are processed simultaneously, When those returns are entered into the system, Then all relevant inventory levels should update in real-time without discrepancies or delays, ensuring accurate stock levels at all locations.

Audit of Updated Inventory Post-Return

Given that a return has been processed, When an audit is conducted on the inventory levels 10 minutes post-processing, Then the updated inventory levels must match the returned quantities recorded in the system.

Notification of Inventory Level Changes

Given a return has been completed affecting inventory levels, When the inventory update occurs, Then the system should send an automated notification to the warehouse manager reflecting the change in stock levels for better restocking decisions.

Real-time View of Inventory Dashboard

Given that an item has been returned and stock levels updated, When the inventory dashboard is refreshed, Then the changes should be immediately visible on the dashboard for all user roles accessing it to ensure they have up-to-date information.

Returns Impact on Reorder Recommendations

Given a return is processed, When the system recalculates stock levels, Then the reorder recommendations should adjust to reflect the new available inventory, ensuring optimal stock management.

Multiple Channel Support

"As an online customer service representative, I want to be able to process returns from different sales channels in one system so that I can provide consistent service to customers no matter where they bought the product."

Description

The Multiple Channel Support requirement enables the Integrated Returns Management feature to function across various sales channels including online, in-store, and mobile platforms. This integration will ensure that returns from any channel are processed seamlessly and inventory levels are adjusted accordingly, which enhances operational efficiency and provides a unified return experience for customers regardless of where they purchased the product. This requirement is essential for retail businesses operating in multiple environments.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer returns a purchased item through the online store and the system processes the return across all channels simultaneously, updating the inventory in real-time.

Given a customer initiates a return for an online purchase, when the return is processed, then the inventory levels for the returned item should be updated in real-time across all sales channels.

A retail staff member processes a return for an in-store purchase, ensuring that the inventory reflects the return immediately and accurately.

Given a staff member scans a returned item at the POS system, when the return is completed, then the inventory count for the item should decrease by one in the system.

A customer returns a mobile app purchase, and the app reflects the returned item and its effect on inventory across all channels without manual intervention.

Given a customer selects an item to return in the mobile app, when the return is confirmed, then the inventory should be automatically adjusted in the system across all sales channels.

All sales channels display accurate inventory levels after a return has been processed, ensuring consistency and preventing overselling.

Given an item has been returned from any channel, when the return is processed, then all sales channels should display the same updated inventory level for that item.

A user reviews the return history in the system to confirm that the inventory adjustments were made correctly after multiple channel returns.

Given a user accesses the returns report, when the report is generated, then it should reflect all returns processed and the corresponding inventory levels updated accordingly.

A customer service representative verifies an inventory level after a return has been processed to assist a customer with their inquiries.

Given a return has been processed, when the customer service representative checks the inventory level for the returned item, then the representative should see the latest inventory count reflecting the return.

Automated Returns Processing

"As a customer, I want to receive updates when my return is being processed so that I know when to expect my refund or exchange."

Description

The Automated Returns Processing requirement stipulates that the system should automatically manage the return workflow, from initiation to completion. This includes generating return labels, tracking return shipments, and notifying both customers and store staff when returns are received and processed. Automating these processes reduces the workload on staff, enhances the speed of return transactions, and improves customer satisfaction by keeping them informed throughout the return process.

Acceptance Criteria

Return Processing for E-commerce Orders

Given a customer initiates a return for an online order, when the return request is submitted, then the system generates a return label and sends an email notification with the label to the customer.

Real-Time Inventory Update on Return Completion

Given a product is returned and scanned into the store system, when the return is processed, then the inventory level for that product is updated in real-time across all sales channels.

Customer Notification of Return Status

Given a return has been initiated, when the status of the return changes (e.g., received, processed), then both the customer and store staff receive a notification with the current status of the return.

Return Shipment Tracking for Customers

Given a customer has generated a return label and shipped the item, when the shipment is tracked, then the system displays the tracking information within the customer account for easy access.

Reporting on Return Metrics for Management

Given multiple returns have been processed in the system, when the management requests a report, then the system generates a comprehensive report detailing return reasons, item conditions, and trends over a defined period.

Integration with Customer Support for Return Inquiries

Given a customer contacts support regarding a return, when the support agent retrieves the customer's return details, then the agent can view the full return history and status in the customer support interface.

Automated Return Closure Process

Given a return has been processed and the item is back in inventory, when the system confirms the item’s condition, then it automatically closes the return case and notifies relevant stakeholders.

Return Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to access an analytics dashboard that provides insights into return trends so that I can make informed decisions on inventory and product quality improvements."

Description

The Return Analytics Dashboard requirement necessitates the development of a specialized dashboard that aggregates data on returns, such as return rates, reasons for returns, and impact on inventory turnover. This tool will assist retailers in identifying trends and potential issues in product quality, customer satisfaction, and overall inventory performance. By leveraging these insights, businesses can make data-driven decisions to improve product offerings and reduce return rates over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Return Rate Tracking for Various Products

Given a retailer with multiple product categories, when a return is processed, then the dashboard should accurately reflect the return rate for each product category updated in real-time and displayed in an easily digestible format.

Reasons for Returns Analysis

Given a return transaction, when the retailer reviews the analytics dashboard, then the system should display a breakdown of the top five reasons for returns, allowing for targeted improvements in product quality and customer service.

Impact on Inventory Turnover Visualization

Given valid return data, when the dashboard is accessed, then it should provide a visual representation of the impact of returns on overall inventory turnover rate over the past month, using graphs to highlight trends.

Integration with Inventory Management System

Given that a return is processed, when the dashboard updates, then the inventory management system should reflect the changes in stock levels accurately and immediately to prevent discrepancies.

Historical Return Data Comparison

Given access to historical data, when the user selects a specific time frame, then the dashboard should display a comparison of current return rates against previous periods, helping identify trends over time.

User Access and Permissions

Given that multiple users have access to the dashboard, when a user logs in, then the dashboard should display data applicable to their access level, ensuring sensitive information is protected and only viewable by authorized personnel.

Customer-friendly Return Policy Management

"As a store owner, I want to customize my return policies within the system so that I can align them with my business practices and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

The Customer-friendly Return Policy Management requirement allows retailers to easily customize and manage their return policies within the Integrated Returns Management system. This includes setting timelines for returns, conditions for returns, and guidelines for exchanges. By providing retailers with the tools to create transparent and customer-friendly policies, the platform enhances the customer experience and can potentially reduce return rates by ensuring expectations are clear from the outset.

Acceptance Criteria

User Accessing Return Policy Settings for Customization

Given the retailer is logged into the Integrated Returns Management system, when they navigate to the return policy settings page, then they should see options to customize return timelines, conditions, and exchange guidelines clearly displayed.

Retailer Setting a Return Timeline

Given the retailer is on the return policy settings page, when they set a return timeline to 30 days, then the system should save this setting and display '30 days' on the return policy summary view.

Retailer Defining Conditions for Returns

Given the retailer is defining return conditions, when they specify 'Product must be unopened and in original packaging,' then this condition should be saved and reflected in the customer's return policy details.

Retailer Updating Exchange Guidelines

Given the retailer is on the exchange guidelines section, when they update the guidelines to include 'Exchanges accepted for items of equal or greater value,' then the new guideline should be saved and visible to customers.

Customer Viewing Return Policy During Checkout

Given a customer is at the checkout page, when they click on the link to view the return policy, then they should see the complete and accurate return policy as set by the retailer, including timelines, conditions, and exchange guidelines.

System Notification for Policy Changes

Given the retailer has updated their return policy, when they save the changes, then the system should automatically notify all customers via email about the updated return policy.

Retailer Testing the Return Policy Implementation

Given the retailer has configured their return policy, when they simulate a return process with conditions met, then the system should successfully process the return according to the established policy without errors.

Notifications and Alerts Management

"As a customer support agent, I want to receive alerts about return status changes so that I can promptly assist customers and provide updates."

Description

The Notifications and Alerts Management requirement specifies that the system will send automated notifications and alerts regarding return processing stages, inventory updates, and customer queries. This feature should allow customization for the type, timing, and method of notifications (e.g., email, SMS) to suit both staff and customer preferences. Effective communication through notifications ensures that stakeholders are informed and helps maintain high levels of customer service during the return process.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated notifications for return processing stages for staff and customers.

Given a product is returned, When the return is processed, Then the system sends an email notification to the customer and staff within 5 minutes of the return being logged.

Customization of notification preferences for different users.

Given a user accesses their notification settings, When they select their preferred method of notification (email/SMS) and type of alerts (inventory updates, return processing), Then those preferences should be saved and applied to future notifications.

Real-time inventory updates upon return completion.

Given a return has been successfully processed, When the inventory is updated, Then the inventory levels in the system should reflect the change immediately, ensuring accuracy.

Notification of inventory updates to staff.

Given an inventory level is updated after a return, When the update occurs, Then all relevant staff members should receive an SMS alert about the inventory change within 5 minutes.

Escalation alert for unprocessed returns exceeding a set time limit.

Given a return has not been processed within 24 hours, When the time exceeds this limit, Then an escalation alert should be sent to the management team via email and SMS.

Feedback collection post-return for customer satisfaction.

Given a return is successfully processed, When the return is completed, Then a feedback request notification should be sent to the customer to rate their return experience within 24 hours.

Unified Order Fulfillment

Unified Order Fulfillment automates the selection of warehouse or store locations for fulfilling orders based on current inventory levels across all sales channels. This feature optimizes delivery times and stock utilization by ensuring that products are shipped from the most appropriate location. Users benefit from improved logistical efficiency, reducing shipping costs and lead times, which contributes to enhanced customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Automated Location Selection

"As a retail manager, I want the system to automatically select the best location for order fulfillment so that I can reduce shipping times and costs, thereby enhancing customer satisfaction."

Description

The Automated Location Selection requirement involves developing an algorithm that intelligently determines the optimal warehouse or store location for order fulfillment based on real-time inventory levels across all sales channels. This functionality is vital as it directly impacts delivery efficiency, reducing shipping times and costs while maximizing stock utilization. By integrating this feature into RetailRevolution, retailers can enhance their order fulfillment process, ensuring that customers receive their products promptly, which in turn increases satisfaction and repeat purchases. Additionally, this requirement supports seamless communication between various system components, as it pulls data from inventory management and sales data to make informed decisions for order processing.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Location Selection for Customer Orders

Given that a customer places an order, when the Automated Location Selection algorithm runs, then it must select the optimal fulfillment location based on current real-time inventory levels and order details, ensuring the selected location is capable of shipping the order within the promised delivery timeframe.

Integration with Real-Time Inventory Data

Given that the Automated Location Selection feature is active, when an inventory update is made, then the system must automatically refresh its algorithm's data inputs to reflect the new inventory levels within 5 minutes, ensuring accuracy in location selection.

Performance under High Order Volume

Given a peak order scenario where numerous orders are being processed simultaneously, when the Automated Location Selection is utilized, then it must fulfill orders from the optimal locations without exceeding a processing time of 2 seconds per order to maintain customer satisfaction.

Comparison with Manual Selection Method

Given that the system has made automated selections for several orders, when these selections are compared to manual location selections made by users under the same conditions, then the automated selections must show at least a 15% improvement in delivery times and reduced shipping costs.

User Notification of Location Selection

Given that an order has been assigned a fulfillment location by the Automated Location Selection, when the order is processed, then the system must notify the user of the selected fulfillment location and estimated delivery time via the dashboard in real-time.

Inventory Level Replenishment Triggers

Given that the automated location selection determines a fulfillment location, when inventory at that location falls below the defined threshold, then the system must generate an automatic alert for inventory replenishment to avoid stockouts.

Reporting on Location Selection Efficiency

Given that orders have been fulfilled using the Automated Location Selection feature, when the reporting tool is accessed, then it must provide detailed metrics on delivery times and fulfillment costs, showing whether the location selections were optimal based on historical data.

Real-time Inventory Updates

"As a store owner, I want to see real-time stock levels across all locations so that I can make informed decisions about inventory replenishment and order fulfillment."

Description

The Real-time Inventory Updates requirement necessitates the implementation of continuous inventory tracking across all locations and sales channels. This feature ensures that stock levels are automatically updated in real-time as sales occur, providing a precise view of available inventory for order fulfillment. The accuracy of stock data is crucial for effective order processing, avoiding stockouts, and ensuring that customer expectations are met. This functionality integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory management processes, thereby enhancing operational efficiency and allowing retailers to respond quickly to demand fluctuations. The implementation of this feature is anticipated to significantly reduce errors related to inventory mismanagement, fostering customer trust and reliability.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time inventory updates during peak sales periods

Given that a sale occurs in the system, when the inventory is sold, then the stock level should be updated within 5 seconds across all sales channels and locations.

Verification of stock availability before order fulfillment

Given that an order is being processed, when the order is checked against the inventory, then the system should confirm the availability of stock and prevent orders from being processed if stock levels are below the threshold.

Automatic restocking alert generation

Given that inventory levels drop below the predefined minimum threshold, when the inventory is updated, then an automatic restocking alert should be generated and sent to the designated user or team.

Integration with existing POS systems

Given that the RetailRevolution platform is integrated with a retailer's POS system, when a sale is made, then the inventory should reflect the change immediately, and all related sales channels should show consistent stock levels.

Reporting accuracy for stock levels over time

Given that inventory levels are tracked in real-time, when a report is generated, then the report should include accurate stock levels and relevant time stamps for all transactions made within the selected period.

User access and permissions for inventory management

Given that different users access the inventory management system, when a user attempts to make changes to inventory levels, then the system should ensure that the user has the appropriate permissions to perform those changes.

Multi-Channel Sales Integration

"As a retail analyst, I want to view aggregated sales data from all channels in one place so that I can analyze performance and identify trends to improve our sales strategy."

Description

The Multi-Channel Sales Integration requirement aims to develop a unified platform that aggregates sales data from various channels (e-commerce, in-store, etc.) into one system. This integration is essential as it allows for a comprehensive view of sales performance and inventory levels, supporting better decision-making. It ensures that retailers can track which channels are performing well while also identifying any potential stock discrepancies that might arise from juggling multiple sales platforms. This comprehensive visibility not only enhances logistical efficiency but also empowers retailers to optimize their sales strategies based on dynamic market insights derived from consolidated data. The successful implementation of this feature will ultimately lead to increased sales opportunities and improved management of stock across channels.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Data Aggregation for Performance Analysis

Given that multiple sales channels are connected, when a sales transaction occurs, then the sales data from each channel should be aggregated in real-time and displayed on the unified dashboard without discrepancies.

Inventory Level Monitoring Across Channels

Given that inventory levels are tracked in real-time, when a product is sold through any sales channel, then the inventory levels for that product should reflect the updated count across all channels within five minutes.

Identifying Stock Discrepancies

Given the integration of sales data across channels, when a stock discrepancy is detected, then the system should generate an alert with details of the mismatch and suggested corrective actions.

Performance Reporting for Sales Channels

Given that sales data is aggregated, when the user generates a report, then it should provide insights on sales performance per channel, including total sales, returns, and inventory status for the last month.

User Access Control for Sales Data

Given that the platform is used by multiple users, when a user logs in, then their access to sales data should be restricted based on their role, preserving sensitive information for authorized users only.

Data Visualization of Sales Trends

Given that sales data is consolidated, when the user views the sales dashboard, then it should visually represent sales trends over time with graphs and charts that are easy to interpret.

Integration with POS Systems

Given that the Multi-Channel Sales Integration is in operation, when a sale is made through a POS system, then the transaction should seamlessly update the sales data in the unified order fulfillment system in real-time.

Customer Notifications System

"As a customer, I want to receive notifications about my order status so that I am kept informed and can plan for delivery accordingly."

Description

The Customer Notifications System requirement involves creating a mechanism that automatically alerts customers about their order status, including confirmation, shipping updates, and delivery estimates. This feature is significant in improving customer engagement and satisfaction by keeping them informed throughout the order fulfillment process. By integrating this notification system with the existing order management platform, retailers can provide timely updates through various channels such as email, SMS, or app notifications. This proactive communication reduces customer inquiries regarding order status, which can save time for customer service teams while promoting a positive shopping experience. Its successful implementation is expected to foster greater customer loyalty and trust in the retail brand.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a notification when their order is confirmed.

Given a customer places an order, when the order is confirmed, then an email and SMS notification should be sent to the customer with the order confirmation details.

Customer is notified when their order is shipped.

Given an order is shipped, when the shipping details are updated in the system, then a notification should be sent to the customer via their chosen channel with tracking information.

Customer receives delivery estimate notifications.

Given an order has a scheduled delivery date, when the delivery date is updated, then the customer should receive a notification reflecting the new delivery estimate via email or app notification.

Customers can select their preferred notification channel.

Given customers have an account, when they select their preferred notification method (email, SMS, app notification), then the system should save their preference and send notifications accordingly.

Customer can view notification history in the app.

Given the customer accesses their order history, when they choose to view notification history, then they should see a list of all notifications sent for their orders along with timestamps.

Customers can update their contact information for notifications.

Given a customer wants to change their contact information, when they update their details in their account settings, then the system should reflect the new information and use it for future notifications.

Customer service can view notification status for a specific order.

Given customer service is handling a customer inquiry, when they check the notification status for a specific order, then they should see whether notifications have been sent and their content.

Analytics Dashboard for Order Fulfillment

"As a logistics manager, I want to access an analytics dashboard that displays key fulfillment metrics so that I can monitor performance and identify areas for improvement."

Description

The Analytics Dashboard for Order Fulfillment requirement focuses on developing an intuitive interface that provides key performance indicators (KPIs) related to order fulfillment efficiency. This feature is essential as it allows retailers to visualize data regarding order processing times, shipping costs, and fulfillment accuracy in a single dashboard. By having access to these analytics, retailers can identify bottlenecks in their fulfillment processes, make data-driven decisions, and implement necessary improvements. This requirement emphasizes the importance of data transparency and accessibility in optimizing operational processes, ultimately leading to enhanced profitability and customer satisfaction. The implementation of this analytical dashboard will enable retailers to establish benchmarks for performance and track progress over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Visualizing Order Fulfillment Metrics in Real-Time

Given a user accesses the Analytics Dashboard, when they select the order fulfillment metrics section, then the dashboard displays real-time KPIs such as average order processing time, total shipping costs, and fulfillment accuracy for the past month.

Identifying Bottlenecks in Fulfillment Processes

Given a user is reviewing the Analytics Dashboard, when the user identifies a KPI within the fulfillment metrics that exceeds the established benchmark, then the system automatically highlights that KPI and suggests potential areas for improvement.

Setting Performance Benchmarks for Future Orders

Given a user accesses the Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the settings section and set a new performance benchmark for order processing, then the system saves this benchmark and updates the KPI display to reflect future performance against the new target.

Exporting Analytics for Reporting and Review

Given a user has viewed the Analytics Dashboard, when they choose to export the data as a CSV file, then the system generates and downloads a report containing all visible dashboard data, including filtering options used during the session.

Analyzing Trends Over Time

Given a user accesses the Analytics Dashboard, when they select a date range for analysis, then the dashboard accurately reflects the order fulfillment metrics over that specified timeframe, allowing users to compare current performance against historical data.

Customizing Dashboard Views for Different Users

Given an admin user is configuring the Analytics Dashboard, when they set specific metrics to be visible for different user roles, then each role should only see the configured metrics relevant to their responsibilities without access to sensitive data.

Receiving Alerts for Underperforming KPIs

Given a user has set threshold limits within the Analytics Dashboard, when KPIs fall below these limits, then the system automatically sends an alert to the user's email or dashboard notification center.

Intelligent Stock Redistribution

Intelligent Stock Redistribution uses predictive analytics to suggest proactive stock transfers between physical stores and warehousing based on historical sales data and current demand trends. This feature ensures that high-demand locations maintain optimal stock levels, preventing lost sales opportunities. By optimizing inventory placement, retailers can enhance customer satisfaction through better availability of products.

Requirements

Predictive Stock Transfer Analytics

"As a store manager, I want to receive predictive stock transfer suggestions so that I can ensure optimal product availability across all locations and prevent stockouts."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for a robust predictive analytics engine that analyzes historical sales data and current demand trends across various geographic locations. This analytics engine will compute optimal stock levels required for each location and develop strategic stock transfer suggestions to mitigate overstocking and avoid stockouts. Its integration with existing inventory dashboards will allow users to view recommendations in real-time, facilitating proactive inventory management. This feature enhances operational efficiency by ensuring high-demand locations are adequately supplied, thus improving customer satisfaction and reducing lost sales opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to view stock transfer suggestions when accessing the predictive analytics dashboard, so that I can make informed decisions on stock redistribution based on current demand trends.

Given that I have logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when I access the predictive analytics dashboard, then I should see a section displaying the top three suggested stock transfers with corresponding reasons based on recent sales trends.

As a warehouse supervisor, I need to receive automated alerts regarding stock imbalance across locations, so that I can initiate redistributions before reaching critical stock levels.

Given that stock levels fall below the predefined threshold at any store location, when the predictive analytics engine identifies a need, then an alert should be generated and sent to the warehouse supervisor within 10 minutes.

As a store associate, I want to confirm that the suggested stock transfers are reflected in the inventory management system, so that I can accurately perform restocking activities.

Given that a stock transfer has been recommended by the predictive analytics engine, when I check the inventory management system, then I should see that the suggested transfer is listed with the status 'Pending' for processing.

As a region manager, I want to evaluate the effectiveness of stock redistribution suggestions after implementation, so that I can assess its impact on sales and inventory levels.

Given that stock transfers have been executed based on the predictive analytics suggestions, when I analyze the sales data after 30 days, then there should be a measurable increase in sales of the transferred items by at least 15%.

As a data analyst, I need to review the historical sales data that the predictive analytics engine uses for its calculations, so that I can ensure that the analytics recommendations are based on accurate information.

Given that I’m using the data review interface, when I request the historical sales data for the last quarter, then the system should present me with a detailed report of the sales data categorized by location and item.

As a business owner, I want to ensure that the predictive analytics feature complies with data privacy regulations, so that I can guarantee customer data is handled appropriately.

Given that the predictive analytics engine processes sales data, when I review the compliance report, then it must demonstrate that all customer data is anonymized and follows the latest data protection regulations.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Stock Recommendations

"As a retail manager, I want an intuitive dashboard that visualizes stock transfer suggestions so that I can easily understand the necessary actions without manual calculations."

Description

The requirement focuses on creating a user-friendly dashboard that visually presents stock redistribution recommendations based on predictive analytics. This feature will include graphical representations, alerts, and comprehensive lists of suggested stock transfers. The dashboard will support filtering options, allowing users to view data by location, product category, or time frame. By integrating with the existing inventory management system, this dashboard will facilitate quick decision-making, ensuring that managers can act promptly based on the analytics presented.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the user-friendly dashboard for stock recommendations.

Given I am a store manager, When I navigate to the dashboard, Then I should see a graphical representation of stock redistribution recommendations based on predictive analytics.

User filters stock recommendations by location.

Given I am on the stock recommendations dashboard, When I select a specific location from the filter options, Then I should see only stock recommendations relevant to that location.

User receives an alert for low stock items.

Given I have set up alerts for low stock items, When an item reaches a predefined threshold, Then I should receive an alert notification on the dashboard.

User views suggested stock transfers by product category.

Given I am on the dashboard, When I select a product category from the filter, Then I should see a list of suggested stock transfers that applies to that category.

User integrates the dashboard with existing inventory management system.

Given the dashboard is integrated with the existing inventory system, When I update stock levels in the inventory system, Then the dashboard should reflect these changes in real-time.

User accesses historical sales data on the dashboard.

Given I am on the dashboard, When I select the historical sales data option, Then I should be able to view sales trends over the last six months with corresponding stock recommendations.

User receives a summary of stock recommendations at a glance.

Given I am on the dashboard, When I view the main screen, Then I should see a summary of key stock recommendations, including top three high-demand items and their suggested redistribution locations.

Automated Notification System for Stock Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive automated alerts about stock levels and recommended transfers so that I can take timely actions to maintain product availability."

Description

This requirement outlines the development of an automated notification system that alerts users about critical stock level changes and recommended transfers. The system will use predefined thresholds for low stock levels to trigger notifications and will incorporate real-time data feeds to ensure accuracy. Users will have the option to customize their notification preferences through the system settings. This automation ensures that managers are immediately apprised of stock issues, enabling quicker responses and reducing the risk of lost sales.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated alerts for low stock levels at a retail location.

Given that the stock level of a specific product falls below the predefined threshold, when the system checks stock levels, then an automated notification should be sent to the designated user(s) immediately.

User customization of notification preferences in the settings.

Given that a user accesses the notification settings page, when the user adjusts their preferences for receiving stock alerts, then the system should save these preferences and reflect the changes in future notifications.

Real-time data integration for stock alerts.

Given that the system is connected to the real-time sales data feeds, when a product's sales velocity increases unexpectedly, then the system should trigger a notification for potential stock redistribution suggestions.

Notifications for recommended stock transfers between locations.

Given that there is a predicted shortfall of a product in a high-demand location, when the system analyzes historical sales trends, then a recommendation and notification for stock transfer should be generated and sent to the inventory manager.

Automatic alerts for stock replenishment required.

Given that stock has not been replenished in a defined period, when the stock level of a product reaches the reorder point, then an automated alert should be dispatched to the inventory manager indicating the need for restocking.

Cross-device compatibility for receiving stock alerts.

Given that a user has set up their notification preferences on one device, when the user accesses the system on a different device, then they should receive the same stock alerts based on their saved preferences without any discrepancies.

Testing the notification delivery mechanism.

Given that the automated notification system is operational, when a low stock alert is triggered, then the system should successfully deliver the notification via all selected communication channels (email, app notification, SMS) to the designated user(s).

Integration with POS Systems for Real-Time Data Exchange

"As a business owner, I want my inventory system to connect with my POS system so that I can access real-time sales data to inform inventory decisions."

Description

This requirement involves developing seamless integration capabilities with various POS systems, enabling real-time data exchange related to sales, stock levels, and customer trends. By synchronizing data between the inventory management platform and POS systems, inventory updates will be reflected instantaneously, allowing for accurate and timely stock redistribution recommendations. This integration enhances the reliability of predictive analytics by ensuring they are based on the most current data, ultimately improving stock management and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration Test for Real-Time Sales Data Synchronization

Given a sale is processed at the POS, when the sale data is transmitted, then the inventory management system should update the stock levels in real time, reflecting the new quantity sold within 2 seconds.

Automated Stock Levels Update Based on Demand Trends

Given historical sales data is available, when demand trends indicate an increase for a specific product, then the system should automatically suggest a stock transfer to the high-demand location within 5 minutes of data analysis.

Error Handling in Data Exchange Between POS and Inventory System

Given a failure in data transmission from the POS, when the error occurs, then the system should log the error, send an alert to the admin, and retry the transmission automatically within 3 minutes.

User Experience for Inventory Manager Dashboard

Given an inventory manager is using the dashboard, when accessing real-time stock data, then the manager should be able to view a graphical representation of stock levels across all locations updated within 5 seconds.

Performance Benchmark Under High Load

Given a peak transaction period, when multiple POS systems are transmitting data simultaneously, then the inventory management system should maintain an uptime of 99.9% and handle up to 500 transactions per second without lag.

Cross-Location Stock Redistribution Recommendations

Given that stock levels drop below 20% threshold in a location, when comparing with other locations, then the system should recommend a stock transfer from the nearest location that has overstock within 10 minutes.

Data Accuracy Verification Post-Integration

Given the inventory management system is integrated with multiple POS systems, when comparing stock levels recorded in the inventory system and the POS systems, then discrepancies should be less than 1% for any location at any time.

Historical Analytics Report Generation

"As a retail analyst, I want to generate historical sales and stock performance reports so that I can evaluate past inventory decisions and prepare for future trends."

Description

This requirement specifies the need to create detailed historical analytics report generation capabilities that provide insights into past sales performance, stock levels, and transfer effectiveness. These reports will aid in understanding trends over time and help businesses refine their inventory strategies. Users will be able to schedule automated report generation and receive insights through various formats, enhancing their ability to analyze data comprehensively for future planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules an automated historical analytics report to be generated weekly for sales performance and stock levels across all retail locations.

Given the user has access to the reporting module, when they schedule a report for weekly generation, then the system should automatically generate and email the report to the specified recipients every week without errors.

A retailer requests a historical analytics report to analyze past inventory transfers effectiveness over the last quarter.

Given the user navigates to the historical report generation section, when they select the date range and choose to generate a report on inventory transfers, then the system should provide a report that details transfer volumes, success rates, and inventory discrepancies within a 5% margin of error.

User wants to receive insights from historical analytics reports in various formats including PDF, Excel, and CSV.

Given the user selects multiple download formats for the historical report, when the generation process completes, then the user should be able to download the report in the selected formats without any data loss or corruption.

A manager reviews historical analytics reports to refine inventory strategies for the upcoming quarter.

Given the report includes visualizations of sales trends over the selected period, when the manager exports the report, then the graphs and charts should display accurately and be easily interpretable for informed decision-making.

User accesses the historical analytics reports and filters data by specific products or categories.

Given the user applies filters on the historical report generation interface, when they generate the report, then the report should accurately reflect only the data pertaining to the selected products or categories without any omissions.

Sustainability Rating Tracker

This feature enables businesses to monitor and display sustainability ratings for each product in their inventory. By providing detailed insights into eco-friendliness, including materials, manufacturing processes, and transportation impact, retailers can easily identify which products meet their sustainability criteria. This enhances transparency and builds trust with consumers who prioritize sustainable choices.

Requirements

Sustainability Data Inputs

"As a Retail Manager, I want to input and maintain detailed sustainability data for our products so that I can easily track which items meet our eco-friendly standards and make informed purchasing decisions."

Description

The Sustainability Data Inputs requirement involves the ability to input and manage detailed sustainability-related information for each product in the inventory. This includes fields for materials used, manufacturing processes, and transportation impacts, providing comprehensive data that can be analyzed to generate sustainability ratings. This requirement ensures that retailers have access to accurate and actionable data, improving their ability to monitor sustainability practices and align inventory with eco-friendly criteria. Enhanced data integrity and ease of updates will promote timely and informed decision-making surrounding sustainable product offerings.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers input sustainability data for a new product in their inventory.

Given a product entry form, when a user inputs materials, manufacturing processes, and transportation impacts, then the data should be saved successfully in the inventory database without errors.

An existing product's sustainability information is updated by a retailer.

Given an existing product in the inventory, when a user selects the product and updates sustainability data, then the changes should reflect immediately in the product details and the update timestamp should be recorded.

A retailer attempts to save sustainability data without filling in all required fields.

Given a product entry form, when a user submits the form with missing required fields, then the system should display an appropriate error message indicating the missing fields and prevent submission until all required fields are completed.

A retailer reviews the sustainability ratings displayed for products in the inventory.

Given a list of products, when the retailer views the product details, then the sustainability ratings should accurately reflect the underlying data provided during input, showcasing materials, processes, and transportation impacts.

The retailer wants to generate a report of all products meeting specific sustainability criteria.

Given a set of sustainability parameters, when the retailer initiates a report generation, then the system should produce a report listing all products that meet the specified sustainability criteria, with accurate details included.

The system saves sustainability data and ensures data integrity after input.

Given the sustainability data has been inputted for a product, when the user reviews the data later, then all previously entered information should be intact, accurate, and formatted correctly without any data loss.

A retailer searches for a product by sustainability criteria.

Given a set of sustainability search filters, when the retailer applies the filters, then the system should return a list of products that match the sustainability criteria, ensuring quick access to eco-friendly options.

Sustainability Rating Generation

"As a Consumer, I want to see a sustainability rating for each product so that I can choose items that align with my values for eco-friendliness and support sustainable businesses."

Description

The Sustainability Rating Generation requirement focuses on the system's ability to automatically generate sustainability ratings based on the inputted data for each product. This feature will analyze aggregated sustainability metrics against pre-defined criteria and algorithms to assign a rating (e.g., from 1 to 5 stars) that reflects the product's overall environmental impact. This capability enhances transparency in the retailer's product offerings and allows consumers to make informed decisions based on sustainability ratings, ultimately fostering a more environmentally conscious shopping experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User inputs product data for sustainability assessment.

Given a product with inputted data on materials, manufacturing processes, and transportation impact, when the system analyzes the data, then it should generate a sustainability rating from 1 to 5 stars based on set criteria.

Admin reviews generated sustainability ratings for accuracy.

Given that a sustainability rating has been generated for a product, when an admin reviews the rating against the input data, then the admin should confirm the accuracy or provide feedback for adjustments if the rating does not align with the inputted metrics.

Customers view sustainability ratings on the product page.

Given that a product has a generated sustainability rating, when a customer accesses the product page, then the sustainability rating should be displayed prominently alongside other product details.

System updates sustainability ratings based on revised product data.

Given that a product's input data has been updated, when the changes are saved, then the system should automatically recalculate and update the sustainability rating accordingly.

Retailer accesses aggregated sustainability ratings for inventory.

Given that multiple products have sustainability ratings, when a retailer views the inventory report, then all products should display their corresponding sustainability ratings in the report.

Reporting feature analyzes sustainability ratings over time.

Given a set time frame, when a retailer requests a report on sustainability ratings, then the system should provide data trends, showing how sustainability ratings have improved or declined across products over that period.

Sustainability Rating Display

"As a Retail Customer, I want to easily view sustainability ratings on product pages so that I can quickly identify eco-friendly options when shopping online."

Description

The Sustainability Rating Display requirement entails integrating a user-friendly interface element within the product pages that visually showcases the sustainability ratings. This feature should be designed to highlight the ratings prominently, ensuring consumers can easily see and understand the eco-friendliness of each product. The display will need to be aesthetically pleasing and align with the overall design of the RetailRevolution platform while providing contextual information about what the ratings mean. This ultimately increases customer engagement and trust, enhancing the retailer's brand image as a sustainability advocate.

Acceptance Criteria

Display of Sustainability Ratings on Product Pages

Given a product with a sustainability rating, when the product page is accessed, then the sustainability rating should be prominently displayed in a designated area visible without scrolling, and the rating should be clearly labeled with a badge indicating the rating (e.g., 'Eco-Friendly', 'Sustainable Choice').

Contextual Information Tooltip for Sustainability Ratings

Given a sustainability rating is displayed on a product page, when users hover over the rating badge, then a tooltip should appear that provides a brief explanation of what the rating means, including criteria used for assessment and any relevant eco-certifications.

Responsive Design for Sustainability Rating Display

Given that the RetailRevolution platform is accessed on different devices, when a user views product pages on mobile devices, then the sustainability rating display should adjust responsively, ensuring the information is clearly visible and aesthetically pleasing across screen sizes.

User Interaction and Engagement Tracking for Sustainability Ratings

Given that a product page is displayed with sustainability ratings, when users interact with the page, then engagement metrics (e.g., clicks on ratings, time spent on ratings) should be tracked and logged in the analytics dashboard for future review.

Integration with Inventory Management System for Sustainability Ratings

Given that sustainability ratings are updated in the inventory management system, when changes to a product's sustainability rating occur, then the product page should reflect these changes in real-time without requiring a page refresh by the user.

Sustainability Reporting Tool

"As a Business Owner, I want to generate sustainability reports for my inventory so that I can evaluate our eco-friendly initiatives' effectiveness and communicate our progress to stakeholders."

Description

The Sustainability Reporting Tool requirement involves creating a feature that allows retailers to generate reports summarizing their product inventory's sustainability metrics. This tool will analyze data inputs and provide visual insights on sustainability performance, helping retailers assess their overall environmental impact. Reports can be generated on demand or scheduled at regular intervals, enabling proactive strategy adjustments. This aligns with business goals of enhancing transparency and accountability in sustainability efforts, thereby fostering customer loyalty and trust.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating a Sustainability Report for the Holiday Season

Given that the retailer has products with existing sustainability ratings, when the retailer initiates a report generation for the holiday season, then a report should be generated that includes sustainability metrics for all products and can be downloaded as a PDF file.

Scheduling Automatic Sustainability Reports

Given that a retailer has access to the Sustainability Reporting Tool, when they schedule a report to be generated weekly, then an email notification should be sent to the designated email with a link to the report every week.

Viewing Sustainability Metrics Dashboard

Given that the retailer accesses the sustainability metrics dashboard, when they select a specific product category, then the dashboard should display a visual representation of sustainability ratings for that category.

Creating Custom Reports Based on Product Types

Given that the retailer uses the Sustainability Reporting Tool, when they select specific product types and click 'Generate Report', then the tool should produce a report that includes only those selected product types and their sustainability metrics.

Analyzing Historical Sustainability Data

Given that sustainability reports have been generated and stored, when the retailer accesses the historical data section and selects a date range, then they should see a comparative analysis of sustainability ratings over that time period.

Exporting Reports to Different Formats

Given that the retailer has successfully generated a sustainability report, when they choose to export the report, then they should have the option to download the report in PDF, XLSX, and CSV formats.

Setting Custom Notification Alerts for Product Sustainability Ratings

Given that the retailer wants to stay informed about product sustainability changes, when they set custom notifications for specific products or categories, then they should receive alerts whenever there is a change in sustainability ratings for those products.

Alerts for Non-compliance Products

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive alerts for products that do not comply with our sustainability standards so that I can quickly address compliance issues and maintain our company’s commitment to sustainability."

Description

The Alerts for Non-compliance Products requirement focuses on setting up automated notifications that alert retailers when products in their inventory do not meet the sustainability criteria. This may involve flagging items with low ratings or products made with non-eco-friendly materials. The benefit of this feature is that it empowers businesses to take corrective actions proactively, such as adjusting product listings or removing non-compliant items, thus maintaining their commitment to sustainability and enhancing regulatory compliance.

Acceptance Criteria

Alert Notification for Products Missing Sustainability Information

Given a product in the inventory that lacks sustainability rating data, when the inventory system checks for product compliance, then an automated notification should be sent to the retailer indicating the specific product ID and the missing sustainability information.

Automated Alerts for Low Sustainability Ratings

Given a product in the inventory with a sustainability rating below the established threshold, when the inventory system evaluates product compliance, then an automated alert should notify the retailer of the product's low rating and suggest corrective actions.

Real-Time Compliance Monitoring for Newly Added Products

Given a new product added to the inventory, when the system performs a compliance check, then an alert should be generated if the new product does not meet the sustainability criteria, including details on non-compliance reasons.

Daily Summary Report of Non-compliant Products

Given that the retailer has non-compliant products, when the inventory system compiles daily compliance data, then a summary report should be generated and sent to the retailer's email outlining all non-compliant products within the previous 24 hours.

User Access Control for Alert Notifications

Given different user roles within the retailer’s organization, when alert notifications are generated, then they should be sent to the appropriate personnel based on their roles and responsibilities regarding product compliance.

Visual Dashboard for Monitoring Sustainability Compliance

Given that the retailer has a range of products, when accessing the dashboard, then it should display a visual indicator of compliance status for all products, highlighting non-compliant items in a distinct color for easy identification.

Settings Configuration for Alert Thresholds

Given an administrator of the inventory system, when configuring sustainability alert thresholds, then the administrator should be able to set, modify, and save threshold values that trigger compliance alerts for various product categories.

Eco-Friendly Product Recommendations

Utilizing a smart recommendation engine, this feature suggests alternative eco-friendly products to retailers based on their current inventory. By highlighting items that have better sustainability ratings or are made from recycled materials, retailers can inspire customers to make more environmentally conscious purchasing decisions, ultimately boosting the green product sales.

Requirements

Eco-Friendly Product Suggestion Engine

"As a retail manager, I want to receive suggestions for eco-friendly alternatives to the products in my inventory so that I can promote sustainable purchasing options to my customers and align with their values."

Description

This requirement mandates the development of a sophisticated recommendation engine within RetailRevolution that analyzes the current inventory of retailers and suggests alternative eco-friendly products. The system will take into account sustainability ratings, materials used, and consumer preferences to present viable eco-friendly alternatives to existing stock. This feature will enhance the user experience by promoting products that align with growing consumer demand for sustainability, thereby increasing the sales of green products. Furthermore, it will seamlessly integrate with existing inventory databases, ensuring that recommendations are relevant and based on real-time data. The anticipated outcome is to not only boost sales of eco-friendly products but also to position RetailRevolution as a leader in sustainability within the retail environment.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer views a product in their inventory and wants to explore eco-friendly alternatives that enhance sustainability.

Given a retailer is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they select a product with a low sustainability rating, then they should receive a list of at least three alternative eco-friendly products with higher sustainability ratings.

A retailer is curious about the sustainable options available for a specific product category to better inform their purchasing decisions.

Given a retailer selects a product category (e.g., cleaning supplies), when they request eco-friendly recommendations, then the system should provide a report of alternatives made from at least 80% recycled materials within 5 seconds.

A retailer receives an alert for low stock on a non-eco-friendly product and is prompted to consider eco-alternatives.

Given an inventory alert for a non-eco-friendly product, when the retailer clicks on the recommendation link, then they should see a selection of at least five suitable eco-friendly alternatives with details about their sustainability metrics.

The retailer wants to evaluate the effectiveness of the eco-friendly suggestions provided by the recommendation engine over time.

Given the retailer uses the recommendation engine for a month, when they review the sales data, then they should see a minimum increase of 15% in the sales of suggested eco-friendly products compared to the previous month.

A new retailer needs guidance on integrating eco-friendly product recommendations into their inventory process.

Given a new retailer accesses the setup wizard for the recommendation engine, when they complete the setup, then they should receive confirmation of successful integration with existing inventory systems, including a tutorial on using the feature.

A retailer receives notification about the latest eco-friendly products added to the recommendation engine.

Given the retailer subscribes to alerts for new eco-friendly products, when a new product is added, then they should receive an email notification within 24 hours containing details and benefits of the new items.

User Interface Customization for Recommendations

"As a retail owner, I want to customize how eco-friendly product recommendations are shown to my customers so that I can better target my marketing efforts and appeal to my audience's preferences."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a user-friendly interface within RetailRevolution that allows retailers to customize how eco-friendly product recommendations are displayed. Retailers will have the ability to modify the presentation style, set filters for sustainability criteria, and choose which product information is emphasized. This flexibility empowers retailers to tailor the recommendations to their specific target demographics, enhancing customer engagement and increasing the likelihood of eco-friendly product sales. A well-designed interface will also ensure ease of use, enabling retailers to quickly adapt their displays according to promotional campaigns or seasonal trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Customization of Display Filters for Eco-Friendly Recommendations

Given a retailer has accessed the user interface customization settings, when they select 'Eco-Friendly Recommendations', then they can apply and save filters that highlight products based on sustainability ratings or materials used.

Modifying Presentation Styles of Recommendations

Given a retailer is on the customization settings page, when they change the presentation style to a grid, then the eco-friendly product recommendations should display in the selected grid format with appropriate styles applied.

Emphasizing Product Information in Recommendations

Given a retailer has selected specific product attributes to highlight, when eco-friendly recommendations are displayed, then only the chosen attributes (such as 'material', 'sustainability rating', etc.) should be emphasized in the UI.

Real-Time Update of Eco-Friendly Recommendations

Given a retailer updates their inventory, when the system processes this change, then the eco-friendly product recommendations should refresh within two minutes reflecting the new inventory data.

User-Friendly Interface for Customization

Given a retailer is using the customization interface, when they navigate through the customization options, then they should find the interface intuitive and complete the customization within five minutes without external help.

Testing Different Display Configurations

Given a retailer has created multiple display configurations for eco-friendly recommendations, when they switch between these configurations, then each configuration should load accurately and persist any saved settings.

Accessing Customizations on Different Devices

Given a retailer uses the customization interface on a tablet or smartphone, when they access the eco-friendly product recommendations, then the display should be responsive and maintain the same functionality as on a desktop.

Integration with POS Systems for Eco-Friendly Promotions

"As a cashier, I want to see eco-friendly product recommendations integrated with the POS system so that I can inform customers about sustainable choices during the checkout process and drive additional sales."

Description

This requirement entails creating a feature that integrates Eco-Friendly Product Recommendations with existing Point of Sale (POS) systems. The integration will enable automatic updates of recommended eco-friendly products when items are sold or restocked, ensuring that the recommendations remain relevant and timely. Additionally, this feature will allow for promotional messaging at checkout, encouraging customers to purchase eco-friendly products. By facilitating direct links from the recommendation system to the POS interface, retailers can leverage sales data to enhance the effectiveness of their eco-friendly promotions, ultimately leading to increased sales and customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Eco-Friendly Product Recommendations with POS System for real-time updates.

Given an item is sold in the POS, when the transaction is completed, then the eco-friendly recommendation engine must update suggested products based on the remaining inventory in real-time.

Display of eco-friendly product recommendations at the point of sale during customer checkout.

Given the POS is processing a transaction, when an eco-friendly product is suggested, then it must display a promotional message encouraging the purchase of the eco-friendly alternative clearly on the checkout screen.

Confirmation of integration functionality after new stock is entered into the POS system.

Given new eco-friendly products are added to the inventory, when the POS system syncs, then the recommendation engine must include these new products within 5 minutes of being stock and reflect their sustainability ratings appropriately.

Functionality of the recommendation system in tracking sales impacts of eco-friendly product promotions.

Given a promotional period for eco-friendly products, when the sales data is analyzed, then there must be a measurable increase in sales of recommended eco-friendly products by at least 20% compared to the previous month.

User interface usability for the staff regarding accessing and understanding eco-friendly product recommendations.

Given retail staff access the POS system, when they view the eco-friendly product recommendations, then the interface must allow easy navigation and clear visibility of product details, ensuring no more than three clicks to access full product information.

Automated alerts for staff when eco-friendly products are low in stock based on the recommendations.

Given the inventory levels for eco-friendly products fall below the predetermined threshold, when a product is identified as low stock, then the system must generate an alert to notify the retail staff immediately.

Customer awareness and engagement with eco-friendly recommendations during checkout.

Given a customer completes a purchase including an eco-friendly product, when they leave the checkout, then a feedback request must be sent via email asking for their opinion on the eco-friendly product recommendation process.

Analytics Dashboard for Eco-Friendly Trends

"As a store manager, I want to access an analytics dashboard that shows the sales data for eco-friendly products so that I can identify trends and optimize my inventory based on customer preferences."

Description

This requirement specifies the development of an analytics dashboard that tracks the performance of eco-friendly product sales over time. It will provide retailers with insights into customer engagement with recommended products, highlighting trends, preferences, and overall sales impact. By utilizing this data, retailers can adjust their inventory and marketing strategies to enhance sustainability-focused offerings. The dashboard will feature visualizations that make it easy to analyze trends by product category, customer demographics, and sales performance. This feature will empower retailers to make data-driven decisions aimed at increasing the adoption of eco-friendly products within their stores.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to access the analytics dashboard to view eco-friendly product sales trends over the last quarter.

Given that the retailer is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the analytics dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of eco-friendly product sales trends for the last three months, including total sales figures, number of products sold, and trend line graphs.

Retailers are analyzing customer engagement data related to eco-friendly product recommendations from the dashboard.

Given that the dashboard is displaying customer engagement metrics, when the retailer selects the 'Customer Engagement' section, then they should see metrics such as click-through rates, conversion rates for eco-friendly products, and customer demographic breakdowns.

A retailer wants to filter the eco-friendly product trends by specific product categories to make informed restocking decisions.

Given that the dashboard is displaying eco-friendly product performance data, when the retailer applies filters for product categories such as 'Recycling Products' or 'Sustainable Materials', then the dashboard should update to show sales metrics strictly related to the selected categories only.

Retailers consider using the data from the dashboard to make marketing strategy adjustments.

Given that the retailer has accessed the analytics dashboard, when they review the trend data, then they should be able to generate a report summarizing insights on eco-friendly product sales and recommended actions for marketing strategies, downloadable in PDF format.

A retailer needs to see demographic trends of customers purchasing eco-friendly products to better target marketing efforts.

Given that the retailer is viewing the analytics dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Customer Demographics' section, then they should see detailed demographic data of customers who purchased eco-friendly products, including age, gender, and location breakdowns.

The retailer wants to ensure the analytics dashboard is accessible from various devices to make decisions on the go.

Given that the retailer accesses the RetailRevolution platform from different devices, when they log in to the dashboard using a tablet or smartphone, then the dashboard should be responsive and display all functionalities without any loss of data or visual elements.

Retailers expect timely updates on eco-friendly product sales performance.

Given that a retailer has accessed the analytics dashboard, when they refresh the dashboard, then it should update the sales performance data to reflect real-time information within a few seconds without error messages or delays.

Educational Content Integration for Retailers

"As a retailer, I want access to educational materials about eco-friendly products so I can better inform my customers and improve my store's sustainability initiatives."

Description

This requirement involves integrating educational content within the RetailRevolution platform, providing retailers with resources on the importance of sustainability and the benefits of eco-friendly products. This content may include articles, videos, and case studies that retailers can utilize to enhance their marketing efforts and educate their customers. By increasing awareness and understanding of the value of eco-friendly products, this feature aims to drive greater acceptance and sales of these items. The integration of educational content will serve not only as a tool for retailers but also foster a community of environmentally conscious businesses leveraging sustainable practices.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers access the educational content from the dashboard of the RetailRevolution platform to inform themselves about eco-friendly practices and products.

Given a retailer is logged into their RetailRevolution account, when they navigate to the educational content section, then they should see a list of articles, videos, and case studies related to sustainability and eco-friendly products.

Retailers view the video content on sustainability to enhance their marketing strategies.

Given a retailer selects a video from the educational content section, when the video is played, then the playback should function without buffering and include subtitles for accessibility.

Retailers utilize the articles and case studies to educate their staff on eco-friendly product options.

Given a retailer opens an article, when they finish reading and close it, then the platform should track their engagement and offer suggestions for similar content based on their interests.

Retailers share educational content with customers via their marketing channels.

Given a retailer selects educational content to share, when they generate a shareable link, then that link should provide direct access to the content without any login barriers for customers.

Retailers perceive an increase in customer inquiries about eco-friendly products after using the educational content.

Given a retailer has been utilizing the educational content for one month, when the retailer reviews customer inquiry data, then there should be a measurable increase in the number of inquiries related to eco-friendly products compared to the previous month.

Retailers provide feedback on the educational content effectiveness within the platform.

Given a retailer has accessed the educational content, when they submit feedback through a provided survey or feedback form, then their feedback should be recorded and reflected in the content improvement metrics.

Sustainability Scorecard

The Sustainability Scorecard provides an aggregated view of a retailer’s overall product sustainability performance. By evaluating factors such as percentage of eco-friendly products, average sustainability ratings, and customer feedback on eco-conscious initiatives, this feature empowers businesses to benchmark their progress and set targets for improving their green credentials.

Requirements

Sustainability Data Aggregation

"As a sustainability manager, I want to aggregate data on product sustainability so that I can assess our current performance and identify areas for improvement."

Description

The Sustainability Data Aggregation requirement involves the collection and integration of various data points related to product sustainability. This includes sourcing information on eco-friendly products, gathering average sustainability ratings, and compiling customer feedback on sustainability initiatives. The goal is to create a centralized database that provides an accurate and comprehensive view of sustainability metrics. This feature will enhance the Sustainability Scorecard's ability to provide actionable insights and accurate benchmarking for retailers, allowing them to assess their sustainability efforts effectively. By integrating data from various sources, the platform will also enable the tracking of progress over time and foster accountability towards sustainability goals.

Acceptance Criteria

Integrating eco-friendly product data into the Sustainability Scorecard.

Given that the user has input eco-friendly product information, when they access the Sustainability Scorecard, then the system should display the correct percentage of eco-friendly products in the overall inventory and visualize this data in a user-friendly manner.

Collecting average sustainability ratings from multiple sources.

Given that sustainability ratings are sourced from approved databases, when the user retrieves the average ratings for products, then the system should present an accurate average based on the latest data collected, updated in real-time.

Compiling customer feedback on sustainability initiatives and integrating it into the scorecard.

Given that customer feedback is received via surveys and reviews, when this feedback is compiled, then the system should display an average sustainability feedback score and categorize feedback into positive, neutral, and negative on the Sustainability Scorecard.

Establishing a centralized database for sustainability metrics.

Given that data from various sources is parsed and integrated, when a user queries the centralized database, then the system should return an accurate and comprehensive view of sustainability metrics for all products, ready for review.

Enabling progress tracking over time for sustainability initiatives.

Given the user has initiated a sustainability initiative, when the progress is updated in the system, then the Sustainability Scorecard should reflect the latest progress metrics against the defined targets, allowing for time-based comparisons.

Allowing retailers to set targets within the Sustainability Scorecard.

Given that a retailer wishes to improve their sustainability performance, when they set specific measurable targets in the system, then these targets should be visible on the Sustainability Scorecard, along with an indicator of current performance versus the target.

Custom Benchmarking Targets

"As a retail business owner, I want to set custom sustainability targets so that I can tailor my sustainability initiatives to our specific business needs and compare with industry standards."

Description

The Custom Benchmarking Targets requirement allows retailers to set specific sustainability goals based on their unique business context and industry standards. Retailers can customize targets regarding the percentage of eco-friendly products, average sustainability ratings, and customer engagement with eco-conscious initiatives. This feature enhances the functionality of the Sustainability Scorecard by providing a personalized approach to sustainability performance measurement. It empowers retailers to take ownership of their sustainability journey and motivates them to strive for their defined objectives, while also allowing for comparison with industry benchmarks, enhancing competitive edge and accountability.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer wants to set a custom target for eco-friendly products as part of their sustainability efforts.

Given the retailer accesses the Custom Benchmarking Targets feature, when they input a target percentage for eco-friendly products, then the system saves the target and displays it under the Sustainability Scorecard.

A retailer needs to compare their sustainability targets with the industry standards to ensure competitiveness.

Given the retailer has set custom benchmarking targets, when they access the comparison feature, then they can view their targets against predefined industry benchmarks clearly represented on the Sustainability Scorecard.

A retailer is looking to modify their average sustainability rating target after initial input to better reflect their updated goals.

Given the retailer previously set an average sustainability rating target, when they input a new target rating, then the system updates the target and confirms the change with a success message.

The retailer wants to track the progress towards their sustainability targets over time to improve accountability.

Given the retailer has established custom targets on the Sustainability Scorecard, when they view the scorecard, then they should see progress indicators representing their achievement towards each target, updated in real-time.

A retail manager is conducting a quarterly review of customer feedback related to eco-conscious initiatives and wants to adjust targets accordingly.

Given the retailer has gathered customer feedback, when they access the Custom Benchmarking Targets section, then they can adjust targets based on feedback metrics and save the enhancements for ongoing reference.

The system needs to ensure that only valid numerical inputs are accepted for targets set by the retailer.

Given the retailer is in the Custom Benchmarking Targets input form, when they attempt to enter non-numerical values for any target field, then the system should reject the input and display an error message indicating acceptable input formats.

Real-time Sustainability Reporting

"As a retail manager, I want to access real-time sustainability reports so that I can monitor our progress continuously and make data-driven decisions promptly."

Description

The Real-time Sustainability Reporting requirement enables the generation of instant reports on sustainability metrics, offering retailers the ability to track and visualize their progress continuously. This feature will integrate with existing dashboards in the RetailRevolution platform, allowing retailers to evaluate their sustainability performance in real-time. By providing up-to-date insights, retailers can make informed decisions quickly and adjust strategies as necessary to improve their sustainability efforts. This real-time capability is essential for maintaining transparency and accountability in sustainability practices and effectively communicating achievements to stakeholders.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time visibility and tracking of sustainability metrics through the RetailRevolution dashboard.

Given that a retailer is accessing the Sustainability Scorecard dashboard, when they generate a real-time sustainability report, then the report must display up-to-date metrics on eco-friendly product percentage, sustainability ratings, and customer feedback within 5 seconds.

Evaluating sustainability performance changes over time for strategic adjustments.

Given that a retailer wants to assess their sustainability performance, when they select a date range on the dashboard, then the sustainability report must accurately reflect metrics for the selected timeframe, allowing the retailer to compare performance trends.

Communicating sustainability achievements to stakeholders through generated reports.

Given that a retailer needs to present sustainability information to stakeholders, when they export the sustainability report, then the report must be in a user-friendly format (PDF or Excel) that includes charts and key metrics, and maintain a consistent layout across iterations.

Integration of real-time sustainability reporting with existing system dashboards.

Given that the sustainability reporting feature is implemented, when a retailer accesses their main dashboard, then the sustainability metrics must seamlessly integrate, displaying alongside other key performance indicators without delay and distortion.

Accessibility of real-time reports on different devices for on-the-go decisions.

Given that a retailer requires access to sustainability reports from various devices, when they log in to the RetailRevolution platform on a mobile device, then they must be able to view and interact with the real-time sustainability reporting feature as they would on a desktop.

User feedback and system updates on sustainability reporting utility.

Given that a retailer has been using the real-time sustainability reporting feature for a month, when they provide feedback through the feedback mechanism, then the system must capture this feedback accurately and offer suggestions for improvements based on user experiences.

Automated generation of alerts for significant sustainability metric changes.

Given that the metrics being tracked are subject to fluctuations, when a significant change (greater than 10%) in a sustainability metric occurs, then the system must send an automated alert to the retailer's registered email and dashboard notification within 30 minutes.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a customer experience director, I want to integrate customer feedback on sustainability so that we can better understand customer sentiment and adapt our initiatives accordingly."

Description

The Customer Feedback Integration requirement focuses on incorporating direct customer feedback regarding sustainability practices into the Sustainability Scorecard. This feature will leverage surveys, social media insights, and ratings related to eco-friendly initiatives to provide a holistic view of customer sentiment towards sustainability efforts. By aggregating customer perceptions and experiences, retailers can better understand their market position and the effectiveness of their sustainability strategies. This feature not only enriches the scorecard’s data but also promotes customer engagement and loyalty by giving consumers a voice in environmental initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback through an online survey regarding the sustainability practices of the retailer after purchase.

Given a customer has completed a purchase, when they receive a survey link to provide feedback on sustainability, then the feedback is successfully recorded in the Sustainability Scorecard system.

Customer feedback is collected from social media platforms such as Twitter and Facebook regarding the retailer's eco-friendly initiatives and practices.

Given customer feedback is posted on social media, when the system scans for relevant hashtags and keywords, then the feedback is aggregated and displayed in the Sustainability Scorecard.

Retailer reviews the Sustainability Scorecard to evaluate the impact of customer feedback on sustainability ratings.

Given the Sustainability Scorecard has been updated with new customer feedback, when the retailer views the scorecard, then the scorecard reflects the latest percentage of eco-friendly products and average sustainability ratings based on customer input.

Customer rates the retailer's sustainability initiatives directly on the website.

Given a customer visits the retailer's website, when they submit a rating and comments on the sustainability initiatives, then the feedback should be stored and displayed accurately in the Sustainability Scorecard.

Retailer analyzes aggregated customer feedback to identify trends in customer perceptions of sustainability practices.

Given that customer feedback has been collected, when the retailer accesses the analytics feature in the Sustainability Scorecard, then they can view trends over time that reflect changes in customer sentiment regarding their sustainability practices.

Customer feedback is used to create actionable insights and recommendations for sustainability improvements.

Given the customer feedback and ratings have been integrated into the Sustainability Scorecard, when the retailer accesses the insights dashboard, then it provides recommendations for enhancing eco-friendly initiatives based on customer sentiment.

Retailer sets goals for improving sustainability based on customer feedback data from the scorecard.

Given customer feedback is included in the Sustainability Scorecard, when the retailer sets improvement targets, then those targets align with actual customer feedback and sustainability performance metrics.

Sustainability Performance Alerts

"As a compliance officer, I want to receive alerts on sustainability performance thresholds so that I can respond swiftly to any potential issues and improve our overall sustainability efforts."

Description

The Sustainability Performance Alerts requirement involves creating automated notifications for retailers when certain sustainability metrics reach specified thresholds. This includes alerts for poor performance on eco-friendly product percentages or customer dissatisfaction related to sustainability practices. The goal of this feature is to ensure that retailers remain proactive in managing their sustainability initiatives. By receiving timely alerts, they can take immediate action to rectify issues or improve strategies before they impact overall sustainability performance. This feature supports continuous improvement by keeping sustainability efforts on the radar and facilitating rapid response to emerging challenges.

Acceptance Criteria

Sustainability Performance Alerts Triggered by Poor Eco-friendly Product Percentage

Given the eco-friendly product percentage falls below 20%, When the threshold is reached, Then an alert notification is sent to the retailer's dashboard and email within 5 minutes.

Alerts for Customer Dissatisfaction Related to Sustainability Practices

Given customer feedback on sustainability practices results in an average rating of less than 3 stars over a month, When the average rating drops, Then an alert is triggered notifying stakeholders about the performance issue.

Automated Alert for Unsatisfactory Sustainability Ratings

Given the sustainability ratings of products fall below 2 out of 5 for more than 10% of inventory, When this condition is met, Then an automated alert is generated for the inventory manager to review and address the issue.

Threshold Notification for Improved Eco-friendly Products

Given the percentage of eco-friendly products increases above 50%, When this milestone is reached, Then a congratulatory alert is sent to the retailer and recommendations for further improvement are provided.

Weekly Performance Summary of Sustainability Scorecard

Given the completion of each week, When the sustainability data is collected, Then a summary alert detailing all sustainability metrics and alerts must be sent to management every Monday.

Immediate Alert upon System Error for Sustainability Metrics

Given the alert system encounters an error or fails to trigger alerts, When this happens, Then an error notification must be sent to the IT support team automatically within 5 minutes.

Customizable Alerts for Various Sustainability Metrics

Given the retailer's unique sustainability goals and thresholds, When the retailer sets specific metrics for alerts, Then the system must generate alerts based on those customized settings accurately.

Inventory Sustainability Analyzer

This analytical feature reviews all products in the inventory against a set of predefined sustainability criteria, allowing retailers to identify gaps in their eco-friendly offerings. It assists users in refining their product selection and informs sourcing strategies to enhance their commitment to sustainability.

Requirements

Sustainability Criteria Database

"As a sustainability officer, I want access to a comprehensive criteria database so that I can evaluate our product offerings against established sustainability benchmarks and enhance our eco-friendly initiatives."

Description

This requirement involves creating and maintaining a comprehensive database of sustainability criteria that are relevant for various product categories. The database should include guidelines, standards, and benchmarks from reputable sources, enabling retailers to gauge the sustainability of their inventory effectively. It will integrate seamlessly with the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer feature, allowing real-time assessments of products against these criteria. By having this database, retailers can ensure they have access to up-to-date and relevant sustainability information, which will empower them to make informed decisions regarding product selection and sourcing strategies, ultimately enhancing their commitment to sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria

Database Integration with Inventory Sustainability Analyzer

Given that the Sustainability Criteria Database is populated with sustainability guidelines, when the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer requests data, then it should return accurate sustainability scores for each product based on the criteria stored in the database.

Updating Sustainability Criteria in the Database

Given that a new sustainability standard is released, when a user updates the Sustainability Criteria Database, then the changes should be reflected in the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer within one hour.

Accessing Sustainability Criteria by Product Category

Given that the Sustainability Criteria Database contains multiple product categories, when a user queries the database for a specific category, then the system should return all relevant sustainability criteria for that category with a user-friendly format.

Data Accuracy and Consistency of the Database

Given that data is entered into the Sustainability Criteria Database, when multiple users access this data, then all should receive the same data without discrepancies or delays.

User-Friendly Interface for Criteria Management

Given that the Sustainability Criteria Database has a web interface, when a user attempts to manage criteria, then they should be able to add, edit, and delete criteria without technical difficulties and with confirmation messages for each action taken.

Compliance with Data Privacy Regulations

Given that the Sustainability Criteria Database contains potentially sensitive information, when a data audit is conducted, then it should comply with all applicable data privacy regulations such as GDPR and CCPA.

Real-time Reporting on Sustainability Assessments

Given that the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer is used for product assessments, when users run a report, then the system should provide real-time analytics on the sustainability ratings of all products reviewed in the last month, with a breakdown by category.

Sustainability Gap Report Generation

"As a product manager, I want to generate sustainability gap reports so that I can identify areas for improvement in our inventory and develop strategies to enhance our eco-friendly product offerings."

Description

The Sustainability Gap Report Generation requirement focuses on implementing a reporting capability that summarizes the findings from the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer. This functionality will generate reports highlighting gaps in the current product offerings concerning sustainability criteria. Retailers can filter these reports by categories, product types, or specific criteria, making it easier to identify which areas require improvement. The reports will include actionable insights and recommendations for product adjustments or substitutions, providing retailers with a clear roadmap to enhance their sustainability profile and attract eco-conscious consumers.

Acceptance Criteria

Sustainability Gap Report Generation for Eco-friendly Product Identification

Given a user has access to the Sustainability Gap Report feature, when they request a gap report filtered by eco-friendly products, then the system should generate a report that lists all products failing to meet sustainability criteria with actionable insights for each.

Filtering Sustainability Gap Reports by Product Category

Given that the user is in the Sustainability Gap Report Generation interface, when they apply a filter for a specific product category, then the generated report should only include products from that category and highlight sustainability gaps.

Generating Sustainability Gap Reports with Actionable Recommendations

Given a completed analysis of products against sustainability criteria, when the user generates a sustainability gap report, then the report must include clear, actionable recommendations for product adjustments or substitutions based on the identified gaps.

Downloading Sustainability Gap Reports in Multiple Formats

Given a sustainability gap report has been generated, when the user selects the download option, then the report should be available for download in at least two formats (PDF and CSV).

Reviewing Historical Sustainability Gap Reports

Given that the retailer has previously generated sustainability gap reports, when the user accesses the report history, then they should be able to view, filter, and compare past reports to track progress over time.

Receiving Alerts for Significant Sustainability Gaps

Given that sustainability thresholds are predefined in the system, when a new sustainability gap report is generated that exceeds these thresholds for any product, then the user should receive an alert notification via email or in-app messaging.

User Role Permissions for Accessing Reports

Given different user roles within the RetailRevolution platform, when a user attempts to access the Sustainability Gap Report generation feature, then only users with the appropriate permissions should be able to view or generate reports.

User-Friendly Dashboard Interface

"As a retail manager, I want a user-friendly dashboard to visualize our sustainability metrics so that I can quickly understand our performance and make informed decisions to improve our eco-friendly product selection."

Description

This requirement specifies the need for a user-friendly dashboard interface that presents the findings of the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer in an easily digestible format. The dashboard should visualize key metrics such as percentage of sustainable products, areas needing improvement, and trends over time. It should be intuitive and allow users to drill down into specific categories or products for deeper analysis. By offering a clear and engaging visual representation of sustainability data, retailers can quickly assess their current standing and make data-driven decisions regarding their inventory and sourcing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer dashboard to review the sustainability metrics of their inventory.

Given the user is logged into their RetailRevolution account, When they navigate to the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer section, Then they are presented with a dashboard displaying a clear overview of the percentage of sustainable products, areas needing improvement, and trends over time.

User wants to drill down into the metrics of a specific product category to assess sustainability.

Given the user is on the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer dashboard, When they select a specific product category from the visual representation, Then the dashboard should display detailed sustainability metrics and analysis specific to that product category.

User needs to understand the trend of sustainable products over the last year.

Given the user is viewing the trend analysis section of the dashboard, When they select the time frame of the last year, Then the dashboard should graphically represent the increase or decrease in sustainable products over that period.

User wants to compare the sustainability metrics of two different product categories.

Given the user is on the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer dashboard, When they select two different product categories for comparison, Then the dashboard should display a side-by-side analysis of the sustainability metrics for both categories.

User wants to receive alerts for products that do not meet sustainability criteria.

Given the user has set preferences for sustainability criteria within the dashboard, When a product does not meet the defined criteria, Then the user should receive automated alerts indicating the product's status and suggested actions.

User requires accessibility of the dashboard on various devices.

Given that the user accesses the dashboard from a mobile device or tablet, When they open the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer, Then the interface should maintain usability and functionality, displaying all key metrics clearly.

User seeks to export dashboard metrics for reporting purposes.

Given the user is viewing the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer dashboard, When they select the export option, Then the system should allow them to download the current metrics and findings in a compatible file format (e.g., CSV or PDF).

Integration with POS Systems

"As a business owner, I want our sustainability analysis integrated with our POS system so that I can track the sustainability impact of our sales and adjust our inventory accordingly."

Description

This requirement entails the integration of the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer with existing point-of-sale (POS) systems utilized by retailers. This will enable real-time tracking of inventory sustainability metrics directly tied to sales data, allowing retailers to assess the sustainability impact of their product offerings dynamically. Such integration will facilitate better alignment between inventory management and sales strategy, enabling retailers to make informed sourcing decisions based on consumer preferences and sustainability goals. This underlying data connection is crucial for maximizing the effectiveness of the sustainability analysis features of RetailRevolution.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Inventory Sustainability Analyzer with POS System during a sales transaction.

Given the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer is integrated with the POS system, when a product is sold, then the sustainability metrics for that product are updated in real-time and reflected in the analytics dashboard.

User accesses Inventory Sustainability Analyzer to view sustainability metrics after integration with the POS system.

Given the user logs into RetailRevolution, when they navigate to the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer, then they should see a comprehensive list of products alongside their sustainability scores, which are accurately linked to sales data.

Retailer receives automated reports on sustainability metrics post-POS integration.

Given the integration of the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer with the POS system, when daily sales transactions are completed, then an automated report highlighting the sustainability impact of sold products is generated and emailed to the retailer.

Retailer filters product list by sustainability criteria in the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer.

Given the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer is fully integrated with the POS system, when a retailer applies filters for specific sustainability criteria, then they should see an updated product list that reflects only items meeting the selected criteria.

Retailer makes sourcing decisions based on sustainability reports generated by the integration.

Given the sustainability metrics are accurately captured and reported from the POS system, when the retailer reviews the sourcing options, then they should be able to make informed decisions based on the sustainability ratings of products.

Inventory Sustainability Analyzer provides alerts for non-compliant products after POS integration.

Given the integration with the POS system, when a product does not meet the defined sustainability criteria during a transaction, then the system should trigger an alert to notify the retailer of the potential non-compliance.

Retailer analyzes trends in sustainability metrics over time through the Inventory Sustainability Analyzer.

Given the integration is successfully completed, when the retailer examines historical sales and sustainability data, then they should be presented with clear trend analysis demonstrating changes in product sustainability metrics over time.

Notifications for Sustainable Product Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts for new sustainable products so that I can stay informed about market trends and enhance our inventory with eco-friendly options."

Description

This requirement includes the development of a notification system that alerts retailers about new sustainable product offerings that meet their criteria in a timely manner. Notifications should be customizable based on specific criteria or product categories, ensuring that users are informed about relevant sustainability options. This feature supports proactive management of inventory and sourcing strategies by keeping retailers updated on market trends and emerging eco-friendly products, allowing them to continually refine their offerings and cater to environmentally conscious consumers.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for new sustainable product offerings triggered by retailer-specific sustainability parameters.

Given a retailer has set up customizable notification criteria for sustainable products, When a new product matching those criteria is added to the inventory, Then the retailer receives an immediate notification via their preferred communication channel (email, SMS, in-app).

Notification customization and editing process by the retailer.

Given a retailer wants to customize their notification preferences, When they access the settings panel for notifications, Then they can add, modify, or delete criteria and view a summary of their active notification settings without any errors.

Integration of notification system with existing POS and inventory management platforms.

Given the notification system needs to interface with existing POS systems, When a sustainable product is added in inventory, Then the notification system automatically syncs and updates the retailer's notifications without manual intervention, ensuring all active criteria are applied.

Review of notification effectiveness over a predetermined period.

Given a retailer wants to review the effectiveness of the notifications received, When they generate a report of triggered notifications over the last month, Then the report displays the number of notifications sent, the categories of products, and retailer response actions taken (e.g., product purchases, inquiries).

User satisfaction measurement of the notification system.

Given the retailer has received notifications regarding new sustainable products for a month, When they complete a user satisfaction survey, Then the feedback metrics should indicate at least an 80% satisfaction rate with relevance and timeliness of notifications.

Implementation of default notification settings for new users.

Given a new retailer registers for the service, When they access their notification settings for the first time, Then they should see default criteria enabled that align with general sustainability standards, which they can modify if desired.

Turn off and manage notification settings easily by the user.

Given a retailer wants to stop receiving notifications, When they navigate to the notification settings, Then they can easily disable or customize their notification preferences with clear options available and confirmation of changes made.

Customer Impact Insights

Leveraging data analytics, this feature shows retailers the environmental impact of their inventory choices, such as carbon footprint and resource usage statistics. By providing this information, retailers can better communicate their sustainability efforts to customers, thereby enhancing brand loyalty among environmentally conscious consumers.

Requirements

Environmental Impact Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to see the environmental impact of the products I stock, so that I can make more sustainable purchasing decisions that align with my brand values and appeal to eco-conscious customers."

Description

The Environmental Impact Dashboard provides retailers with a user-friendly interface that displays key metrics about the environmental consequences of their inventory choices. This dashboard aggregates data on carbon emissions, water usage, and energy consumption linked to products in real-time. Retailers can filter the information by product category, time frame, and location to gain intricate insights into their operations, enabling informed decision-making aimed at reducing environmental harm. This functionality not only elevates operational transparency but also enhances compliance with sustainability standards, aiding retailers in communicating their environmental efforts more effectively to consumers.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer views the Environmental Impact Dashboard for the first time after logging into the RetailRevolution platform to assess the environmental impact of their inventory choices.

Given the retailer is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Environmental Impact Dashboard, then they should see a summary of carbon emissions, water usage, and energy consumption in a clear and organized format.

A retailer selects a specific product category on the Environmental Impact Dashboard to analyze the environmental impact metrics associated with that category over the last month.

Given the retailer is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they filter the data by a specific product category and set the time frame to the last month, then the dashboard should update to display only the metrics relevant to that category within the selected time frame.

A retailer wants to communicate their sustainability efforts to customers by accessing the detailed metrics of individual products from the Environmental Impact Dashboard.

Given the retailer is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they click on an individual product, then they should see detailed metrics including carbon footprint, water usage, and energy consumption specific to that product.

A retailer is preparing a sustainability report and needs to export the Environmental Impact Dashboard data in a format suitable for presentation.

Given the retailer is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they select the export option, then they should be able to download the dashboard data in CSV and PDF formats without any errors.

A retailer uses the Environmental Impact Dashboard to compare the environmental impacts of inventory choices across multiple locations.

Given the retailer has multiple locations set up in RetailRevolution, when they use the dashboard to compare metrics between these locations, then they should see a comparative analysis of carbon emissions, water usage, and energy consumption side-by-side for each location.

A retailer wants to understand how their inventory choices have improved over time regarding environmental impact, checking historical data on the Environmental Impact Dashboard.

Given the retailer is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they navigate to the historical data section and select a previous date range, then they should see a trend graph displaying changes in key environmental metrics over that period.

A retailer seeks to filter and view environmental impact metrics on the Environmental Impact Dashboard on a mobile device while on the go.

Given the retailer has accessed the Environmental Impact Dashboard from a mobile device, when they apply filters for product category and time frame, then the dashboard should display the relevant metrics in a user-friendly mobile format.

Sustainability Reporting Toolkit

"As a store owner, I want to generate sustainability reports that showcase my environmental efforts, so that I can build credibility with my customers and highlight my commitment to sustainable practices."

Description

The Sustainability Reporting Toolkit equips retailers with the capability to generate customized sustainability reports based on their inventory data. This toolkit streamlines the process of compiling environmental statistics, resource usage, and sustainability practices into comprehensive documents that can be shared with stakeholders and customers. Retailers can choose different report formats, including annual reports or progress updates, and include specific environmental goals and achievements. This feature enhances the retailer's ability to demonstrate accountability and commitment to sustainability, fostering trust and loyalty among consumers.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer generates an annual sustainability report to showcase their environmental efforts to stakeholders and customers.

Given the retailer has selected the annual report format, When they input their inventory data and select specific environmental goals, Then the system generates a comprehensive sustainability report that includes all relevant statistics and is downloadable in PDF format.

Retailer creates a progress update on their sustainability initiatives to share with customers during a community event.

Given the retailer chooses the progress update format, When they input interim data and select key sustainability metrics, Then the system generates a visually appealing report that is ready to be printed and distributed at the event.

Retailer reviews the environmental impact statistics generated by the toolkit before sharing the sustainability report with customers.

Given the retailer has generated a sustainability report, When they access the report preview, Then they can review metrics such as carbon footprint and resource usage, ensuring accuracy before publication.

Retailer customizes the sustainability report to align with specific branding and presentation requirements.

Given the retailer is editing the sustainability report layout, When they apply their brand colors and logos, Then the final report reflects the branding choices accurately and can be saved as a template for future reports.

Retailer evaluates their sustainability reporting capabilities after generating multiple reports over a year.

Given the retailer has produced several sustainability reports, When they analyze report summaries and trends, Then they can identify improvements in inventory choices and reduced environmental impact through the analytics provided by the toolkit.

Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool

"As a purchasing agent, I want to compare the carbon footprints of different products, so that I can select inventory that minimizes environmental impact and aligns with our sustainability goals."

Description

The Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool allows retailers to compare the carbon footprint of different products within their inventory. Utilizing historical data and analytics, this tool provides insights into which products are more sustainable based on their environmental impact. Retailers can visualize the differences through graphical representations, enabling quick identification of eco-friendlier options. This feature aids retailers in optimizing their inventory by favoring lower-impact products, ultimately supporting their marketing strategies centered around sustainability while contributing to global climate goals.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer uses the Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool to evaluate and compare the carbon footprint of two different products before making a purchasing decision.

Given that the retailer selects two products in the tool, when they initiate the comparison, then the tool should display the carbon footprint for each product side by side, including a graphical representation of the data.

Retailer views the historical carbon footprint data for products to identify trends over time for low-impact versus high-impact items.

Given that the retailer accesses the historical data section of the tool, when they apply filters for specific product categories, then the tool should display a trend graph showing the carbon footprints of those products over the selected timeframe.

Retailer seeks to promote eco-friendly products to customers based on the insights provided by the Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool.

Given that the retailer has identified eco-friendlier options using the tool, when they generate a report or marketing material, then it should include the carbon footprint statistics and graphical comparisons of the chosen products for effective communication with customers.

A retailer trains staff to use the Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool for informed product selection.

Given that the training session is conducted, when staff members practice using the tool to compare products, then at least 80% of participants should successfully utilize the comparison feature during a quiz or practical exercise.

Retailer accesses the Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool on various devices to ensure functionality.

Given that the retailer tries accessing the tool on mobile and tablet devices, when they log in and attempt to use the comparison feature, then the tool should perform consistently, displaying all data accurately without any functionality loss on any device.

Retailer requests customer feedback about their awareness of the sustainability insights provided by the Carbon Footprint Comparison Tool.

Given that the retailer collects feedback through a customer survey, when analyzing these results, then at least 75% of respondents should express increased awareness of the environmental impacts of products due to the retailer's use of the tool in marketing efforts.

Integration with External Environmental Databases

"As a business analyst, I want to integrate our platform with environmental databases, so that we can access the latest sustainability metrics and ensure we're meeting industry standards."

Description

This requirement involves integrating RetailRevolution with external environmental databases and APIs that provide up-to-date information on sustainability metrics and compliance standards. By connecting with reliable sources of environmental data, retailers gain access to benchmarking capabilities, allowing them to measure their practices against industry standards. This integration fosters continuous improvement by identifying areas where retailers can enhance their sustainability efforts based on current trends and regulations, ensuring they remain competitive and compliant in an evolving market.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with External Environmental Databases for Accessing Carbon Footprint Data

Given the RetailRevolution application is integrated with external environmental databases, when a retailer queries a product's carbon footprint, then the application should return accurate and up-to-date carbon footprint data for that product.

Benchmarking Sustainability Metrics Against Industry Standards

Given that the RetailRevolution system has successfully integrated with environmental databases, when a retailer accesses the benchmarking feature, then it should display comparative sustainability metrics of the retailer's practices against relevant industry standards in a clear visual format.

Accessing Real-time Updates on Environmental Compliance Standards

Given that the integration with external APIs is active, when compliance standards are updated in the external environmental databases, then the RetailRevolution system should automatically refresh this information and notify the retailer of key updates.

User-friendly Interface for Viewing Sustainability Insights

Given the integration with external databases has been completed, when a retailer accesses the Customer Impact Insights dashboard, then they should be able to view sustainability insights in an intuitive layout that includes charts and graphs for easy comprehension.

Training Retailers on Utilizing Environmental Data

Given the integration with environmental databases has been finalized, when a retailer participates in a training session, then they should be able to successfully demonstrate the ability to access, interpret, and utilize environmental data to inform their inventory choices.

Feedback Mechanism for Continuous Improvement

Given the integration of external environmental data is operational, when retailers provide feedback on the usefulness of the sustainability metrics, then the RetailRevolution platform should record this feedback for future enhancements and improvements in a dedicated feedback section.

Customer Education Module

"As a customer, I want to learn about the environmental impacts of my purchases while shopping, so that I can make more informed decisions and support brands that prioritize sustainability."

Description

The Customer Education Module provides retailers with tools to educate consumers about the environmental impacts of their purchases. This module includes interactive content such as infographics, articles, and videos that explain sustainability concepts and the significance of making eco-friendly choices. It enhances customer engagement by allowing retailers to showcase their commitment to sustainability and empowering consumers to make informed decisions. Ultimately, this feature strengthens the retailer's brand image and fosters a community around sustainable practices.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers use the Customer Education Module to present educational materials about the carbon footprint of their products during a marketing campaign on social media.

Given the retailer selects a product, When the retailer accesses the Customer Education Module, Then the retailer can view and select interactive content related to the product's environmental impact, including infographics, articles, and videos.

A retailer integrates the Customer Education Module into their website, allowing customers to access sustainability content before making a purchase.

Given a customer visits the retailer's website, When the customer navigates to the sustainability section, Then the customer should be able to view a selection of educational materials related to eco-friendly purchasing choices.

Retailers want to measure customer engagement with the educational materials provided by the Customer Education Module post-implementation.

Given the retailer has launched the Customer Education Module, When customers interact with the educational content, Then the retailer can view analytics on user engagement metrics, including views, time spent on content, and shared content statistics.

A retailer publishes an article about sustainable practices through the Customer Education Module and wants to ensure customers can easily share this content on social media.

Given the article is published within the Customer Education Module, When a customer views the article, Then the customer should see sharing options for major social media platforms that function correctly.

Retailers want to provide feedback options on the educational materials to understand customer perceptions better.

Given a customer has accessed the educational materials, When the customer completes the feedback form, Then the retailer should receive a summary of feedback responses categorized by positive, negative, and neutral ratings.

A retailer wants to regularly update the content available in the Customer Education Module to keep it current and relevant for consumers.

Given the retailer wishes to update the content, When the retailer accesses the content management section of the Customer Education Module, Then the retailer should be able to add, modify, or remove content and successfully save those changes.

Supplier Sustainability Assessment

This feature rates suppliers based on their sustainability practices and product sourcing. By integrating this evaluation into the inventory management system, retailers gain the ability to select suppliers who align with their eco-friendly values, fostering sustainable partnerships throughout their supply chain.

Requirements

Supplier Evaluation Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to view a supplier evaluation dashboard so that I can easily assess and compare suppliers based on their sustainability practices and make responsible sourcing decisions that align with my company’s values."

Description

This requirement entails the creation of a centralized dashboard within the RetailRevolution platform that allows retailers to view comprehensive assessments of each supplier based on their sustainability practices. This interface will display metrics such as carbon footprint, waste management practices, and ethical sourcing standards. The dashboard will enable retailers to make informed decisions by comparing suppliers' sustainability ratings, thus enhancing their ability to foster eco-friendly partnerships and align their purchasing strategies with their corporate social responsibility goals. The integration of this dashboard facilitates not only transparency in supplier practices but also helps retailers actively engage in sustainable sourcing initiatives, ultimately contributing to an overall improvement in the supply chain's environmental impact.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer accesses the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard to view supplier sustainability metrics during a sourcing meeting.

Given the Retailer is logged into RetailRevolution, when they navigate to the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, then they should see a list of suppliers with their respective sustainability ratings, including metrics on carbon footprint, waste management, and ethical sourcing.

Retailer selects a specific supplier from the dashboard to examine detailed sustainability practices.

Given the Retailer is viewing the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, when they click on a supplier's name, then they should be directed to a detailed view displaying comprehensive information about that supplier's sustainability practices and ratings.

Retailer compares multiple suppliers based on sustainability metrics to make a conscious sourcing decision.

Given the Retailer is using the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, when they select multiple suppliers for comparison, then they should be able to view side-by-side sustainability metrics and ratings to facilitate informed decision-making.

Retailer generates a report on supplier sustainability assessments for stakeholder review.

Given the Retailer is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, when they initiate a report generation, then a downloadable report should be created that includes all selected suppliers' sustainability ratings and metrics.

Retailer receives automated alerts when a supplier's sustainability rating changes.

Given the Retailer is subscribed to supplier sustainability updates, when a supplier's sustainability rating is updated, then the Retailer should receive an email notification detailing the changes in the supplier's sustainability practices.

Retailer checks the integration of the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard with POS systems to ensure seamless data flow.

Given the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard is integrated with the existing POS system, when retailers update supplier information, then changes should reflect in real-time across both systems without any data inconsistency.

Retailer accesses the dashboard on different devices to validate cloud-based functionality.

Given the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard is cloud-based, when the Retailer logs in from a mobile device or tablet, then the dashboard should be fully operational and display all functionality available on the desktop version.

Sustainability Rating Algorithm

"As a procurement officer, I want an automated sustainability rating algorithm so that I can quickly assess suppliers objectively based on their sustainability practices, ensuring that my purchasing decisions support environmental goals."

Description

The requirement focuses on developing an algorithm that quantitatively evaluates supplier sustainability based on predefined criteria such as carbon emissions, material sourcing, and ethical labor practices. The algorithm will aggregate data from various sources including third-party certification bodies, supplier reports, and internal audits. This will not only automate the assessment process but also provide a standardized rating system that allows retailers to objectively compare suppliers. By implementing this algorithm, the RetailRevolution platform will empower retailers with data-driven insights into their supply chain’s sustainability, promoting improved supplier selection and enhanced compliance with sustainability metrics.

Acceptance Criteria

Sustainability Rating Calculation for New Suppliers

Given a new supplier submits their sustainability data, When the algorithm processes this data against the predefined criteria, Then the algorithm should generate a sustainability rating between 1 and 5, with 5 being the most sustainable.

Integration of Third-Party Certification Data

Given that the algorithm is configured to pull data from third-party certification bodies, When the data is accessed, Then the sustainability rating for each supplier should automatically include verified certifications relevant to carbon emissions, material sourcing, and labor practices.

Historical Data Impact on Sustainability Ratings

Given that the algorithm has access to historical supplier performance data, When a supplier’s new data is evaluated, Then the sustainability rating should reflect improvements or declines based on historical performance metrics over the past three cycles.

User Dashboard Display of Supplier Ratings

Given the retailer accesses the supplier management dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then the sustainability ratings for all suppliers should be displayed in a sortable table format along with detailed breakdown metrics.

Notification System for Low Sustainability Ratings

Given a supplier receives a sustainability rating below a specified threshold, When the rating is finalized, Then an automated alert should be sent to relevant users via email and/or push notification outlining the reasons for the low score and recommended actions.

Comparative Analysis of Supplier Sustainability Ratings

Given that multiple suppliers are being evaluated, When a retailer selects two or more suppliers for comparison, Then the system should provide a comparative analysis view that highlights differences in sustainability ratings and criteria scores clearly.

Supplier Interaction Module

"As a supply chain manager, I want a supplier interaction module so that I can easily communicate with suppliers about their sustainability practices, ensuring transparency and cooperation on sustainability initiatives."

Description

This requirement pertains to the integration of a module that allows retailers to communicate directly with suppliers regarding their sustainability practices and certifications. This module will include features such as messaging, document sharing, and feedback collection. By facilitating direct interaction, retailers can verify claims made by suppliers about their sustainability efforts and engage in discussions on compliance with sustainability initiatives. This module enhances collaboration, builds trust between retailers and suppliers, and promotes continuous improvement in sustainable practices throughout the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Sustainability Communication Flow

Given a retailer has selected a supplier, when they access the Supplier Interaction Module, then they should be able to send a message regarding sustainability practices and receive a reply within 24 hours.

Document Sharing Functionality

Given a retailer is in communication with a supplier, when they upload a document related to sustainability certifications, then the supplier should be able to view and download the document immediately.

Feedback Collection Process

Given a retailer wants to assess supplier sustainability practices, when they send a feedback survey through the module, then the supplier should receive the survey and be able to submit their responses within a week.

Real-Time Notification System

Given a supplier sends a message or uploads a document, when a retailer accesses the Supplier Interaction Module, then they should receive a notification reflecting the new communication without needing to refresh the page.

Sustainability Claims Verification

Given a retailer has received sustainability claims from a supplier, when they initiate a conversation through the module, then they should be able to confirm compliance with supporting documentation.

User Permissions Management

Given that multiple users have access to the Supplier Interaction Module, when an administrator sets user permissions, then each user should only access their designated features based on defined roles.

Integrated Supplier Rating System

Given a retailer interacts with their suppliers, when the interaction yields positive feedback, then the supplier's sustainability score should automatically update in the system.

Sustainability Tracking Alerts

"As a business owner, I want sustainability tracking alerts so that I can stay informed about any updates to suppliers' sustainability practices and certifications, allowing me to make timely sourcing decisions."

Description

This requirement involves the implementation of a notification system that alerts retailers when suppliers update their sustainability information or when new sustainability certifications become available. The alerts will inform users of relevant changes that may impact their supplier selections, helping them stay up to date with the latest sustainability practices and industry standards. By integrating these tracking alerts, RetailRevolution enables retailers to proactively engage with suppliers and ensures that their sourcing decisions consistently align with emerging sustainability trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for Supplier Sustainability Updates

Given a supplier updates their sustainability information, when the update is saved, then a notification should be sent to all relevant retailers subscribed to that supplier's alerts.

Alert for New Sustainability Certifications

Given new sustainability certifications are added to the system, when a retailer subscribes to certification updates, then they should receive an alert immediately after the new certification is published.

User Preference for Notification Frequency

Given a retailer sets their notification preference, when they select their preferred frequency (daily, weekly, monthly), then the system should respect this preference in sending alerts for sustainability updates.

Display of Sustainability Alert History

Given a retailer has received sustainability alerts, when they navigate to the alert history section, then they should see a chronological list of past alerts, including information about the supplier and the nature of the update.

Unsubscribing from Supplier Alerts

Given a retailer receives sustainability alerts from a supplier, when they click the unsubscribe link, then they should stop receiving notifications from that supplier and receive a confirmation of unsubscription.

Integration with Supplier Scorecard

Given a sustainability alert is received, when the retailer views the supplier scorecard, then the newly updated sustainability information should be reflected in the scorecard in real-time.

Data Integration for Sustainability Ratings

"As a data analyst, I want to integrate external databases for sustainability ratings so that I can ensure accurate and current information regarding suppliers’ sustainability practices, enhancing our ability to make informed decisions."

Description

This requirement specifies the need for integrating external databases and APIs that provide data on supplier sustainability practices into the RetailRevolution platform. This integration will ensure that sustainability ratings are based on accurate and up-to-date information, allowing retailers to rely on comprehensive datasets when making supplier decisions. By streamlining data collection from various reputable sources, this enhancement will enrich the supplier evaluation processes and support better decision-making by providing robust, data-driven insights into supply chain sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of External Sustainability Data Sources

Given the RetailRevolution platform, when a retailer requests supplier sustainability ratings, then the system must integrate and display data from at least three reputable external databases or APIs that provide timely updates on sustainability practices.

Real-Time Data Update Frequency

Given the requirements for sustainability ratings integration, when data from external sources is updated, then the RetailRevolution platform must reflect these changes within 24 hours to ensure all supplier evaluations are based on the most current information.

Data Accuracy Verification

Given the supplier sustainability ratings feature, when the data is pulled from the external sources, then at least 95% of the data must align with accepted industry standards for accuracy as verified by an independent audit.

User Notification of Data Source Changes

Given the integration of sustainability data sources, when any external data source is changed or updated, then the RetailRevolution platform must notify users via an in-app alert to ensure they are aware of the change in data sourcing.

User Interface for Sustainability Ratings

Given the implementation of supplier sustainability ratings, when a retailer views a supplier profile, then the system must display a clear, visual representation of the supplier's sustainability rating, including a breakdown of factors contributing to that rating.

Reporting Capabilities for Sustainability Data

Given the integration of sustainability ratings, when a retailer generates a report on suppliers, then the report must include an analysis of sustainability scores, comparisons with industry averages, and recommendations based on the data.

API Performance under Load Conditions

Given the requirement for data integration, when the system experiences high traffic levels, then the API must respond within 2 seconds for 95% of the requests made for supplier sustainability data to ensure optimal performance.

Supplier Sustainability Reporting Tool

"As a retail strategist, I want a supplier sustainability reporting tool so that I can generate comprehensive reports that track our progress in sustainability efforts, helping us to improve supplier relationships and accountability."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a reporting tool that enables retailers to generate detailed sustainability reports based on the data gathered from suppliers. Retailers can input their analysis preferences and receive tailored reports that reflect sustainability impacts, trends, and opportunities for improvement in their supplier relationships. This tool will support strategic planning and provide valuable insights for corporate social responsibility initiatives, thereby enhancing the retailer's accountability and commitment to sustainable practices.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer generates a supplier sustainability report to analyze eco-friendly practices before making sourcing decisions.

Given a retailer has access to the Supplier Sustainability Reporting Tool, when they input their analysis preferences and request a report, then the system generates a detailed sustainability report that includes metrics on supplier sustainability practices and ranks suppliers accordingly.

Retailer views sustainability trends over the past year to inform their purchasing strategy and promote sustainable suppliers.

Given a retailer requests historical sustainability data for the last year, when the report is generated, then it should display trends showing sustainability score changes and insights into supplier performance over time.

Retailer assesses potential improvement areas in supplier sustainability to enhance their eco-friendly sourcing strategy.

Given a retailer uses the Sustainability Reporting Tool, when they view the generated report, then they must see a clear section highlighting opportunities for improvement in supplier practices based on collected data.

Retailer shares sustainability reports with internal stakeholders to discuss supplier partnerships during a strategic planning meeting.

Given a retailer generates a supplier sustainability report, when they export the report to PDF format, then the document should maintain formatting, include all required data fields, and be ready for sharing with stakeholders.

Retailer checks compliance of suppliers with sustainability standards as part of their supplier due diligence process.

Given a retailer requests compliance information on their suppliers, when they generate the sustainability report, then it must clearly indicate which suppliers meet or fail to meet pre-defined sustainability criteria.

Retailer uses the reporting tool to track sustainability impacts of supplier changes over time to measure effectiveness of eco-friendly initiatives.

Given a retailer has made changes in supplier selection based on sustainability reports, when they generate a follow-up report after 6 months, then the report should reflect the impacts of these changes on overall sustainability metrics.

Sales Velocity Tracker

The Sales Velocity Tracker monitors sales patterns in real-time, identifying which products are selling quickly and should be replenished sooner. By providing insights into fast-moving items, this feature helps retailers avoid stockouts and maximize sales opportunities, ensuring that popular products are always available for customers.

Requirements

Real-Time Sales Analytics

"As a store manager, I want to see real-time sales data for my products so that I can quickly adjust inventory levels and ensure I'm never out of popular items during peak sales periods."

Description

The Real-Time Sales Analytics requirement entails the development of a dashboard that provides dynamic insights into sales velocity, allowing users to see product performance metrics as they happen. This feature is essential for retailers to adjust inventory and marketing strategies swiftly based on current sales data. The dashboard would aggregate data from multiple sales channels, presenting a comprehensive view of trending items and peak sales times. By utilizing advanced data visualization techniques, retailers can identify fast-moving products at a glance, significantly enhancing decision-making capabilities and optimizing stock levels based on actual sales performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales team reviews the Sales Velocity Tracker dashboard at peak selling hours to adjust inventory orders accordingly.

Given the Sales Velocity Tracker dashboard is open, when the sales data updates in real-time, then the dashboard should display the top 10 fast-selling products based on sales velocity metrics.

A store manager needs to analyze product performance during a flash sale to ensure optimal stock levels.

Given the store manager is viewing the real-time sales analytics dashboard during a flash sale, when they filter products by sales velocity, then they should see transaction counts and revenue metrics for each product sold in the last hour.

The marketing team wants to align promotional efforts with best-selling products based on the analytics provided in the dashboard.

Given the marketing team accesses the dashboard, when they generate a report for the top-selling products over the last week, then the report should include product names, total units sold, and gross revenue generated for each product.

A retailer is preparing for the upcoming holiday season and needs to ensure adequate stock for best-selling items.

Given the real-time sales analytics dashboard is being monitored, when a fast-selling product reaches a predefined threshold quantity, then an automated restocking alert should be triggered to notify the inventory manager.

The financial analyst uses the dashboard to forecast sales for the next quarter based on current sales trends.

Given the real-time sales analytics dashboard is displayed, when the analyst selects the forecast feature, then the dashboard should present projected sales trends based on current velocity data and historical performance.

The owner of the retail store needs to make informed purchasing decisions based on the performance of various product lines.

Given the owner accesses the dashboard, when they sort products by category and view sales metrics, then they should be able to identify which categories have the highest sales velocity and require replenishment.

A user wants to compare sales performance across different locations to identify where inventory replenishment is critical.

Given the user has access to the multi-location view, when they select two or more locations to compare, then the dashboard should show side-by-side sales velocity metrics for those locations for the selected time frame.

Automated Reorder Alerts

"As a retailer, I want automated alerts when stock levels are low so that I can reorder products in time and avoid losing sales due to stockouts."

Description

The Automated Reorder Alerts requirement focuses on implementing a proactive notification system that alerts retailers when inventory levels fall below a predefined threshold. This essential feature ensures that stock levels are maintained effectively, preventing stockouts of fast-selling items. Notifications can be tailored based on various criteria, including product class, sales velocity, and supplier lead times, ensuring that retailers receive timely and relevant alerts to restock their inventory. With this requirement, retailers can automate their ordering processes to maintain optimal stock levels across various locations, resulting in fewer missed sales opportunities and increased customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated reorder alerts are triggered when inventory levels for a specific product drop below the defined threshold during a typical sales day.

Given the inventory level of a product is below the defined threshold, when the daily sales report is processed, then an automated reorder alert must be sent to the retailer's dashboard and email.

Retailer customizes alert parameters based on product class and sales velocity, ensuring only relevant products trigger alerts.

Given a retailer modifies alert settings for specific product classes, when inventory drops below the threshold for those classes, then only alerts for those products are generated and delivered according to the set preferences.

The system triggers reorder alerts based on varying lead times from suppliers, ensuring optimal restocking times are met.

Given the defined lead time for a product's supplier, when the inventory level drops below the threshold, then the reorder alert should include a reminder on the lead time to ensure timely restocking.

Multiple users can access and manage automated reorder alerts from different devices in real-time.

Given multiple users are logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when one user updates the alert parameters for inventory levels, then all other users see the updated settings instantly without any delay.

Reports show the effectiveness of automated reorder alerts in reducing stockouts over a specified period.

Given the automated reorder alerts have been in use for 30 days, when a report is generated, then the report must indicate a reduction in stockouts by at least 20% compared to the previous 30-day period before implementation.

Alerts are customizable for different inventory categories, allowing retailers to set unique thresholds for each category.

Given a retailer has multiple product categories, when setting reorder thresholds, then the retailer must be able to specify a unique threshold for each category without overlaps or system errors.

Retailers receive alerts in a timely manner that allows for rapid restocking decisions without causing delays in sales.

Given an inventory level drops below the threshold, when the alert is triggered, then the alert must be received within 5 minutes during business hours to allow for prompt action.

Trending Products Report

"As a business owner, I want a report on trending products so that I can tailor my inventory and marketing efforts to maximize sales during high-demand periods."

Description

The Trending Products Report requirement establishes a feature that generates comprehensive reports detailing the fastest-selling products over specific periods. This functionality will enable retailers to analyze sales patterns and trends, offering insights into customer preferences and seasonal demand fluctuations. The report can be customized to analyze various time frames and metrics, providing tailored data that informs inventory planning and marketing strategies. By understanding which products are driving sales, retailers can focus their efforts on promotions and ensure that popular items are adequately stocked, ultimately supporting sales growth and enhanced customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Generate Report for Best-Selling Products Over the Last Month

Given that the retailer wants to analyze sales data for the last month, when the user requests the Trending Products Report, then the report should display a list of the top 10 best-selling products ranked by total sales volume for that period.

Customize Report for Seasonal Trends

Given that the retailer wants to understand seasonal sales patterns, when the user selects a date range for the past holiday season, then the report should show which products were the fastest-selling during that period, along with the percentage increase in sales compared to the previous year.

Send Automated Alerts for Trending Products

Given that a product is identified as a fast-seller in the Trending Products Report, when the report is generated, then the system should send an automated restocking alert to the inventory manager for those products that have reached a designated threshold.

Export Report to CSV Format

Given that the user wants to analyze the Trending Products Report in different software, when the user selects the export option, then the report should be downloadable in CSV format with all included metrics and data.

Visual Representation of Sales Trends

Given that the retailer wants to visualize sales data, when the Trending Products Report is generated, then the report should include graphs or charts illustrating sales trends over the selected time period for the listed products.

Filter Report by Product Categories

Given that the retailer wants to focus on specific product categories, when the user applies filters for product categories before generating the report, then the report should display only the top-selling products within those selected categories.

User Access Control for Report Generation

Given that different staff members have varying levels of access, when the department head requests the Trending Products Report, then the system should verify user permissions and allow report generation only if the user has the necessary access rights.

Automated Replenishment Scheduler

The Automated Replenishment Scheduler allows users to set specific parameters for when and how often products need to be replenished. This feature intelligently schedules replenishment alerts based on sales data and inventory levels, ensuring that stock is maintained without manual intervention, thereby reducing the workload for users.

Requirements

Dynamic Trigger Settings for Replenishment

"As a retail manager, I want to set dynamic trigger levels for replenishment alerts so that I can ensure that popular items are restocked promptly without overstocking slow-moving products."

Description

The requirement for dynamic trigger settings allows users to define specific thresholds for each product's inventory that will prompt automated replenishment alerts. This feature will empower retailers to customize their inventory replenishment strategy according to individual product performance, taking into account sales velocity and stock turnover rates. By integrating with sales data, the system ensures that alerts are timely and relevant, preventing stockouts and overstocking, thus optimizing inventory levels and increasing operational efficiency. This functionality is essential for enhancing stock management accuracy and responsiveness to demand fluctuations.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets dynamic trigger settings for a specific product in the inventory management system.

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the product settings and enter a minimum threshold for stock levels, then the system should save the threshold and display it on the product details page.

Automated replenishment alert is triggered based on sales data for a high-velocity product.

Given a product with a defined minimum threshold and a sales velocity above the predefined standard, when the inventory level falls below the threshold, then the system should generate and send a replenishment alert to the user.

User modifies the dynamic trigger settings for an existing product to accommodate seasonal demand fluctuations.

Given a user has access to the product settings, when they adjust the minimum stock level for the product and save the changes, then the system should update the alert parameters and display a confirmation message of the successful update.

Review of the dynamic trigger settings affects multiple products within the system for inventory optimization.

Given the user has set dynamic triggers for multiple products, when the system analyzes stock levels and sales data, then it should provide a report on which products require replenishment based on those triggers in real-time.

User checks the performance of the automated replenishment scheduler over a defined period.

Given a user accesses the performance report section, when they select a time frame for analysis, then the system should display metrics showing the effectiveness of the automated replenishment alerts in reducing stockouts and overstock situations for each product.

Integration with the POS system accurately reflects real-time sales data impacting replenishment triggers.

Given that the POS system has processed sales transactions, when the sales data is updated within the RetailRevolution platform, then the dynamic trigger settings should adjust automatically based on the new sales velocity.

Validating that the recalibrated trigger settings comply with the user's inventory management strategy.

Given a user has recalibrated their dynamic triggers, when they run a simulation of inventory levels based on projected sales, then the system should demonstrate the expected timing of planned replenishment alerts aligned with the user-defined strategy.

Sales Data Integration for Forecasting

"As a business owner, I want the system to analyze sales data trends so that I can predict the next demand accurately and plan my inventory replenishments effectively."

Description

This requirement involves seamless integration of sales data analytics into the Automated Replenishment Scheduler, allowing the system to analyze historical sales trends and make accurate predictions about future inventory needs. This capability will enhance the platform’s ability to forecast demand patterns based on seasonal trends, promotions, and historical data. By utilizing advanced algorithms, the system will generate actionable insights that guide inventory decisions, ultimately helping retailers maintain optimal stock levels and improve cash flow. This integration is critical for ensuring that replenishment schedules are data-driven and aligned with actual sales performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales data is integrated into the Automated Replenishment Scheduler to forecast inventory needs during a holiday sales period.

Given that sales data for the last three months is available, when the user sets the replenishment schedule for the holiday period, then the system should provide recommended restock levels based on a 20% increase in sales compared to the last quarter.

A user wants to review the replenishment schedule after integrating sales forecasting data based on seasonal trends.

Given that the replenishment schedule is generated after inputting seasonal sales data, when the user accesses the replenishment dashboard, then they should see inventory recommendations updated according to the highest sales month from the previous year.

The system evaluates current inventory levels and historical sales data to trigger a replenishment alert.

Given that current stock levels are at 30% of the ideal stock and sales data indicates a trend of increased sales, when the automated scheduler runs, then an alert should be sent to the user to replenish the product within 24 hours.

A user receives a notification for product replenishment based on predictive analytics from integrated sales data.

Given that the predictive analytics feature is operational, when the system identifies a potential stockout scenario based on sales velocity, then the user should receive an email notification with details of the product and suggested reorder quantity.

The forecasting algorithm analyzes past sales data to adjust replenishment parameters automatically.

Given that historical sales data is integrated into the system, when the user configures the replenishment settings, then the system should automatically adjust reorder levels based on the highest sales spikes observed in the previous year.

A retailer evaluates the performance of the replenishment scheduler post-integration of sales data.

Given that the replenishment scheduler has been running for one month using integrated sales data, when the user reviews the weekly performance report, then they should see at least a 15% reduction in stockouts compared to the previous month when manual replenishment was used.

Mobile Notification Alerts

"As a store manager, I want to receive mobile notifications for replenishment alerts so that I can act quickly to restock items while I am on the sales floor."

Description

The requirement for mobile notification alerts enables users to receive real-time replenishment alerts directly on their mobile devices. This functionality is vital for retailers who are often away from their desks or on the sales floor, ensuring that they are immediately informed of inventory needs. By providing timely notifications, the feature supports quick decision-making and facilitates proactive stock management. This enhancement also integrates with the platform’s existing cloud-based accessibility, ensuring that users have the flexibility to manage their inventory from anywhere at any time, thus improving overall operational responsiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile Notification Alerts for Replenishment on Sales Floor

Given a retailer is away from their desk and on the sales floor, when inventory levels reach the predefined threshold, then the retailer receives a mobile notification alert regarding the need for replenishment within 5 minutes.

Configurable Alert Parameters for Different Products

Given the user has set different replenishment parameters for various products, when a product reaches its threshold, then the mobile alert must reflect the specific product name and quantity needed for replenishment.

Integration with Cloud-based System for Notifications

Given the user has enabled mobile notifications, when an alert is triggered, then the notification should be sent to the user's mobile device regardless of their location, confirming receipt within 10 seconds.

User Response to Notification

Given a user receives a replenishment notification on their mobile device, when they tap on the notification, then they should be directed to the replenishment screen within the RetailRevolution app to take action.

Multiple User Notifications for Shared Inventory Management

Given multiple users are managing the same inventory, when a replenishment notification is triggered, then all designated users should receive the alert simultaneously to ensure coordinated action.

Historical Data Review Post-Notification

Given a successful alert for a replenishment, when the user accesses the historical alerts section, then they should find a record of all past notifications, including timestamps and response actions taken.

Custom Report Generation

"As an analyst, I want to create custom inventory reports so that I can analyze product performance and adjust replenishment strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement involves the development of a customizable reporting tool within the Automated Replenishment Scheduler that allows users to generate reports based on specific parameters such as product performance, replenishment frequency, and inventory turnover rates. This feature will equip retailers with the tools necessary to assess their inventory strategies and make data-driven decisions. Users will benefit from clear visualizations and statistical insights that can help identify trends, optimize inventory levels, and streamline operations. Custom reporting capability is essential for enhancing the analytic strengths of the platform and supporting informed decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to generate a custom report to analyze product performance over the last quarter, focusing on the frequency of replenishments and inventory turnover rates.

Given that the user selects the custom report option, when they specify the date range and product criteria, then the system should generate a report that includes product performance metrics, replenishment frequency, and inventory turnover rates in a downloadable format.

A retailer needs to evaluate the inventory strategy for the best-selling products, choosing specific products to analyze replenishment data.

Given the user chooses a set of products and selects the 'Generate Report' button, when the request is processed, then the system should display a report with visualizations specific to the selected products' replenishment alerts and sales trends.

An administrator wants to create a report detailing inventory levels across all stores, comparing each location's replenishment needs based on sales data.

Given that the administrator selects 'Generate Store Comparison Report', when they choose the stores and criteria, then the system should produce a comparative report showcasing inventory levels and suggested replenishment actions for each store.

A user is interested in understanding seasonal trends related to product sales and stock levels to prepare for the upcoming holiday season.

Given that the user applies seasonal filters in the custom report tool, when they request the report, then the system should provide insights on seasonal sales patterns, highlighting products that require increased replenishment during those periods.

A business owner wants to share the custom report with other team members, ensuring everyone has access to the latest data for decision-making.

Given that a user has generated a custom report, when they select the option to share the report via email, then the system should successfully send the report to the specified email addresses with the correct report data attached.

A user wants to verify that the custom reports align with actual inventory levels and sales data to ensure accurate decision-making.

Given that the user generates a custom report, when the report is compared with real-time inventory data and sales data, then the discrepancies should be less than 5%, confirming the report's accuracy.

An employee needs to customize a report layout to focus on certain parameters which they find most relevant for operations.

Given that the user is in the report generation interface, when they select the parameters and layout options and save them, then the system should retain these customizations for future report generations without reverting to default settings.

Supplier Lead Time Tracking

"As a supply chain manager, I want to track supplier lead times within the system so that I can adjust replenishment schedules based on actual delivery times, preventing inventory shortages."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling users to input and track supplier lead times directly within the Automated Replenishment Scheduler. By accurately monitoring how long it takes for suppliers to deliver products after placing orders, retailers can better plan their inventory replenishments and avoid stockouts. This feature will automatically adjust replenishment alerts based on supplier timelines, ensuring that orders are placed well in advance. The integration of supplier lead time tracking will significantly enhance inventory accuracy and help retailers maintain optimal stock levels relative to their supply chain capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to input supplier lead times into the Automated Replenishment Scheduler so that I can receive accurate replenishment alerts every time I place an order.

Given a retailer is on the Automated Replenishment Scheduler interface, when they input supplier lead times for products, then the system should save the lead times and reflect changes in the replenishment schedule.

As a store manager, I want to see the adjustments to replenishment alerts based on supplier lead times so that I can plan my stock accordingly.

Given supplier lead times have been entered, when the sales data indicates a product is below the threshold, then the system should trigger a replenishment alert that accounts for the lead time.

As a user of RetailRevolution, I want to edit supplier lead times when there are changes in delivery schedules so that my inventory remains accurately managed.

Given an existing supplier lead time for a product, when a user updates the lead time in the system, then the system should reflect this change and readjust upcoming replenishment alerts accordingly.

As an inventory manager, I want to be notified if there is a discrepancy between expected delivery time and actual lead times so that I can take action to prevent stockouts.

Given that supplier lead times are being tracked, when the actual lead time exceeds the expected lead time, then the system should send an alert to the user notifying them of the discrepancy.

As a business owner, I want to analyze past lead times to improve my future ordering process so that my inventory management is more efficient.

Given that lead times have been recorded, when a user requests to view historical lead time data, then the system should provide a report detailing average lead times and any trends over the past year.

As a user of the Automated Replenishment Scheduler, I want to ensure the system integrates with my existing POS to pull real-time sales data for accurate replenishment scheduling.

Given a retailer is using a POS system, when they integrate their POS with the Automated Replenishment Scheduler, then sales data should automatically populate and influence the replenishment schedule without manual data entry.

As a user, I want training and support regarding the supplier lead time tracking feature to ensure I can use it effectively.

Given the launch of the supplier lead time tracking feature, when users access training resources, then they should find comprehensive guides and support materials to help them utilize the feature correctly.

User Access Levels for Inventory Management

"As a system administrator, I want to set different access levels for users so that I can control who can manage inventory replenishments and ensure data security."

Description

This requirement involves implementing user access control levels for the Automated Replenishment Scheduler. By allowing different levels of access based on user roles, businesses can ensure secure management of inventory data. This feature will enable administrators to assign permissions to view or modify replenishment settings, ensuring that sensitive inventory data is only accessible to authorized personnel. This requirement is crucial for maintaining data integrity and preventing unauthorized changes, thus reinforcing the overall security framework of the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

As an administrator, I need to assign access levels to users for the Automated Replenishment Scheduler, so that I can control who can view or modify replenishment settings based on their roles.

Given that I am logged in as an administrator, When I attempt to assign a user role to a new user, Then the selected permissions should be successfully saved and reflect the user’s access level in the system.

As a store manager, I want to verify if my access level allows me to modify replenishment settings for my store’s inventory, so that I can ensure only authorized users make changes to critical settings.

Given that I am logged in as a store manager, When I access the replenishment settings page, Then I should only see options that my access level permits me to modify and not any restricted settings.

As a staff member, I need to ensure that I cannot make changes to the replenishment schedules if I do not have sufficient access rights, so that the integrity of inventory management is maintained.

Given that I am logged in as a staff member with limited access, When I try to modify any replenishment settings, Then I should receive an error message indicating that I do not have sufficient permissions to make changes.

As an administrator, I want to audit user access logs to ensure compliance with our security policies, so that I can quickly identify any unauthorized access attempts.

Given that I have administrator access, When I access the user activity logs, Then I should be able to see a comprehensive list of all user actions related to access and changes made to replenishment settings, dated and timestamped.

As an IT security officer, I want to understand if the system effectively prevents unauthorized access to the replenishment settings, thus ensuring the protection of sensitive inventory information.

Given that I attempt to access the replenishment settings with a user account that lacks permissions, When I enter the system, Then I should be denied access and redirected to an appropriate error page without breaching any security protocols.

Threshold-Based Alerts

Threshold-Based Alerts notify users when inventory for specific products falls below a predetermined level, prompting timely replenishment actions. Retailers can customize alert settings for each product category, allowing for a tailored approach to inventory management that aligns with individual business needs.

Requirements

Customizable Alert Levels

"As a store manager, I want to customize alert levels for different product categories so that I can effectively manage my inventory and reduce the risk of stockouts or overstocking."

Description

The Customizable Alert Levels requirement allows retailers to set specific inventory thresholds for different product categories based on sales velocity and seasonal demand. Retailers can adjust these settings dynamically through a user-friendly interface, enabling them to proactively manage stock levels. This functionality not only promotes timely reorder actions but also minimizes the risk of stockouts and overstocking scenarios. Additionally, the ability to customize alerts directly correlates to improved operational efficiency, ensuring that businesses are well-prepared for fluctuating market demands.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer customizes alert levels for seasonal products.

Given a retailer accesses the customizable alert levels interface, when they select a product category and input a new alert threshold, then the system should save the new threshold and display a confirmation message.

Retailer receives alerts when inventory falls below alert levels.

Given a product has a set alert threshold, when the inventory for that product falls below the threshold, then the system should send an alert notification to the retailer in real time.

Retailer adjusts alert levels based on sales velocity data.

Given the retailer is viewing sales velocity reports, when they adjust the alert thresholds for specific products, then the system should update the thresholds accordingly and show the new settings in the interface.

Retailer tests alert functionality after customization.

Given a retailer has customized alert levels, when they run a test by adjusting inventory levels below the customized thresholds, then they should receive the expected notification within five minutes.

Retailer manages multiple product categories with different alert settings.

Given the retailer is managing multiple product categories, when they view the alert settings for each category, then all customized alert thresholds should be displayed accurately and distinctly.

Retailer reviews historical data for trend forecasting.

Given the retailer accesses trend forecasting analytics, when they review the data for the past six months, then they should see accurate predictions based on customized alert settings and inventory trends.

Retailer integrates alert system with existing POS.

Given the retailer has an existing POS system, when they synchronize the POS with the customizable alert levels, then all relevant inventory data should update seamlessly and reflect accurate alert thresholds.

Multi-Channel Notifications

"As a retail owner, I want to receive threshold alerts via email and SMS so that I can be informed about inventory levels even when I am away from my computer."

Description

The Multi-Channel Notifications requirement enables users to receive alerts through various communication channels such as email, SMS, and push notifications on mobile devices. This ensures that retailers are promptly informed about critical inventory levels regardless of where they are, enhancing their ability to respond quickly and efficiently. By allowing for multi-channel communications, it caters to users’ varied preferences and strengthens the overall responsiveness of inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an email notification for low inventory levels of a specific product at 9 AM when the inventory falls below the threshold set for that product.

Given the inventory level falls below the set threshold, when the alert is triggered, then the user should receive an email notification instantly informing them of the low inventory status.

User opts in for SMS notifications exclusively and receives a text alert when inventory for a popular item is low, ensuring they can act promptly even while away from their computer.

Given the user has opted for SMS notifications, when the inventory level for a popular item falls below the threshold, then an SMS notification should be sent immediately to the user’s mobile phone.

A retailer sets customized push notification preferences for different product categories and receives alerts seamlessly on their mobile app when reordering is needed.

Given the retailer has set up push notifications for specific product categories, when the inventory threshold is breached, then the mobile app should send a push notification to the retailer's device without delay.

User receives an alert through all configured channels when inventory levels for a critical item fall below the threshold, ensuring they do not miss important notifications.

Given the inventory level for a critical item drops below the set threshold, when the alert triggers, then all configured channels (email, SMS, push) should send notifications to the user simultaneously.

A user modifies notification settings for certain product categories and verifies that notifications are properly updated to reflect these changes across all channels.

Given the user has updated notification settings for specific product categories, when the changes are saved, then the user should receive alerts only through the selected channels for those categories.

User receives inventory notifications at the appropriate times throughout the day, ensuring they are informed and can take timely actions to restock.

Given that the user has specific times set for notifications, when an inventory alert is triggered, then the notification should only be sent during the designated alert times.

System logs all notification events for auditing and performance evaluation, allowing users to review their alert history for effectiveness and adjustments.

Given that notifications are sent, when the user accesses the notification log, then all sent notifications should be listed with timestamps and channels used for each alert.

Historical Data Analysis

"As a data analyst, I want to analyze past inventory data to set more accurate alert thresholds so that our stock management is based on informed decisions rather than assumptions."

Description

The Historical Data Analysis requirement provides retailers with the ability to review past inventory data and performance metrics to inform future threshold settings. By analyzing trends in sales and stock levels, retailers can make data-driven decisions, optimizing inventory levels and adjusting alert thresholds accordingly. This feature aims to bridge the gap between historical insights and proactive inventory management, fostering better alignment with actual business needs and trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers can access historical data to analyze past inventory levels and sales metrics for specific product categories.

Given a retailer wants to analyze historical data, when they select a product category and specify a date range, then the system displays a detailed report of sales and inventory levels during that period.

Retailers are able to set or adjust alert thresholds based on insights derived from historical data analysis.

Given a retailer reviews a historical data report, when they choose to adjust the threshold for a specific product category, then the system updates the alert settings and confirms the changes via a notification.

Retailers can receive alert notifications based on updated thresholds to prevent stockouts or overstock situations.

Given a retailer has set threshold-based alerts, when product inventory falls below the specified threshold, then the system sends an alert notification to the retailer's registered device.

Retailers can generate a summary of trends based on historical analysis to guide future purchasing decisions.

Given a retailer accesses the trends analysis feature, when they request a summary of inventory trends over the last six months, then the system provides a visual graph depicting sales patterns and stock levels.

Retailers can review the success of threshold adjustments by monitoring the stock levels and alert responses.

Given a retailer modifies the alert threshold for an item, when they look at the inventory levels after one month, then the system shows a decrease in stockout incidents for that item compared to the previous period.

The system accurately logs all adjustments made to alert thresholds for auditing and backtracking purposes.

Given a retailer changes an alert threshold, when they request the change log, then the system displays a complete log of all threshold adjustments made, including timestamps and user details.

User Roles and Permissions

"As an admin, I want to control user roles and permissions related to threshold alerts so that I can ensure only authorized personnel can adjust critical inventory settings."

Description

The User Roles and Permissions requirement allows for the creation of specific user profiles that manage who can set or modify inventory threshold alerts. This includes features for administrators to grant or restrict access for various team members based on roles such as store managers, inventory specialists, or cashiers. Ensuring that only authorized personnel can make changes to alert settings enhances security and compliance within the inventory management system.

Acceptance Criteria

As an administrator, I need to create new user roles specifically tasked with managing inventory threshold alerts, ensuring that each role has clearly defined permissions and access levels relevant to inventory management tasks.

Given I am logged in as an administrator, when I create a new user role with specific permissions for managing inventory threshold alerts, then that role should be successfully saved and available for assignment to users.

As a store manager, I need to modify the threshold alert settings for a product category to fit the changing sales patterns of my store, ensuring that the alerts are tailored for optimal stock levels.

Given I am logged in as a store manager, when I attempt to modify the threshold alert for any product category, then I should be able to see the current settings and successfully update the thresholds without any errors.

As an inventory specialist, I want to review the user roles and their corresponding permissions to ensure that only authorized personnel can make modifications to threshold alerts.

Given I am logged in as an inventory specialist, when I access the user roles settings, then I should see a list of all roles along with their permissions related to inventory threshold alerts, and I should not be able to modify these settings if my role lacks the appropriate permissions.

As a cashier, I need to check whether I have permission to view threshold alerts without the ability to modify them, ensuring that my access levels are appropriate for my role.

Given I am logged in as a cashier, when I access the inventory threshold alerts section, then I should be able to view the current alerts but should not have any options available to modify the alert settings.

As an administrator, I want to ensure that after revising user roles and their permissions, all changes are logged correctly for audit purposes.

Given I am logged in as an administrator, when I change a user's role or permissions, then a log entry should be created that details the changes made, including date, time, and the administrator's username.

As a retailer focusing on compliance, I need to ensure that only specific user roles can access the settings to modify inventory threshold alerts, enhancing our security measures.

Given I am a retailer reviewing compliance, when I test the system by logging in as different roles, then I should confirm that only users with the 'administrator' or 'inventory specialist' roles can access and modify threshold alert settings, while all other roles are restricted.

Alert History Log

"As an inventory manager, I want to access a log of past inventory alerts so that I can review and analyze our inventory decisions for future improvements."

Description

The Alert History Log requirement provides a comprehensive record of all alerts that have been triggered, including timestamps, item details, and user actions taken. This log serves as an accountability measure and aids in analyzing the effectiveness of the threshold alert system. By reviewing historical alerts, users can identify patterns and areas for improvement in inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the alert history log after receiving a low inventory alert for a specific product.

Given the user has received a threshold-based alert, When the user accesses the alert history log, Then the log should display the specific alert triggered for that product, including the timestamp, item details, and any user actions taken.

A user filters the alert history log to view alerts from a specific date range.

Given the user wants to analyze past alerts, When the user applies a date range filter on the alert history log, Then the log should only display alerts that occurred within the specified date range.

An administrator reviews the alert history log to evaluate the frequency of alerts for each product category.

Given the administrator accesses the alert history log, When the administrator reviews the log, Then the log should categorize alerts by product, showing a count of alerts triggered for each category over a specified period.

A user searches for specific alerts related to a product that has recently triggered multiple alerts.

Given the user knows the product identifier, When the user enters the identifier in the search function of the alert history log, Then the log should return all alerts associated with that product identifier.

A user accesses the alert history log to check if appropriate actions were taken in response to previous alerts.

Given the user is reviewing the alert history log, When the user examines the log entries for a specific alert, Then the log should show whether the alert led to a user action such as restocking or ignoring the alert.

The system automatically archives old alerts from the history log after a set retention period.

Given the retention policy for alert history is set to six months, When the system reaches the end of the retention period, Then the system should automatically remove alerts older than six months from the alert history log.

Predictive Sales Insights

The Predictive Sales Insights feature utilizes machine learning to forecast future sales trends based on historical data. By anticipating demand spikes and declines, it empowers retailers to make informed decisions about when to replenish stock, leading to optimized inventory levels and enhanced profitability.

Requirements

Real-time Data Analysis

"As a retail store manager, I want to receive real-time sales forecasts so that I can make timely decisions on inventory replenishment and avoid stockouts or overstocking."

Description

The Real-time Data Analysis requirement focuses on deploying machine learning algorithms to process historical sales data in real-time, enabling retailers to generate accurate forecasts of future sales trends. By embedding this functionality into the RetailRevolution platform, it will allow users to access and analyze data with minimal latency, facilitating faster decision-making processes. This capability helps retailers to efficiently manage inventory by anticipating fluctuations in demand and supply, ultimately enhancing profitability and operational efficiency. It integrates seamlessly with existing data sources and provides dashboards for easy visualization of trends and insights, ensuring that users can act upon predictions quickly.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time data analysis is conducted by a retailer after receiving a new shipment of inventory, with the goal of determining optimal stocking levels based on the latest sales trends.

Given the retailer inputs sales data from the past 30 days, When the real-time data analysis is performed, Then the system must generate an accurate forecast of demand for the next 14 days that aligns with historical trends.

A retailer is preparing to launch a marketing campaign and wants to analyze real-time data to adjust inventory levels accordingly.

Given the historical sales patterns for similar promotional events, When the retailer runs the predictive sales insights during the campaign preparation, Then the system should provide recommendations for inventory levels that support the expected sales increase.

The retailer needs to assess inventory performance at the end of each month using real-time data insights, comparing actual sales against predicted sales.

Given the retailer reviews the dashboard at the end of the month, When the data analysis tool is accessed, Then it must display a comparison of actual vs. predicted sales with clear visual indicators highlighting discrepancies.

A store manager seeks to utilize real-time data analysis weekly to adjust ordering decisions based on the latest sales data and trends.

Given the store manager accesses the analysis tool each week, When the real-time sales data is processed, Then the system should accurately reflect any changes in sales trends to guide reordering decisions.

In the event of unexpected market shifts, a retailer needs to quickly reassess inventory needs through real-time data analysis.

Given an unexpected spike in demand is identified, When the real-time data analysis is triggered, Then the system must alert the retailer with updated restocking recommendations within 5 minutes of data processing.

A multi-location retailer wants to compare inventory performance across different locations using real-time analytics.

Given that the retailer operates multiple locations, When real-time data is analyzed, Then the results must include customized dashboards for each location to compare sales performance and stock levels effectively.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive automated alerts for restocking products so that I can ensure my inventory is always at optimal levels and my customers can find what they need."

Description

The Automated Restocking Alerts requirement ensures that the system automatically notifies retailers when stock levels fall below predefined thresholds based on predicted demand. By utilizing predictive analytics, the alerts will provide actionable insights on when to reorder products, thereby preventing both stockouts and excess inventory. This feature not only saves time for store managers but also enhances customer satisfaction by ensuring that popular items are always available. The alerts will be customizable to suit each retailer's specific inventory patterns and business needs, maintaining operational balance and optimizing stock flows in real-time.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives an automated alert when stock levels of a specific product fall below the predefined threshold during peak shopping hours.

Given the stock level of a product is at 10 units and the predefined threshold is 15 units, when the stock level is updated in the system, then an alert should be triggered to notify the retailer.

Customization of restocking alerts for different products based on historical sales data.

Given a retailer customizes the alert thresholds for different products, when the stock of a product falls below its customized threshold, then the system sends a notification specific to that product’s threshold.

Retailer reviews predictive insights to adjust inventory thresholds based on upcoming sales events.

Given a retailer accesses the predictive sales insights feature, when they select a specific upcoming sales event, then they should be able to view suggested stock levels and adjust thresholds accordingly.

Real-time notification system for stockouts during store operational hours.

Given a product’s stock reaches zero at any point during operational hours, when the system detects the stockout, then an immediate alert should be sent to store managers via their preferred notification method.

Integration of automated restocking alerts with existing POS systems to streamline inventory management.

Given an existing POS system is integrated with RetailRevolution, when a stock alerts generated, then the POS system should reflect the updated stock levels and trigger the replenishment process automatically.

Validation of alert accuracy post implementation upon receiving alerts during the testing phase.

Given the system has been implemented, when stock levels of products change, then at least 95% of the generated alerts should accurately reflect the current stock levels and thresholds set by the retailer.

Feedback collection from retailers regarding the effectiveness of restocking alerts.

Given retailers have been using the restocking alerts for one month, when a feedback survey is distributed, then at least 80% of the retailers should report that the alerts have improved their inventory management efficiency.

Customizable Forecasting Parameters

"As a retail analyst, I want to customize the forecasting parameters so that I can adapt the models to reflect specific promotions or seasonal trends and improve sales accuracy."

Description

The Customizable Forecasting Parameters requirement allows users to define specific variables that influence sales forecasting, such as seasonality, promotions, and market trends. This flexibility empowers retailers to tailor the predictive models according to their unique business environments, enhancing the relevance and accuracy of the insights generated. It provides a user-friendly interface where users can input different scenarios and immediately view the projected impact on sales and inventory levels. This ensures that the predictions reflect real-world conditions and help retailers to optimize their decisions based on customizable inputs.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to set seasonal parameters for sales forecasting at the beginning of each quarter to anticipate demand fluctuations during holidays and seasonal sales periods.

Given that the retail manager accesses the Customizable Forecasting Parameters interface, when they input seasonal variables and save the configuration, then the system must accurately reflect these parameters in future sales forecasts.

As a user, I want to define promotional variables to measure the impact of specific sales events on inventory levels and future sales predictions.

Given that the user has entered promotional data into the forecasting parameters, when they generate a sales forecast, then the predictions should show a noticeable increase in projected sales during the defined promotional period.

As an inventory analyst, I need to assess the accuracy of sales forecasts based on historical data to ensure our predictive model continuously improves.

Given that the analyst reviews historical sales data against the generated forecasts, when they analyze the accuracy metrics, then the system should provide a report showing at least 85% accuracy in forecasts over the past six months.

As a user, I want to experiment with different market trend variables to see how external factors affect sales predictions and inventory requirements.

Given that the user adjusts market trend inputs and triggers a sales forecast, when they review the results, then the system should display changes in projected sales and inventory needs corresponding to the adjusted variables.

As a business owner, I want to view a comparison of forecasts generated with default parameters versus customizable parameters to evaluate optimization benefits.

Given that the owner selects options to compare forecast results, when the system generates both forecasts, then it must display a clear comparison report indicating differences in projected sales and inventory levels between the two sets of parameters.

As a retail manager, I want to receive alerts if my custom forecasting parameters result in predicted stockouts or overstock situations.

Given that the manager has set customizable parameters, when the predictions indicate potential stockouts or overstock, then the system must send notification alerts via email and the dashboard to the manager about the upcoming issues.

As a user, I want to have the ability to reset all customizable parameters to default settings easily if needed.

Given that the user is on the Customizable Forecasting Parameters page, when they click the reset button, then all parameters must revert to their default values without error and confirm the action in the interface.

Integrated Reporting Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to have an integrated reporting dashboard so that I can easily monitor sales forecasts and inventory metrics in one place, facilitating better strategic decisions."

Description

The Integrated Reporting Dashboard requirement involves creating a consolidated view of sales forecasts, historical performance, and inventory metrics within a single dashboard interface. This functionality will enable retailers to visualize trends, track performance, and make data-driven decisions efficiently. The dashboard will feature interactive components, allowing users to drill down into specific data points and generate custom reports based on their insights and needs. Integrating this feature into the RetailRevolution platform will provide a comprehensive overview that enhances strategic planning and operational decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Integrated Reporting Dashboard from the retail management interface to view consolidated sales and inventory data.

Given the user has valid credentials and is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Integrated Reporting Dashboard, then they should be presented with a comprehensive view that includes sales forecasts, historical performance, and current inventory metrics.

User filters the sales data on the dashboard to analyze specific product categories over a selected time period.

Given the user is on the Integrated Reporting Dashboard, when they apply filters for product categories and a specific date range, then the dashboard should refresh to display only the relevant sales data for the selected filters.

User generates a custom report based on selected metrics from the Integrated Reporting Dashboard.

Given the user selects specific data points and metrics to generate a report, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then the system should provide a downloadable report in PDF format containing the selected data.

User drills down into the details of a specific inventory item to check its sales performance.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard and clicks on a specific inventory item, when they enter the item detail view, then they should see detailed historical sales data, current stock levels, and predicted future demand for that item.

User views the predictive analytics section of the Integrated Reporting Dashboard to understand future sales trends.

Given the user is on the Integrated Reporting Dashboard, when they navigate to the predictive analytics section, then they should see a graphical representation of forecasted sales trends based on historical data.

User customizes the layout of the Integrated Reporting Dashboard for their specific preferences.

Given the user is on the Integrated Reporting Dashboard, when they drag and drop various widgets to rearrange their layout, then the original dashboard layout should be updated to reflect these changes and saved for future access.

User Training and Support

"As a new user of the platform, I want access to training materials and customer support so that I can effectively utilize the predictive sales insights and optimize my inventory strategies."

Description

The User Training and Support requirement emphasizes the creation of structured training resources and customer support systems to facilitate effective usage of the Predictive Sales Insights feature. This includes developing online tutorials, comprehensive documentation, and access to customer support representatives for real-time assistance. By providing adequate training and resources, retailers can maximize the benefits of the predictive analytics tools, ensuring smooth implementation and user adoption. A solid support framework will encourage users to engage fully with the capabilities of the system and apply insights generated to improve their operational processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Predictive Sales Insights section for the first time after completing initial training.

Given the user has completed the initial training on Predictive Sales Insights, when they access the platform, then they should see a welcome message and tutorial prompts to guide them through the feature functionalities.

User utilizes the online tutorial to learn about sales forecasting.

Given the user is on the online tutorial page, when they select the 'Sales Forecasting' module, then they should be able to view, navigate, and follow through the tutorial without encountering any errors.

Customer support interacts with a user needing assistance with predictive analytics.

Given a user submits a request for assistance regarding predictive analytics, when the support team responds, then the user should receive a response within 10 minutes and find the provided solution satisfactory upon follow-up.

User reviews the comprehensive documentation for best practices in using Predictive Sales Insights.

Given the user opens the documentation section, when they search for 'best practices', then they should find at least five relevant articles related to effective use cases of Predictive Sales Insights.

User accesses the customer support chat feature for immediate assistance.

Given the user clicks on the 'Live Chat' option, when they initiate a chat, then they should connect with a customer support representative within 2 minutes.

New user conducts their first stock replenishment based on predictive insights.

Given the user has accessed the Predictive Sales Insights report, when they act on the recommendation provided for stock replenishment, then the adjusted inventory levels should reflect accurately in the system within one hour.

Smart Restock Recommendations

Smart Restock Recommendations provide personalized suggestions for which products to reorder based on comprehensive analysis of sales patterns, seasonal trends, and current inventory levels. This feature helps retailers prioritize replenishment activities, ensuring the most critical items are always in stock.

Requirements

Automated Trend Analysis

"As a retail manager, I want automated trend analysis so that I can understand demand fluctuations and make informed restock decisions based on reliable data."

Description

Automated Trend Analysis will analyze historical sales data, seasonal patterns, and other market factors to identify trends related to product demand. This requirement is crucial in generating accurate restock recommendations by evaluating how sales fluctuate over time. By integrating this functionality with the existing inventory management system, RetailRevolution can provide users with actionable insights that will help them forecast demand and optimize stock levels accordingly, ultimately improving sales performance and reducing excess inventory costs.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated analysis of historical sales data to predict future inventory needs during peak holiday seasons.

Given a dataset of at least three months of historical sales data, when the system analyzes the trends, then it should produce a forecast of inventory needs for the next holiday season with a minimum accuracy of 85%.

Integration of automated trend analysis with the RetailRevolution dashboard to provide real-time restock alerts based on identified trends.

Given the completion of the automated analysis, when the user accesses the dashboard, then it should display restock recommendations for top five products based on prediction accuracy and current inventory levels.

Monthly review of trend analysis effectiveness in generating actionable restock recommendations.

Given the trend analysis report generated by the system, when reviewed at the end of each month, then at least 75% of the recommended restocks should align with actual sales data analysis for that month.

System's ability to identify and adapt to new seasonal trends as market conditions change.

Given an update in market factors or sales patterns, when the system re-evaluates the data, then it should reflect new trends in restock recommendations within 24 hours of the new data being available.

Validation of automated trend analysis process against manual forecasting methods to evaluate effectiveness.

Given both the automated trend analysis and a manual forecast for the same product categories, when both methods are compared, then the automated system should demonstrate at least a 20% improvement in forecasting accuracy.

Ability of the automated trend analysis to adjust recommendations for previously overstocked items based on sales recovery data.

Given historical overstock data and recent sales recovery metrics, when the system adjusts restock recommendations, then overstocked items should show at least a 50% reduction in recommended restock levels in the subsequent forecast.

User training on utilizing automated trend analysis features within the RetailRevolution platform.

Given that training sessions are conducted, when users attempt to utilize the automated trend analysis feature, then at least 90% of users should successfully generate and interpret the analysis within the first two attempts.

Customizable Reorder Points

"As a retailer, I want customizable reorder points so that I can tailor my inventory alerts to my specific business needs and sales patterns, ensuring optimal stock levels for my store."

Description

Customizable Reorder Points enable users to set personalized inventory thresholds for each product or category. Retailers can define when to trigger reorder alerts based on their unique operational needs, sales velocity, and seasonal changes. This flexibility enhances the relevance of stock management, ensuring that critical items are never out of stock while preventing unnecessary ordering. This requirement is vital for tailoring the inventory management system to meet the specific demands of diverse retail businesses, increasing overall efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer sets custom reorder points for seasonal products ahead of the busy holiday season, ensuring timely replenishment based on anticipated high demand.

Given a retailer sets a reorder point for a seasonal product, when the product stock level falls to the reorder point, then the system should trigger an alert for replenishment.

A retailer adjusts reorder points for a specific category based on recent sales data to prevent overstock during a product drop in demand.

Given a retailer modifies the reorder point for a product category, when sales data shows a decline over the past month, then the adjusted reorder point should automatically trigger a restock alert only when the stock falls below the new threshold.

During a quarterly review, a retailer analyzes the effectiveness of their customized reorder points and makes adjustments based on sales performance.

Given a retailer reviews sales performance metrics for products with customized reorder points, when they identify categories with frequent stockouts, then they should be able to modify the reorder points to better align with inventory needs.

A brand manager needs to quickly implement reorder points for a new product launch, ensuring the new inventory stays aligned with sales expectations.

Given a new product is added to the inventory system, when the brand manager sets a reorder point for it, then the system should recognize this point and activate restock alerts based on initial sales trends without additional adjustments.

A retailer reviews historical sales trends to define reorder points for high-velocity products, optimizing stock levels and reducing waste.

Given historical sales data is analyzed for a high-velocity product, when the retailer sets a reorder point based on this analysis, then the system should validate that the point is appropriate for the sales velocity, preventing stockouts.

A retailer wishes to ensure that alerts for reorder points are customizable to different products based on their characteristics and sales patterns.

Given different products in the inventory, when a retailer sets distinct reorder points and alert conditions for each product, then the system should successfully save and activate these unique configurations, sending alerts as per their specific thresholds.

During a vendor meeting, a retailer discusses the impact of their reorder point settings on supplier relationships and delivery schedules.

Given a retailer engages in discussions around their reorder point settings, when they present the data showing the frequency of orders and stock levels, then they should demonstrate that customized reorder points have enhanced supplier communication and efficiency.

User-Friendly Dashboard

"As a retail store owner, I want a user-friendly dashboard so that I can easily view restock recommendations and inventory levels at a glance, enabling quick decision-making and efficient inventory management."

Description

User-Friendly Dashboard will provide an intuitive interface presenting restock recommendations, inventory levels, and trend analytics in a visually engaging format. This requirement enhances usability by allowing retailers to quickly and easily assess key metrics and make data-driven decisions without navigating through complicated menus. An effective dashboard is essential for ensuring that users can utilize the Smart Restock Recommendations feature fully and can react swiftly to restock needs based on real-time data and insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Dashboard Metrics in Real-Time

Given that the user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the User-Friendly Dashboard, then they should see real-time inventory levels, restock recommendations, and trend analytics displayed visually within 5 seconds.

Accessing Restock Recommendations

Given that the user accesses the User-Friendly Dashboard, when they select the restock recommendations section, then they should see a ranked list of products along with reasons for restock based on sales patterns and current inventory levels.

Customizing Dashboard View

Given that the user is on the User-Friendly Dashboard, when they choose to customize the view by selecting or deselecting metrics, then the dashboard should update to reflect their choices immediately without requiring a page refresh.

Receiving Alerts for Critical Stock Levels

Given that the inventory level for a product falls below the predefined threshold, when the user is on the User-Friendly Dashboard, then they should receive an alert notification indicating that a specific product needs restocking.

Viewing Trend Analytics Over Time

Given that the user is on the User-Friendly Dashboard, when they select a time frame (e.g., last month, last quarter), then they should see visual analytics displaying sales trends accurately reflecting the selected period.

Mobile Access to Dashboard

Given that the user is using a mobile device, when they access the User-Friendly Dashboard, then the layout should adjust to fit the screen size while maintaining functionality and readability of key metrics.

Exporting Dashboard Data

Given that the user is viewing the User-Friendly Dashboard, when they choose to export the data, then they should receive a downloadable file in CSV format containing all displayed metrics and recommendations.

Integration with Sales Channels

"As a multi-channel retailer, I want integration with sales channels so that my inventory management reflects real-time sales data, enabling me to adjust restock recommendations accordingly."

Description

Integration with Sales Channels will connect RetailRevolution with various e-commerce platforms and point-of-sale systems to gather real-time sales data. This requirement ensures that the Smart Restock Recommendations feature considers the most current sales information across all channels, allowing for timely and relevant restocking advice. By achieving this seamless integration, retailers can maintain a consistent inventory level that aligns with sales trends, enhancing customer satisfaction and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Multiple E-Commerce Platforms

Given that the RetailRevolution system is connected to multiple e-commerce platforms, when sales data is updated on any of these platforms, then the inventory levels in RetailRevolution should reflect those changes in real-time, ensuring accurate stock figures for smart restock recommendations.

Real-Time Sales Data Sync with POS Systems

Given that RetailRevolution is integrated with various point-of-sale systems, when a sale occurs at a retail location, then the corresponding inventory level in RetailRevolution must be updated instantly to enable timely restock recommendations.

User Interface for Viewing Recommended Restock Items

Given that the Smart Restock Recommendations feature is active, when a user accesses the recommendations section, then they should see a list of items to reorder prioritized by urgency based on current sales data and inventory levels.

Automated Alerts for Low Inventory Items

Given that the inventory levels are monitored, when an item reaches a predefined threshold set for low stock, then RetailRevolution should automatically send a notification to the retailer to advise on restocking the item.

Reporting Sales Trends Over Time

Given that the integration with sales channels is complete, when a retailer requests a report on sales trends for a specific period, then the report generated should accurately reflect data from all connected sales channels, showcasing trends that inform restock recommendations.

Testing the Integration Process

Given that the integration with e-commerce platforms and POS systems has been developed, when the integration process is executed, then it should complete without errors, confirming that sales data is being pulled correctly into RetailRevolution for analysis.

Mobile Accessibility

"As a retail manager, I want mobile accessibility to the restock recommendations so that I can manage my inventory effectively from anywhere, ensuring I don't miss critical restock opportunities."

Description

Mobile Accessibility will enable access to the Smart Restock Recommendations feature on mobile devices through a dedicated app or mobile-optimized website. This requirement is essential for retailers who are on-the-go and need to make inventory management decisions in real-time. With mobile accessibility, users can receive immediate notifications about restock needs and view recommendations wherever they are, providing greater flexibility and responsiveness to their inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Smart Restock Recommendations feature via the RetailRevolution mobile app while in their retail store to check for urgent restock alerts during business hours.

Given the user is logged into the mobile app, When they navigate to the Smart Restock Recommendations section, Then they should see a list of recommended products that need restocking based on current inventory and sales data.

A retailer receives a push notification on their mobile device about critical stock levels for a best-selling item while away from the store.

Given the user has enabled notifications for restock alerts, When the stock level for an item reaches the defined critical threshold, Then the user should receive a push notification immediately.

User attempts to reorder items directly from the Smart Restock Recommendations on their mobile device while on a delivery route.

Given the user selects an item from the Smart Restock Recommendations list, When they confirm the reorder through the mobile app, Then the item should be successfully added to their order list and a confirmation message displayed.

User needs to view historical restock recommendations on the mobile app to evaluate past effectiveness.

Given the user is on the Smart Restock Recommendations page, When they select the option to view historical recommendations, Then they should be presented with a list of past recommendations along with their outcomes.

The user wishes to log out of the mobile application after accessing sensitive inventory information remotely.

Given the user is logged into the mobile app, When they select the log-out option, Then they should be logged out securely and directed to the login screen.

User uses the mobile app to filter restock recommendations by product category to streamline their reordering process.

Given the user is viewing the Smart Restock Recommendations, When they apply a filter for a specific product category, Then the displayed recommendations should only show items from that selected category.

User seeks to understand how many times a product has been recommended for restock through the mobile application to assess its demand.

Given the user is on the individual product recommendation detail page, When they view the recommendation history, Then it should display the total count of past recommendations for that product along with associated sales data.

Customizable Alert Channels

Customizable Alert Channels allow users to select their preferred method of receiving replenishment alerts, whether through email, SMS, or within the platform. This flexibility ensures that users can stay informed about inventory needs in a way that best suits their workflow and personal preferences.

Requirements

Multiple Alert Channels

"As a retail manager, I want to receive inventory replenishment alerts via my preferred method (email, SMS, or in-app) so that I can stay informed and respond quickly to stock needs without checking the platform constantly."

Description

The Multiple Alert Channels requirement allows users to choose from various methods of receiving inventory alerts, including email, SMS, and in-app notifications. This feature is essential as it caters to diverse user preferences and work styles, ensuring that users are promptly informed of stock replenishment needs wherever they are. By integrating these customizable options, RetailRevolution enhances user engagement and responsiveness to inventory levels, ultimately supporting better decision-making and operational efficiency. This capability will transform how retailers manage their inventory by allowing them to choose the most convenient communication method based on their unique workflows, reducing the risk of inventory issues and streamlining operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User prefers to receive low-stock alerts via SMS while on the go.

Given that the user has opted for SMS notifications in the settings, when the stock level of an item falls below the defined threshold, then an SMS alert should be sent to the user's registered phone number immediately.

Retail manager wants to receive replenishment alerts through email while managing inventory from a desktop.

Given that the user has selected email notifications as their preferred alert channel, when a replenishment alert is triggered, then an email should be sent to the user's email address with the details of the low stock item.

A user prefers in-app notifications for real-time alerts while using the RetailRevolution platform.

Given that the user has enabled in-app notifications in their profile settings, when there is a change in inventory status that requires attention, then the user should receive an in-app notification immediately.

User wants to change their alert preference from SMS to email midway through their inventory management tasks.

Given that the user is on the notification settings page, when the user switches the alert method from SMS to email and saves the changes, then the system should update the preference and reflect this change in the user profile.

A retailer operating in multiple locations desires customizable alert channels per location.

Given that the retailer has multiple store locations, when the retailer sets different alert channels for each location (e.g., SMS for one location and email for another), then each location should receive alerts through its specified channel without affecting the other locations' settings.

Users are expected to receive alerts during non-business hours to ensure immediate responsiveness.

Given that a user has opted in for notifications regardless of the time, when an inventory alert is triggered during non-business hours, then the user should receive the alert via their chosen method without delay.

A user’s alert settings need to be reviewed for efficient inventory management.

Given that the user visits the alert settings section, when the user views their notification preferences, then all selected channels, statuses, and the capability to modify them should be clearly displayed for easy review and editing.

Alert Customization Options

"As a store owner, I want to customize how often I receive alerts about low inventory so that I only get notified when it’s critical, allowing me to manage my time effectively."

Description

This requirement enables users to customize the frequency and conditions of alerts, tailoring them according to their business needs. Users can set thresholds for inventory levels that trigger alerts, and determine how often they wish to be notified. This feature is crucial as it empowers retailers to avoid both overstock and stockout scenarios by allowing them to proactively manage alerts based on real-time data. By incorporating this level of customization, RetailRevolution enhances the overall user experience, increasing satisfaction and efficiency by ensuring that users only receive relevant alerts when necessary, leading to better inventory control.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a custom alert for low inventory on a specific product, selecting SMS as the alert channel.

Given the user is on the alert customization settings page, when they select a product and set a low stock threshold, and choose 'SMS' as the alert channel, then an SMS alert should be triggered when inventory falls below the specified threshold.

User customizes alert frequency settings for inventory replenishment notifications.

Given the user is on the alert customization settings page, when they set the alert frequency to 'daily' for a specific product, then they should receive a daily notification if the product's inventory is above the low stock threshold.

User modifies previously set custom alert preferences for a product.

Given the user has previously set up an alert for a product, when they navigate to the alert customization settings and change the alert frequency to 'weekly', then the updated frequency should be saved and effective immediately for that product.

User chooses multiple alert channels for inventory alerts.

Given the user is on the alert customization settings page, when they select both 'email' and 'SMS' as preferred alert channels for a product, then alerts should be sent through both channels whenever the inventory falls below the specified threshold.

User tests the functionality of alert customization after configuration.

Given the user has set up alert customization settings, when the inventory for a product meets the low stock criteria, then the alerts should be sent through the configured channels without errors.

User receives an alert notification via email for a product that has reached the low stock threshold.

Given the user has chosen 'email' as their alert channel for low inventory, when the product inventory reaches the defined threshold, then the user should receive an email alert detailing the product and the stock level.

Historical Alert Data Analysis

"As a data analyst at a retail store, I want to review historical inventory alert data so that I can identify patterns and improve our restocking strategies based on past performance."

Description

The Historical Alert Data Analysis requirement involves the functionality to analyze previous alert notifications to identify patterns in inventory movements and alert responses. This feature provides users with valuable insights into their inventory behavior over time, helping them forecast demand more accurately. By integrating data analytics into the alert system, RetailRevolution positions itself as a proactive tool for inventory management. Users can optimize their ordering processes by understanding past inventory trends, facilitating better business decisions and ultimately supporting financial goals.

Acceptance Criteria

User analyzes historical alert data to identify patterns in inventory movements over a three-month period.

Given the user has access to the Historical Alert Data Analysis feature, when they input a specific date range, then the system should display relevant alerts and corresponding stock levels during that period for analysis.

User modifies alert preferences to set specific thresholds for receiving notifications based on historical data trends.

Given the user has access to customizable alert channels, when they set threshold levels for each product based on past alert data, then alerts should be triggered only when stock levels meet the defined thresholds.

User reviews a report generated from historical alert data to make future inventory decisions.

Given the user has completed the historical data analysis, when the user generates a report, then the report should include key insights such as average stock levels, common alert frequencies, and periodical inventory trends.

User receives alerts via their preferred channel when stock levels fall below a predetermined threshold based on historical analysis.

Given the user has set their preferred alert methods, when inventory levels fall below the set threshold, then the user should receive a notification in the chosen format (email, SMS, or platform notification).

User compares current alert data with historical data to evaluate performance improvements over time.

Given the user is using the Historical Alert Data Analysis feature, when they select options to compare current alerts with historical data, then the system should provide a comparison chart highlighting changes in alert frequency and inventory responsiveness.

User queries historical alert data to identify trends related to a specific product category.

Given the user has access to filter historical alert data, when they select a specific product category, then the system should return a summary of alerts and key trends associated with that category over the specified period.

User Role-Based Alert Preferences

"As an operations manager, I want to set different alert preferences for my team members based on their roles so that we can ensure the right people are informed about inventory needs promptly."

Description

This requirement ensures that alert preferences can be set based on user roles within RetailRevolution. Different users may have varying levels of responsibility and require different alert settings. For instance, a store manager might need immediate alerts for critical inventory issues, while a warehouse staff member may only need daily summaries. This role-based approach not only enhances user experience by personalizing alert settings but also optimizes the response time for inventory management across different teams. With this feature, RetailRevolution effectively supports collaboration and accountability among users, leading to improved operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Store manager sets up immediate alerts for critical inventory issues while warehouse staff configure daily summary alerts.

Given the user is a store manager, when they access the alert preference settings, then they should be able to select immediate alerts for critical inventory issues, and when the user is warehouse staff, they should be able to select daily summary alerts.

A user updates their alert preferences based on their role, and the changes reflect accurately in their profile.

Given the user has initially set alerts to receive SMS notifications, when they update their alert preference to email alerts, then the system should reflect this change in the user profile and send a confirmation email.

The system delivers alerts through the selected channels (email or SMS) based on the user's preference and role.

Given a store manager has selected email for critical alerts, when a critical inventory situation occurs, then an email alert should be sent to the manager immediately.

The user receives prompt notifications before reaching stockout levels for their preferred inventory item choices based on role.

Given a warehouse staff member has set their alerts for low stock notifications, when the inventory level of a selected item reaches the threshold, then they should receive a notification within 5 minutes.

The system logs alert preferences correctly for audit and reporting purposes across different user roles.

Given any user updates their alert channel preferences, when the changes are confirmed, then the system should log the changes, including user role and timestamp, for reporting.

Users can easily switch between alert channels without any technical issues or data loss.

Given a user attempts to change their alert channel from SMS to email, when they confirm the change, then they should be able to switch without receiving duplicate alerts or loss of previous settings.

Admin can view and manage all user alert settings in the system for efficiency and control purposes.

Given an admin accesses the user management dashboard, when they select a user, then they should be able to view and modify that user's alert preferences based on their role requirements.

Integration with Third-Party Applications

"As a business owner, I want RetailRevolution to integrate with my existing eCommerce platform so that I can receive inventory alerts directly there and take action without switching between tools."

Description

The Integration with Third-Party Applications requirement allows RetailRevolution to connect with external business tools and software, such as eCommerce platforms, accounting systems, and logistics providers. This integration ensures inventory alerts can be sent through users' preferred tools, increasing efficiency and streamlining workflows. It also enables automated responses to alerts, such as creating purchase orders with vendors, further reducing manual efforts and the potential for errors. This capability strengthens the product's adaptability and overall value proposition, facilitating a more cohesive ecosystem for retailers managing their inventory.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated replenishment alert through their selected email channel when stock levels reach the predetermined threshold.

Given that the user has configured their alert preferences to receive email notifications, when inventory levels drop below the set threshold, then an automated email alert should be sent to the user's registered email address within 5 minutes.

A user opts to receive replenishment alerts via SMS and successfully receives a notification when stock levels are low.

Given the user has selected SMS as their preferred alert channel, when stock levels fall below the threshold, then an SMS alert should be sent to the user's phone number immediately, including the product details and restock suggestions.

Integration with a third-party eCommerce platform triggers automated purchasing actions upon receiving a low-stock alert.

Given that the integration with the eCommerce platform is active, when an inventory level falls below a defined threshold, then a purchase order should be automatically generated and sent to the supplier with the required quantity to replenish stock.

A user modifies their alert preferences in the platform and receives confirmation of the changes via email.

Given the user has made changes to their alert preferences, when changes are saved, then the user should receive a confirmation email detailing the new alert preferences within 5 minutes.

Users can view a history of sent alert notifications within the RetailRevolution platform.

Given that alerts have been sent to the user, when the user navigates to the alerts history section, then they should see a list of all past alerts sent, along with timestamps and alert channels used for each notification.

Integration with a logistics provider enables tracking of delivery status directly from the inventory management platform.

Given that the logistics provider integration is set up, when a replenishment order is created, then the inventory management platform should display real-time tracking information for that order, accessible from the order details page.

Users are able to test their alert settings and receive a feedback notification from the system.

Given that the user has set up alert preferences, when the user clicks the 'Test Alert' button, then the system should send a test alert through the selected channel (email/SMS) and display a success message confirming that the test was successfully sent.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

The Performance Analytics Dashboard tracks the effectiveness of replenishment alerts over time, providing insights into how well the dynamic alerts are functioning. Retailers can view metrics such as stockout occurrences and lead times for replenishment, supporting continuous improvement in inventory management strategies.

Requirements

Dynamic Alert Tracking

"As a retail manager, I want to track the effectiveness of replenishment alerts so that I can understand their impact on stock levels and improve my inventory management strategies."

Description

This requirement ensures the Performance Analytics Dashboard provides real-time tracking of replenishment alerts. It must capture and display data related to the frequency, responsiveness, and accuracy of alerts sent to users over time. By integrating with existing inventory systems, it allows retailers to monitor how these alerts impact stock levels and turnover rates. The functionality is vital for identifying patterns and making data-driven decisions to optimize replenishment processes, ultimately improving inventory efficiency and reducing stockouts and overstock situations.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic alert tracking for stock replenishment during peak sales periods.

Given that the retailer is in a peak sales period, When stock levels drop below the predefined threshold, Then a replenishment alert must be generated within 5 minutes and sent to the designated users via the dashboard and email.

Evaluation of alert accuracy after adjustments to inventory thresholds.

Given that the inventory thresholds have been adjusted to reflect new sales data, When alerts are triggered for stock replenishment, Then at least 90% of the alerts generated should correspond accurately with actual stockouts within a 24-hour review period.

Monitoring lead times for replenishment after alerts are generated.

Given that a replenishment alert has been sent out, When the retailer examines the lead time data on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, Then the average lead time for replenishment should not exceed the pre-set target of 48 hours over a 30-day period.

Analyzing stockout occurrences over a specified timeframe.

Given that the Performance Analytics Dashboard is displaying stockout data, When the retailer selects a timeframe for analysis, Then the dashboard should accurately reflect stockout occurrences and their correlation with alert responsiveness, ideally maintaining less than 5 stockouts per month.

Trend forecasting based on historical alert performance.

Given that the retailer wants to project future inventory needs, When they access the trend forecasting feature on the dashboard, Then it should leverage historical alert performance data to provide accurate forecasts with at least 85% accuracy in predicting stock requirements for the next quarter.

User feedback collection on alert functionality and effectiveness.

Given that replenishment alerts have been operational for a month, When users complete a feedback survey about the alert system, Then at least 80% of respondents should report satisfaction regarding the clarity and timeliness of alerts provided by the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Integration verification with existing inventory management systems.

Given that the Performance Analytics Dashboard is linked with existing inventory systems, When the retailer initiates an alert, Then the alert should accurately pull and reflect current stock levels from the integrated inventory management system within 2 minutes.

Stockout Occurrence Metrics

"As a store owner, I want to see how often stockouts occur for my products so that I can reduce their frequency and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

This requirement focuses on displaying metrics concerning stockout occurrences within the Performance Analytics Dashboard. The dashboard must offer detailed insights, such as the frequency and duration of stockouts, categorized by product or category for easy analysis. This feature is essential for retailers to identify trends and address root causes of stockouts, leading to better stocking strategies and increased sales through timely replenishments. A user-friendly interface should facilitate the exploration of this data, allowing retailers to visualize stockout trends over time and plan accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Stockout Frequency Analysis for Retailers

Given a retail business using the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when the user navigates to the Stockout Occurrence Metrics section, then the dashboard should display a comprehensive summary of stockout occurrences categorized by product and product category over the past month.

Stockout Duration Insights

Given a retailer accessing the dashboard, when the user selects a specific product category, then the dashboard must provide the average duration of stockouts for that category, alongside visual representations such as graphs or charts.

Trend Visualization Over Time

Given a retailer viewing stockout metrics, when the user requests historical data for stockouts over the past year, then the dashboard should present a visual trend line indicating increases or decreases in stockout occurrences.

Data Export Capability

Given a retail manager analyzing stockout data, when the user opts to export stockout metrics in CSV format, then the export should include all relevant data points such as frequency, duration, and products involved.

User Experience and Interface Feedback

Given a group of beta testers reviewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they provide feedback on the usability of the Stockout Occurrence Metrics section, then at least 80% of users should indicate that the interface is intuitive and easy to navigate.

Alerts for Significant Stockouts

Given the dashboard monitoring stockout occurrences, when a product experiences a stockout longer than a predetermined threshold, then the system should trigger an alert to notify the retailer via email or in-dashboard notification.

Comparative Analysis by Location

Given a retailer with multiple store locations, when the user selects the Stockout Occurrence Metrics, then the dashboard should allow comparisons of stockout occurrences between different locations, facilitating strategic decision-making.

Lead Time Analysis

"As a procurement officer, I want to analyze lead times for replenishment so that I can make better decisions about which suppliers to work with to ensure timely restocking."

Description

This requirement aims to equip the Performance Analytics Dashboard with the capability to analyze lead times for replenishment. By capturing and displaying lead time data across different suppliers and products, the dashboard will help retailers understand how quickly they can expect inventory to be replenished. This functionality supports informed purchasing decisions by comparing lead times and choosing the most efficient suppliers, ultimately contributing to reduced stockouts and improved inventory turnover rates. The analysis must be presented in a clear format, allowing easy comparisons and historical tracking.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews lead time data for a specific product from multiple suppliers on the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given a user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select a product, then they can view the lead time information from all available suppliers for that product clearly in a comparative format.

User wants to analyze historical lead time trends for a specific supplier and product combination.

Given a user accesses the lead time analysis feature, when they input a specific supplier and product combination, then the dashboard displays historical lead time data over the past six months in an easily interpretable chart format.

User desires to identify the supplier with the fastest average lead time for replenishment.

Given the Performance Analytics Dashboard is displaying lead time data for multiple suppliers and products, when the user views the summary statistics, then the fastest average lead time across all suppliers for the selected product should be prominently highlighted.

User seeks to receive alerts on lead time changes that could affect stock purchase decisions.

Given that lead times for a selected product change, when the changes occur, then the system sends an automated alert to the user notifying them of the updated lead time and the impact on replenishment strategy.

User wants to filter lead time data by specific time periods to analyze the impact of supplier performance over time.

Given the user is on the lead time analysis page, when they apply a date range filter, then the displayed lead time data updates to reflect only the records within the specified date range, allowing for effective trend analysis.

User requires a comprehensive overview of lead times to assess overall supplier performance regularly.

Given a user initiates a performance report for supplier lead times, when the report is generated, then it includes average lead times, stockout occurrences, and recommendations for improvement in a clear and actionable format.

Alerts Performance Summary

"As an inventory manager, I want a summary of alerts performance so that I can evaluate their effectiveness and adjust my inventory strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement entails developing a section in the Performance Analytics Dashboard that summarizes the performance of replenishment alerts over a specified timeframe. It should aggregate key metrics, including alert responsiveness, success rates, and the correlation between alerts and actual stock levels. This summary will allow retailers to quickly assess whether alerts are effectively supporting their replenishment strategies and make necessary adjustments. The inclusion of visual representation for performance over time is essential to identify trends and insights quickly.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays the Alerts Performance Summary with data from the last 30 days.

Given that the user accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the Alerts Performance Summary section, then they should see metrics including alert responsiveness, success rates, and correlations between alerts and actual stock levels for the past 30 days.

Visual representation of alert performance over time is included in the summary.

Given that the user views the Alerts Performance Summary, when the metrics are displayed, then there should be a visual representation (e.g., line chart or bar graph) showing alert performance trends over the specified timeframe.

Alerts Performance Summary includes key responsive metrics.

Given that the user reviews the Alerts Performance Summary, when they look at the displayed metrics, then they should see clearly defined metrics for alert responsiveness and success rates, with values above established thresholds (e.g., 85% success rate).

Users can filter the performance metrics by date range.

Given that the user is on the Alerts Performance Summary, when they select a different date range from a filter option, then the dashboard should update to reflect metrics and visual representations for the selected range.

Alerts Performance Summary allows users to export data.

Given that the user views the Alerts Performance Summary, when they click on the export button, then they should be able to download the summary data in a CSV format without any errors.

Performance metrics are accurate and reflect actual inventory data.

Given that the performance metrics are displayed in the Alerts Performance Summary, when reviewed against actual inventory records and replenishment activities, then the metrics should accurately represent the effectiveness of alerts with no discrepancies greater than 5%.

User can customize which metrics are displayed in the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given that the user accesses the dashboard settings, when they choose to customize the displayed metrics, then they should be able to select or deselect metrics related to alert performance and see these changes reflected in real-time on the dashboard.

Custom Reporting Features

"As a data analyst, I want to customize my reports on inventory performance metrics so that I can present data that is most relevant to my team and stakeholders."

Description

This requirement involves creating customizable reporting features within the Performance Analytics Dashboard. Retailers should be able to generate reports based on specific metrics related to replenishment alerts, stockout occurrences, and lead times at user-defined intervals. This feature will empower users to tailor insights to their unique needs and operational context, enabling them to focus on the most relevant data. The reports should be exportable in various formats (e.g., CSV, PDF) for further analysis or sharing with stakeholders.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a custom report for stockout occurrences during a specific month.

Given a user selects 'Custom Reports' from the dashboard, when they set the date range to the desired month and choose 'Stockout Occurrences' as the metric, then a report is generated showing the total number of stockouts for that month, and the report can be exported in CSV format.

User creates a report comparing lead times for replenishment alerts across different locations.

Given a user accesses the 'Custom Reports' feature, when they select multiple locations and set 'Lead Times' as the metric, then the dashboard displays a comparative report of lead times, and the report is exportable in PDF format.

A user customizes the reporting interval to weekly and generates a report on replenishment alert effectiveness.

Given a user navigates to 'Custom Reports' and selects a weekly interval along with 'Replenishment Alert Effectiveness' metric, when they click 'Generate', then the system produces a report summarizing alert effectiveness for the selected weeks, and the report can be exported in both CSV and PDF formats.

User analyzes historical data for stockout occurrences over a quarter.

Given a user selects the 'Historical Data' option, when they set the period to the last quarter and choose 'Stockout Occurrences' as the metric, then the system generates a detailed report reflecting stockout statistics, and it meets the export functionality in both CSV and PDF formats.

A user tries to export a report containing data on replenishment alerts in a specific format.

Given a user generates a report on replenishment alerts, when they choose the 'Export' option and select 'CSV', then the system successfully exports the report in CSV format without data loss or corruption.

User requests a performance report on the frequency of stockouts over multiple defined intervals.

Given a user is in the 'Custom Reports' section and selects different predefined intervals for reporting, when they generate the report for 'Stockout Frequencies', then the dashboard displays a clear graphical representation of stockout frequencies and allows for export to PDF.

User assesses the customization functionality of reports on stockout metrics.

Given a user is using the 'Custom Reports' feature, when they add filters for specific product categories while generating a report on 'Stockout Metrics', then the generated report displays only the selected product categories' stockout data and remains exportable in selected formats.

Drag-and-Drop Report Builder

Empowering users to construct their own reports effortlessly, the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder provides an intuitive interface for selecting metrics, KPIs, and visual elements. This feature allows users to quickly create tailored reports that reflect their unique needs and decision-making requirements, saving time and increasing efficiency.

Requirements

User-Friendly Interface

"As a retail manager, I want a simple way to create customized reports so that I can quickly analyze the data relevant to my business without needing technical expertise."

Description

The Drag-and-Drop Report Builder should feature an intuitive, user-friendly interface that enables users to easily navigate through the available metrics, KPIs, and visual elements. This interface must allow users to organize and manipulate report components without extensive training or technical knowledge, enhancing usability and encouraging wider adoption among retail staff. It is crucial that the interface reduces the learning curve and empowers users to construct meaningful reports quickly, facilitating informed decision-making. The integration with existing dashboards and data sources should be seamless to ensure a cohesive user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User Navigation in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder

Given a user accesses the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they explore the interface, then they should be able to locate all available metrics, KPIs, and visual elements within three clicks.

Custom Report Creation by Retail Staff

Given a retail staff member wants to create a custom report, when they drag and drop at least three metrics and one visual element into the report area, then the report should reflect the selected metrics without error.

Seamless Integration with Existing Dashboards

Given that the user has integrated the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder with their existing dashboards, when they create a report and save it, then the report should automatically populate the selected data from the integrated sources within three seconds.

User Feedback on Interface Usability

Given that several retail staff members have used the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when surveyed about their experience, then at least 85% should indicate that the interface is 'easy to use' with a rating of 4 or higher on a scale of 1 to 5.

Minimizing Learning Curve for New Users

Given that a new user is using the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder for the first time, when they attempt to create a report, then they should be able to complete their first report within 10 minutes without assistance.

Error Handling in Report Creation

Given a user is creating a report, when they attempt to drop incompatible elements together (e.g., incompatible metrics and visuals), then an informative error message should appear detailing the issue within two seconds.

Customizable Metrics Selection

"As a business analyst, I want to choose specific metrics for my reports so that I can focus on the data that matters most for my analysis."

Description

This requirement entails enabling users to select and customize various metrics and KPIs within the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder. Users should be able to easily filter and choose from a predefined list of key performance indicators relevant to their inventory management and retail performance. The feature must allow for the creation of multi-dimensional reports that can display data trends, comparisons, and insights tailored to the retailer's operational needs. This flexibility in metric selection not only enhances the report's relevance but also supports targeted decision-making by individual users in varied retail contexts.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to create a report displaying sales metrics for specific categories using the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder.

Given a user with access to the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they select the report type and choose specific categories from the metrics list, then the report should successfully populate with corresponding sales data for the selected categories.

User wants to filter chosen KPIs based on time periods to analyze performance trends.

Given a user who has selected specific KPIs, when they apply a time period filter to the report builder, then the report should display the data only for the specified time range reflecting accurate metrics.

User attempts to customize a report by adding multiple metrics and KPIs from various categories.

Given a user in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they add multiple metrics from at least three different categories, then the report should be generated without errors, displaying all selected metrics accurately.

User wants to save and retrieve a previously customized report for future use.

Given a user who has created a customized report, when they choose to save the report, then it should be saved under their account and retrievable from the saved reports section without data loss.

User needs to export a customized report in different formats after building it.

Given a user who has completed a report in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they select the export option, then the report should successfully export in at least three formats (CSV, PDF, Excel) without any formatting issues.

User wants to compare KPIs side-by-side to assess performance differences.

Given a user in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they select two different KPIs to compare, then the comparison report should display side-by-side visualizations of both KPIs along with clear labels and legends.

User wants to customize the appearance of their report using different visual elements.

Given a user in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they change the visualization type (e.g., bar chart, line graph, pie chart) for a specific metric, then the report should update instantly to reflect the selected visualization type.

Visual Reporting Options

"As a retail analyst, I want to visualize my data through different chart options so that I can present a clearer picture of my inventory trends to my team."

Description

The Drag-and-Drop Report Builder must offer a range of visual reporting options, allowing users to present data in graphs, charts, and tables that best reflect their findings. This requirement involves integrating various visual representation tools that can dynamically illustrate relationships between selected metrics and KPIs, such as bar charts for sales comparisons or pie charts for inventory distribution. Effective data visualization is paramount for quickly conveying insights to stakeholders, thus aiding in strategic decision-making. Users should also be able to adjust these visuals interactively within the report builder for on-the-fly modifications.

Acceptance Criteria

User needs to create a sales comparison report to present weekly revenue trends to stakeholders.

Given the user has selected the sales metrics, when they drag the bar chart option into the report area, then the system should dynamically generate a bar chart comparing sales across different weeks.

A user wants to visualize the distribution of their inventory across different product categories.

Given the user has chosen inventory metrics, when they select the pie chart visualization and finalize their selection, then the report should display a pie chart representing the percentage of inventory per product category.

A user is preparing a quarterly performance review for a management meeting.

Given the user has selected multiple KPIs, when they add a line graph to the report, then the report should display a line graph showing the trend of these KPIs over the selected time period.

The user needs to adjust the visual representation of data in an on-the-go report to fit the meeting format.

Given the user has created a report, when they click on an existing chart and change its visualization type, then the system should update the chart to reflect the new visualization type without losing the underlying data.

The user wants to save a specially tailored report for future use.

Given the user has finished creating and customizing a report, when they choose to save the report, then the system should save the report with all selected metrics and visualizations under the user's account.

A retailer wants to quickly share their report with a team member through email.

Given the user has finalized a report, when they select the option to share via email, then the system should send the report as a PDF attachment to the specified email address.

A user is analyzing historical inventory data to optimize stock levels for the next month.

Given the user has selected historical inventory data, when they choose to visualize it in table format, then the report should display a table that accurately reflects the inventory levels for each month with sortable columns.

Save and Share Reports

"As a retail supervisor, I want to save and share my reports with my team so that we can collaborate effectively and make data-driven decisions together."

Description

Users must be able to save, export, and share customized reports created in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder. This functionality will allow users to preserve their report formats for future access and share insights with colleagues or stakeholders seamlessly via email or directly through the platform. This requirement also includes options to export reports in multiple formats, such as PDF or Excel, to enhance accessibility and usability across various platforms. Maintaining the integrity of the report’s design and data during sharing or exporting is critical to ensure consistent communication of insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User saves a customized report using the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder.

Given a user has created a report in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they click the 'Save' button, then the report should be saved successfully with the chosen title and date.

User exports a report in PDF format.

Given a user has created and saved a report, when they select the 'Export' option and choose PDF, then the report should be downloaded as a PDF file without any loss of formatting or data integrity.

User shares a report via email.

Given a user has saved a report, when they select the 'Share' option and input the recipient's email address, then the report should be sent successfully to the specified email with the correct link to access it.

User exports a report in Excel format.

Given a user has created and saved a report, when they select the 'Export' option and choose Excel, then the report should be downloaded as an Excel file while maintaining all design elements and data integrity.

User accesses a saved report from their dashboard.

Given a user has saved reports, when they navigate to the 'My Reports' section of their dashboard, then all saved reports should be listed with the correct titles and last modified dates.

User receives a confirmation notification after sharing a report.

Given a user shares a report via email, when the sharing process is complete, then the user should receive a confirmation notification indicating the report has been shared successfully.

User retrieves a report's previous version.

Given a user has edited a report in the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder, when they select the 'Version History' option, then they should be able to view and restore previous versions of the report.

Real-Time Data Integration

"As an operations manager, I want my reports to reflect real-time data so that I can make immediate adjustments to inventory levels and sales strategies based on current conditions."

Description

The report builder must integrate real-time data from existing inventory management systems and other relevant sources to ensure accuracy and relevance. This requirement involves establishing connections with various APIs and databases that update automatically, so users benefit from the most current information in their reports. Real-time data integration will prevent discrepancies that arise from outdated or static datasets, allowing users to make timely and informed decisions based on the latest trends and performance metrics. Ensuring the integrity and security of data during this process is paramount.

Acceptance Criteria

User integrates real-time data from the company’s existing inventory management system into the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder to create a sales report for the last month.

Given that the user has selected the real-time data source, when they add the sales metrics to the report, then the data displayed reflects the latest sales information available without any delays.

A user attempts to generate a report using the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder with real-time data integration from multiple APIs and observes the loading time.

Given that the user has added several metrics from different APIs, when they request to generate the report, then the report should load within 5 seconds to ensure efficiency.

The user utilizes the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder to generate a report containing both historical data and real-time data metrics, comparing them side by side.

Given that the user selects both historical and real-time data for the same metrics, when they generate the report, then the report should accurately display both datasets with clear differentiation between them, ensuring no discrepancies are found.

As a user, I want to visualize my real-time inventory data on a dashboard within the report builder to facilitate immediate decision-making.

Given that the user has integrated real-time inventory data, when they create a dashboard in the report builder, then it must include visualizations like graphs and charts that auto-update to reflect current data as changes occur in the inventory system.

A user receives alerts about discrepancies between real-time data and historical data when generating reports.

Given that the user runs a report and real-time data shows a significant difference compared to historical metrics, when the report is generated, then the user must be presented with an alert indicating the discrepancies to ensure data integrity is maintained and decisions are made with accurate data.

User Permissions and Access Control

"As an IT administrator, I want to manage user access to reports so that I can ensure the security of our sensitive business information."

Description

The Drag-and-Drop Report Builder should include a user permissions and access control system that governs who can create, view, and share reports within the application. This feature is critical for maintaining data security and confidentiality, particularly in environments where sensitive business information is processed. Different user roles should be defined, allowing for varying levels of access and control. This implementation ensures that only authorized personnel can generate critical reports, thus limiting the risk of data leaks or unauthorized use.

Acceptance Criteria

As a report builder user, I want to be able to create a new report only if I have the 'Create Reports' permission assigned to my user role, so that I can ensure data integrity by preventing unauthorized report creation.

Given that I am logged in with a user role that has 'Create Reports' permission, when I access the Drag-and-Drop Report Builder and click on 'Create Report', then I should be able to successfully create a new report. Conversely, if I do not have this permission, then I should see an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

As a user with 'View Reports' permission, I want to be able to view a report created by another user to ensure collaboration and transparency within my team while respecting the access control settings.

Given that a report is created by a different user and shared with my user role, when I navigate to the report section of the application, then I should be able to view the report details. If the report is not shared with my role, then I should receive a notification stating that I do not have access to view this report.

As an administrator, I want to configure user roles to set varying levels of access to the report builder, so I can manage who can generate and view sensitive reports, ensuring data security.

Given that I am logged in as an administrator, when I access the user roles management interface and assign 'Create Reports' and 'View Reports' permissions to specific roles, then the changes should be saved successfully and reflected in the permissions list. All users under that role should only have access according to the permissions defined.

As a user with 'Share Reports' permissions, I want to be able to share a report via email to relevant stakeholders, ensuring that they have the information they need for decision-making.

Given that I have created a report and have 'Share Reports' permission, when I input a valid email address and click on the 'Share Report' button, then the report should be sent to the specified email with appropriate content. If the email address is invalid, I should receive a relevant error message.

As a user, I want to confirm that when I attempt to perform operations without the necessary permissions, I receive a clear notification explaining why the action is not allowed, to improve usability and user awareness.

Given that I attempt to access a functionality that my user role does not have permission for, when I click on that functionality, then I should receive a notification clearly stating the reason for the inaccessibility, ensuring I understand the importance of user access control.

Role-Based Data Filtering

This feature allows users to filter dashboard data according to their specific roles and responsibilities. By displaying only the most relevant metrics for their needs—whether for executives, inventory managers, or sales analysts—users can make more strategic decisions that drive business success and streamline operations.

Requirements

Role-Based Dashboard Customization

"As an inventory manager, I want to filter dashboard data to display only inventory metrics so that I can quickly assess stock levels and make informed restocking decisions without being distracted by irrelevant information."

Description

This requirement ensures that users can customize their dashboard view based on their roles and responsibilities. Each user, whether an executive, inventory manager, or sales analyst, will be able to select which metrics to display, enabling them to focus on the key performance indicators that matter most to their position. This customization will enhance user experience, improve decision-making efficiency, and provide a tailored interface that aligns with individual user needs, ultimately driving better business outcomes. Such flexibility will also assist in reducing clutter on the dashboard, allowing for quicker data interpretation and response times.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects their role from a dropdown menu to customize their dashboard.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, When the user selects their role from the role dropdown menu, Then the dashboard updates to show the relevant metrics based on their assigned role.

User can select specific metrics to display on their dashboard.

Given the user is viewing their dashboard, When the user accesses the customization options, Then they can choose specific metrics from a predefined list to display on their dashboard.

User can save their customized dashboard settings for future sessions.

Given the user has customized their dashboard settings, When the user clicks the 'Save' button, Then the customizations are saved and persist for future logins.

User receives an error message when attempting to save an invalid metric selection.

Given the user is in the customization settings, When the user tries to save a dashboard with metrics that are not applicable to their role, Then an error message is displayed indicating the selection is invalid.

User can reset their dashboard to default settings.

Given the user has customized their dashboard, When the user clicks the 'Reset to Default' button, Then the dashboard reverts to the original default settings as designed.

User experiences improved efficiency in data interpretation after customizing their dashboard.

Given the user has customized their dashboard based on their role, When they analyze the displayed metrics, Then they can interpret the data more quickly and make informed decisions in less time compared to using the default view.

User accesses role-specific support documentation through the dashboard.

Given the user is logged into their customized dashboard, When the user clicks on the 'Help' icon, Then they are directed to support documentation relevant to their role and customized metrics.

Automated Role Recognition

"As a new user, I want the system to automatically assign my role and customize my dashboard so that I can start using the platform effectively without any delay or manual input."

Description

The automated role recognition requirement enables the system to automatically identify and assign user roles upon user login based on predefined criteria or input during account setup. This capability will increase efficiency by minimizing manual role assignments and ensuring that users immediately access the correct dashboard configurations and data filtering options that are relevant to their roles. Implementing this requirement will streamline onboarding processes and enhance user engagement by providing a tailored experience from the moment they log in, positioning them for optimal productivity.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into RetailRevolution for the first time after account setup.

Given a new user account has been created with a specified role, when the user logs in, then the system should automatically recognize the role and display the corresponding dashboard configuration and data filtering options tailored to that role.

An existing user with a previously assigned role logs into the system.

Given an existing user account with a defined role, when the user logs in, then the system should automatically recognize the user's role and ensure that the user accesses the correct dashboard layout and relevant data in real-time without manual intervention.

An administrator updates a user's role in the system.

Given an administrator has changed the role of a user in the account settings, when the user logs in, then the system should recognize the updated role and replace the previous dashboard configuration with the new configuration appropriate for the assigned role.

A user attempts to log in without a defined role due to an incomplete setup process.

Given a user account that has not been fully set up with a defined role, when the user attempts to log in, then the system should prompt the user to complete the setup process before accessing the dashboard.

Multiple users with distinct roles log into the system simultaneously.

Given multiple users from different roles log in at the same time, when each user is authenticated, then the system should accurately assign each user their designated role and display the correct dashboard tailored to their responsibilities without conflicts or delays.

A user logs into the system after being inactive for an extended period.

Given a user has not accessed their account for over 30 days, when the user logs in, then the system should automatically recognize their role and display the correct dashboard and data filters, ensuring that all role-based functionalities remain intact and up to date.

Dynamic Data Alerts

"As a sales analyst, I want to receive alerts when sales metrics exceed a certain threshold so that I can proactively address opportunities and adjust strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement involves creating a feature that sends dynamic alerts to users when specific data thresholds relevant to their roles are met or exceeded. For example, inventory managers could receive alerts when stock falls below a certain level or when sales exceed projections. These real-time notifications will empower users to make timely decisions and adjustments based on actionable insights, ultimately enhancing operational responsiveness and strategic planning. The implementation will involve integrating notification systems within the existing dashboard infrastructure and allowing users to set their alert preferences for various metrics.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Manager receives a notification when stock levels drop below the predefined threshold to ensure timely reordering.

Given an inventory threshold set by the inventory manager, when stock levels fall below this threshold, then the system should trigger a notification to the inventory manager's dashboard and email.

Sales Analyst wants to receive alerts when sales exceed projected targets to capitalize on marketing strategies.

Given a sales projection target set by the sales analyst, when actual sales exceed this target, then the system should send a real-time alert to the sales analyst via the mobile application and desktop dashboard.

Executive receives analytics notifications to track overall business performance indicators that meet defined standards.

Given a set of performance indicators defined by an executive, when these indicators meet or exceed the benchmarks, then the system should send a summary report to the executive's email and display it on their dashboard.

Inventory Manager customizes alert preferences for various inventory metrics within the application.

Given the option to set alert preferences, when the inventory manager selects preferred metrics and saves these preferences, then the system should retain these settings and apply them for future alerts.

User receives alerts when automated restocking alerts are triggered for high-demand items.

Given that high-demand items are identified, when their stock falls below the safety threshold, then the system should alert the user and recommend restock quantities via their preferred notification method.

Multiple users collaborate and share alert settings to streamline communication regarding critical inventory updates.

Given that users have collaborative access to alert settings, when one user updates the alert preferences, then all users with access should see the updated settings reflected in their notifications.

User navigates to the alert settings section to manage and customize alerts based on changing business needs.

Given the user accesses the alert settings section, when modifications are made to alert thresholds or notification methods, then these changes should be saved successfully and reflected in future alerts.

Audit Trail for Data Changes

"As an operations manager, I want to view the audit trail of changes made to dashboard filters and reports so that I can ensure accuracy and accountability in our data management practices."

Description

This requirement encompasses the development of an audit trail feature that tracks changes made to filtering settings and data reports by users. By maintaining a log of who modified what data, when, and for what reasons, this feature will enhance accountability and provide insights into user interactions with the system. This capability will be vital for compliance purposes, troubleshooting, and understanding user behavior patterns. Implementing an audit trail will ensure transparency within the platform and build trust among users regarding the integrity of their data and decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the audit trail section from the dashboard to review the changes made to filtering settings and data reports, ensuring they understand how data was altered and by whom.

Given the user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the audit trail section, then they can view a list of changes made to filtering settings and data reports, including date, time, user information, and a description of the changes.

An inventory manager modifies the filtering settings on their dashboard to display metrics relevant to their role, and the system logs this change in the audit trail.

Given the inventory manager has updated the filtering settings, when they save their changes, then the audit trail should log the user ID, the changes made, the timestamp, and the reason for the modification provided by the user.

A compliance officer reviews the audit trail for any unauthorized changes to filtering settings in the last month.

Given the compliance officer is accessing the audit trail feature, when they filter by date for the last month, then they can see all modifications made, including unauthorized changes highlighted for further investigation.

A user attempts to access the audit trail without the required permissions and receives appropriate feedback.

Given the user does not have permission to view the audit trail, when they attempt to access it, then they receive an error message stating 'Permission Denied' and are redirected back to their dashboard.

The system processes a high volume of audit trail entries, and users ensure it remains efficient and accessible.

Given the system is under a high load of audit trail entries, when a user navigates to the audit trail section, then the load time does not exceed 2 seconds for data retrieval.

Multi-Role Support

"As a user with multiple responsibilities, I want to switch between roles in the dashboard so that I can efficiently manage all my tasks without needing multiple logins."

Description

The multi-role support requirement allows users to operate under different roles within the same account or dashboard. This capability means that an individual user can switch between roles—like a sales analyst and an inventory manager—based on their current task without needing to create multiple accounts. It encourages flexibility and efficiency in the workplace by enabling users to manage various responsibilities seamlessly within a single application interface. The implementation will involve creating role-switching features that maintain a user-friendly experience while retaining the appropriate data access levels for each role.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Switching in the Dashboard

Given a user with multiple roles, when they select a different role from the dropdown menu in the dashboard, then the interface should refresh to display data relevant to the selected role without requiring a logout or page refresh.

Data Visibility Based on Role

Given a user assigned to the 'Inventory Manager' role, when they access the dashboard, then they should only see inventory-related metrics and reports that are pertinent to their responsibilities.

Role Access Permissions Validation

Given a user with 'Sales Analyst' role, when they attempt to access a report designated for 'Executives', then they should receive an access denied message indicating insufficient permissions.

Seamless Role Switching Experience

Given a user who has switched roles successfully, when they switch back to their previous role, then the dashboard should retain their previously viewed metrics without any loss of data or settings.

User Role Notification

Given a user who has switched roles, when they switch from 'Inventory Manager' to 'Sales Analyst', then a notification should appear confirming the role change and summary of access changes.

Audit Trail for Role Changes

Given a user who has switched roles, when the switch occurs, then the system should log this action in the audit trail with a timestamp and the roles involved in the change.

Performance Testing for Role Switching

Given a user on the dashboard, when they switch roles multiple times in quick succession, then the system should maintain performance standards with no noticeable lag during each transition.

Role-Specific Training Resources

"As an executive, I want access to training resources specific to my role so that I can quickly learn how to analyze data that impacts strategic decision-making."

Description

This requirement aims to develop tailored training resources for each user role, ensuring users can quickly familiarize themselves with features and functionalities that pertain to their specific tasks. These resources may include tutorials, how-to guides, and video content accessible from the dashboard. By providing role-specific materials, users can increase their proficiency in using the platform effectively, driving adoption and maximizing the utility of the management system. This approach not only enhances user satisfaction but also minimizes frustration and onboarding time for new users.

Acceptance Criteria

Role-Specific Training Access for New Users

Given a new user has logged into RetailRevolution, when they navigate to the training resources section, then they should see a personalized set of training materials relevant to their user role.

Training Resource Effectiveness Feedback

Given that a user has completed a training resource, when they provide feedback on the resource, then the feedback should be collected and categorized by resource type and user role for analysis.

Accessibility of Training Materials

Given any user accessing RetailRevolution from a mobile device, when they navigate to the training resources, then the user should be able to access and view training materials seamlessly without formatting issues.

Comprehensive Resource Coverage

Given a user explores the training resources dashboard, when they filter by their role, then they should find training materials covering at least 90% of the tasks and functionalities relevant to their role.

Library of Diverse Training Formats

Given users of various roles accessing training resources, when they look for materials, then they should find tutorials, how-to guides, and videos available for each role, ensuring diverse formats for learning.

User Satisfaction Measurement

Given users have utilized the training resources, when they are prompted to rate their experience, then the average satisfaction rating should be at least 80% positive across all roles.

Interactive Visualizations

Users can transform raw data into engaging visual formats such as charts, graphs, and heat maps. The Interactive Visualizations feature enhances comprehension of complex data sets, enabling users to spot trends and outliers at a glance, ultimately leading to quicker and better-informed decisions.

Requirements

Dynamic Data Filtering

"As a retail manager, I want to filter my inventory data by category and date range so that I can quickly analyze sales trends and make informed stock decisions based on recent performance."

Description

The Dynamic Data Filtering feature allows users to manipulate the data presented in visualizations by applying real-time filters based on various criteria such as date ranges, categories, and sales channels. This capability enhances user experience by enabling customized views of data, making it easier to analyze specific segments or time periods. It integrates seamlessly within the existing dashboard layout, utilizing intuitive controls that allow users to interactively update visualizations on the fly. This feature is critical in empowering users to derive actionable insights tailored to their immediate needs, leading to informed decision-making and strategy adjustments based on up-to-date information.

Acceptance Criteria

User applies date range filters to a sales report visualization to analyze the performance of specific weeks during a promotional campaign.

Given the user selects a date range from the filter options, When the user applies the filter, Then the sales report visualization updates to show only the data within the selected date range.

A user filters the visualizations by product category to view sales trends for a specific category over the last month.

Given the user selects a specific product category from the filter options, When the user applies the category filter, Then all visualizations update to reflect data pertinent to the selected category for the last month.

When a user selects multiple filters (e.g., date range, product category, and sales channel), they expect all corresponding visualizations to update accordingly.

Given the user applies multiple filters simultaneously, When the filters are applied, Then all visualizations refresh to display data that matches all the applied filters without any data loss.

A user wants to reset all filters applied to visualizations to view the complete dataset before making new selections.

Given the user clicks the reset filter button, When the action is performed, Then all filters are cleared, and all visualizations revert to displaying the complete dataset without any filters applied.

A retail manager filters visualizations by sales channel to assess the performance of online versus in-store sales.

Given the user selects 'Online' from the sales channel filter, When the filter is applied, Then visualizations adjust to show sales data strictly related to online transactions for the selected timeframe.

The user wants to extract data from a filtered visualization to share insights with team members.

Given the user has applied filters and selected a specific visualization, When the user clicks the export button, Then the filtered data is downloaded in the chosen format (CSV, PDF) accurately reflecting the current view of the visualization.

A user engages with tooltips for additional insights while hovering over certain data points in the visualizations after applying filters.

Given the user has applied filters and hovers over data points on visualizations, When the tooltip appears, Then it displays accurate, contextually relevant information based on the filtered data shown in the visualization.

Exportable Reports

"As a data analyst, I want to export my visualized data into a PDF report so that I can easily share insights with my team and stakeholders without requiring them to access the platform directly."

Description

The Exportable Reports feature enables users to generate, customize, and export reports directly from the visualizations they create. Users can choose from various export formats such as PDF, Excel, or CSV, allowing for easy sharing and offline access. This feature provides a way to encapsulate key insights from their data analysis and distribute them to stakeholders who may not have direct access to the platform. Furthermore, it includes options to schedule periodic report generation, ensuring that users receive the latest data without manual intervention. By supporting enhanced reporting capabilities, this feature strengthens the decision-making process and promotes collaboration among team members.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to generate an exportable report of their inventory trends after analyzing data through interactive visualizations.

Given a user has selected a visualization and customized the report settings, when they click the 'Export' button, then a report should be generated successfully in their chosen format (PDF, Excel, or CSV).

A user schedules a periodic report to be sent to their email for updated inventory insights.

Given a user has configured the scheduling settings for report generation, when the scheduled time arrives, then the system should generate and send the report to the specified email address without manual intervention.

A user exports a report in PDF format and opens it to review the content.

Given a user has exported a report in PDF format, when they open the export file, then all the data visualizations and customizations should be accurately reflected in the PDF document.

The user applies filters to their visualization and exports the resulting filtered data.

Given a user has applied specific filters to their visualization, when they export the report, then the exported file should only include data that matches the applied filters.

A user accesses the help feature while attempting to export their report.

Given a user is on the export screen, when they click on the help icon, then a help section should appear explaining the export options and functionalities available.

A user attempts to export a report without selecting any visualization.

Given a user is on the export page without selecting any visualization, when they attempt to click the 'Export' button, then an error message should be displayed indicating they must select a visualization first.

A user exports multiple reports in different formats concurrently.

Given a user has selected multiple visualizations and initiated exports for different formats (PDF, CSV, and Excel), when they confirm the export process, then all requested reports should be generated and provided for download simultaneously without errors.

Interactive Dashboard Customization

"As a store owner, I want to customize my dashboard by dragging and dropping visualizations so that I can prioritize the metrics that matter most to my business at a glance."

Description

The Interactive Dashboard Customization feature allows users to personalize their dashboards by rearranging, resizing, and selecting different visualization types based on their preferences. This capability offers a flexible and user-friendly interface that adapts to different user roles and data needs. By enabling users to create a tailored workspace, they can easily focus on the metrics and visualizations that are most relevant to their operational goals. This feature integrates with the existing dashboard layout and ensures a smooth user experience, ultimately enhancing user engagement and satisfaction with the platform as they can craft a dashboard reflective of their unique priorities.

Acceptance Criteria

User rearranges dashboard widgets to prioritize sales data and customer analytics based on preference.

Given the user is on the dashboard customization page, when the user drags and drops the sales data widget above the customer analytics widget, then the sales data widget should display above the customer analytics widget on the dashboard.

User selects different visualization types for various metrics on their dashboard.

Given the user has metrics displayed on their dashboard, when the user selects a line chart for sales metrics and a heat map for customer demographics, then the dashboard should refresh and display the sales metrics as a line chart and customer demographics as a heat map.

User resizes dashboard widgets to create more space for critical metrics.

Given the user is on their customized dashboard, when the user drags the corner of a widget to resize it to occupy 50% of the dashboard width, then the widget should resize accordingly without losing any data visualization.

User saves their customized dashboard layout for future use.

Given the user has made changes to the dashboard layout, when the user clicks on the 'Save Layout' button, then the system should confirm the layout has been saved and reflect the saved layout upon the next dashboard login.

User switches between different user roles to access varied dashboard configurations.

Given the user is logged in with a manager role, when the user switches the role to a staff member, then the dashboard should update to reflect the staff member's predefined dashboard configuration.

User deletes a visualization from their dashboard.

Given the user has multiple visualizations on their dashboard, when the user clicks the delete icon on a specific visualization, then that visualization should be removed from the dashboard immediately with an option to undo.

User accesses the dashboard on different devices to confirm responsiveness.

Given the user has customized their dashboard on a desktop, when the user accesses the same dashboard from a mobile device, then the dashboard should maintain layout integrity and display visualizations appropriately according to mobile screen size.

Trend Analysis Alerts

"As a retail strategist, I want to set alerts for unusual drops in sales trends so that I can respond quickly to potential issues affecting my store’s performance."

Description

The Trend Analysis Alerts feature provides users with the ability to set up automated alerts for significant trends or anomalies detected within the visualized data. Users can define specific parameters or thresholds that, when crossed, trigger alerts sent via email or notifications within the app. This proactive approach allows users to stay informed about changes in sales patterns, inventory levels, or customer behavior without actively monitoring the data. Integrating this feature enhances operational efficiency by ensuring that users can quickly respond to critical changes, facilitating timely decision-making and potentially improving sales outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Setting Up Custom Thresholds for Alerts

Given a user is on the Trend Analysis Alerts setup page, When they input a custom threshold for a defined parameter, Then the system should save the threshold and display a confirmation message.

Receiving Alerts via Email

Given a user has defined a threshold that has been crossed, When the alert condition is met, Then the system should send an email notification to the user with relevant details of the alert.

Viewing Alerts within the App

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution app, When a defined alert condition is triggered, Then the user should see a notification in the app's dashboard indicating the alert and providing details of the trend.

Editing Existing Alert Parameters

Given a user has previously set up an alert, When they navigate to the alert settings, Then they should be able to modify the parameters and save the changes successfully.

Dismissing an Alert Notification

Given a user receives an alert notification in the app, When they select the option to dismiss the alert, Then the alert should be removed from the notification panel and logged in the alert history.

Filtering Alerts by Type

Given a user is viewing their alert notifications, When they apply a filter to view specific types of alerts (e.g., sales trends, inventory levels), Then the system should display only the alerts that match the selected filter criteria.

Generating Report of Past Alerts

Given a user is on the alert history page, When they request a report of past alerts, Then the system should generate a downloadable report summarizing all past alerts and their respective details.

Collaborative Annotations

"As a team member, I want to add comments and annotations to specific visualizations so that I can share insights and collaborate effectively with my colleagues in real time."

Description

The Collaborative Annotations feature allows users to add comments and notes directly on the visualizations, facilitating a collaborative approach to analyzing data. Team members can tag each other in comments, share insights, and discuss findings in context, reducing the need for external communication tools. This feature promotes enhanced teamwork and ensures that all discussions regarding data-driven decisions occur within the same interface as the visual information. By supporting real-time collaboration, users can synchronize understanding and strategies, leading to more cohesive team efforts in driving improved retail performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Collaborative Annotations: Enabling Real-Time Team Discussions on Visualizations

Given a user is viewing a data visualization, when they add a comment, then the comment should be visible to all users with access to the visualization in real-time.

Tagging Team Members in Annotations

Given a user adds a comment on a visualization, when they tag another team member, then that tagged member should receive a notification and see the comment within the application.

Editing and Deleting Annotations

Given a user has added an annotation, when they choose to edit or delete it, then the changes should reflect in real-time across all devices viewing the visualization.

Viewing Annotation History

Given a user is on a visualization with annotations, when they access the annotation history, then they should be able to see all past comments, who made them, and when they were made.

Filtering Annotations by User

Given a visualization with multiple annotations, when a user applies a filter to show annotations by a specific team member, then only that team member's comments should be displayed.

Exporting Annotations with Visualizations

Given a user has made annotations on a visualization, when they export the visualization, then all annotations should be included in the exported file.

Automated Reporting Scheduler

With the Automated Reporting Scheduler, users can set up regular report generation and delivery tailored to their schedules. This feature ensures that stakeholders receive the necessary insights when needed, promoting accountability and keeping everyone aligned with current performance metrics.

Requirements

Custom Report Templates

"As a retail manager, I want to create custom report templates so that I can generate reports tailored to my business needs and ensure consistent data presentation across all my reporting."

Description

This requirement allows users to create and save customizable report templates for their regular reporting needs. Users will be able to tailor the fields, formats, and visualizations included in their reports, ensuring that the information presented is relevant and aligned with their specific business objectives. By utilizing custom templates, users can ensure consistent branding and presentation across all reports generated. This functionality will enhance user autonomy in generating reports, reduce repetitive tasks, and foster a stronger alignment with individual business strategies, ultimately contributing to efficient decision-making and improved performance tracking.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new custom report template for weekly inventory analysis.

Given the user is on the 'Create Report Template' page, when they select fields, formats, and visualizations for the report, and click 'Save', then the report template should be created and listed under 'My Templates'.

User edits an existing report template to update visualizations.

Given the user is viewing their saved report template, when they update the visualizations and click 'Save Changes', then the modifications should be applied, and a confirmation message should be displayed.

User generates a report using a custom template for the monthly sales performance.

Given the user selects a custom report template for monthly sales in the reporting dashboard, when they click 'Generate Report', then the report should be created with the specified fields and format of the template chosen.

User shares a custom report template with team members.

Given the user is on the 'My Templates' page, when they select a template and click 'Share', then the template should be shared with the selected team members, and a success notification should be displayed.

User deletes an unwanted custom report template.

Given the user is viewing their list of report templates, when they click 'Delete' next to a template, then the template should be removed from the list, and a confirmation message should appear to verify the deletion.

User views the usage statistics of their custom report templates.

Given the user accesses the reporting dashboard, when they view the 'Usage Statistics' section, then they should see the metrics reflecting how frequently each template has been used, including creation dates and last usage dates.

Automated Email Notifications

"As a team lead, I want to receive automated email notifications when reports are generated so that I can stay updated on performance metrics without having to check manually for new reports."

Description

This requirement enables the system to automatically send email notifications to stakeholders when reports are generated and delivered. Users can define recipients and customize messages for each report type, ensuring personalized communication. This feature promotes accountability by keeping stakeholders informed and aligned without the need for manual outreach. The integrated notification system will also allow users to set up reminders for upcoming reports, facilitating a proactive approach to performance review and decision-making based on the latest data available.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Email Notifications for Report Generation

Given the user has set up a report schedule, when the report is generated, then the system sends an email notification to all defined recipients with a customized message for that report type.

Recipient Customization for Notifications

Given a user is configuring report notifications, when they enter recipient email addresses, then the system should validate the email format and allow multiple entries separated by commas or semicolons.

Automated Reminder Notifications for Upcoming Reports

Given a user has scheduled a report to be generated, when the report is one day away from the scheduled generation, then the system sends a reminder email to all designated stakeholders.

Report Delivery Confirmation

Given a report has been delivered to the recipients, when an email is sent, then the system should log the date and time of the delivery alongside the report details in the internal records.

Testing the Email Notification System

Given test email recipients are configured, when a test report is generated, then the system should send a test notification and confirm receipt by all specified addresses within 5 minutes.

Integration with User Permissions

Given the user has permission to edit report settings, when they set up email notifications, then the system should only allow changes to recipients if appropriate permissions are granted.

Monitoring of Notification System Performance

Given the system has been in use for a month, when a performance review is conducted, then the system should generate a report on the success rate of email notifications sent, tracking any failures or delivery issues.

Multi-User Scheduling Access

"As an operations manager, I want multiple team members to have access to schedule reports, so that we can collaborate efficiently without overlapping tasks and responsibilities in our reporting process."

Description

This requirement allows multiple users to schedule report generation based on their roles and responsibilities. User permissions will dictate who can set, modify, or cancel scheduled reports, ensuring that team members maintain visibility over report scheduling without confliction. This functionality is crucial for larger teams with diverse reporting needs, allowing seamless collaboration and oversight across departments. By streamlining access for multiple users, the platform enhances its usability and promotes a culture of transparency and shared accountability within teams.

Acceptance Criteria

Multiple users are able to schedule or modify reports in the system according to their different roles and responsibilities, ensuring that various departments and team members receive pertinent information based on their needs.

Given that a user with scheduling permissions is logged in, when they attempt to create a new report schedule, then they should be able to select the report type, frequency, and delivery method.

Users are able to view all scheduled reports in a centralized dashboard, allowing visibility for all stakeholders and preventing scheduling conflicts.

Given that a user with view permissions is logged in, when they access the report scheduling dashboard, then they should see a list of all scheduled reports including details such as report name, scheduled time, and user who created the schedule.

User permissions dictate who can modify or cancel scheduled reports, ensuring that only authorized personnel can make changes to established schedules.

Given that a user attempts to modify or cancel a scheduled report, when they do not possess the necessary permissions, then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

Notifications are sent to users when reports are generated or when any changes are made to scheduled reports, keeping all relevant stakeholders informed.

Given that a report is successfully generated or a scheduled report is modified, when the action occurs, then an email notification should be sent to all users who are subscribed to the report.

Users can filter scheduled reports by owner, type, or status to quickly find specific reports relevant to their needs or responsibilities.

Given that a user is on the report scheduling dashboard, when they apply filters for report owner, type, or status, then only the relevant scheduled reports should be displayed.

Access control is implemented effectively, ensuring that only designated roles within the organization can create or alter report schedules.

Given that a user attempts to create or modify a schedule, when their role does not permit such actions, then the system should restrict these functionalities and display an appropriate error message.

Data Visualization Options

"As a business analyst, I want to use different data visualization options in my reports so that I can present data in the most understandable way for my stakeholders."

Description

This requirement introduces a variety of data visualization options for reports, including charts, graphs, and dashboards that can be selected during the report creation process. Users can choose the most effective way to display specific data points, enhancing clarity and understanding of performance metrics. Enhancing the user experience with visually appealing representations of data will aid in quicker insights and facilitate better discussions during stakeholder meetings. This feature plays a significant role in turning complex data into actionable information, helping retailers make informed decisions swiftly.

Acceptance Criteria

User Selection of Visualization Options for Report Generation

Given a user is creating a new report, when they reach the visualization options step, then they should be able to select from at least five different data visualization types (charts, graphs, dashboards, etc.).

User Preview of Selected Visualizations

Given a user has selected a data visualization type, when they preview the report, then the chosen visualization should accurately display the relevant data as per the user's selection.

Multiple Visualizations in a Single Report

Given a user is creating a report, when they choose to add multiple data visualization types, then the final report should display all selected visualizations without data loss or formatting issues.

Exporting Reports with Visualizations

Given a user has finalized their report with selected visualizations, when they choose to export the report, then the exported file should include all visualizations in the specified format (PDF, Excel, etc.).

User Feedback on Visualization Effectiveness

Given users receive a report with various visualizations, when they provide feedback through a survey, then at least 80% of users should indicate that the visualizations enhanced their understanding of the data.

Integration of Visualization Options with Existing Reports

Given a user accesses an existing report without visualizations, when they attempt to modify the report, then they should have the option to add new visualizations to the report.

Performance Metrics Dashboard

"As a retail owner, I want to access a real-time performance metrics dashboard so that I can quickly assess how my store is performing and make decisions based on the most current data available."

Description

This requirement creates a real-time performance metrics dashboard that aggregates key data from the reports generated by the Automated Reporting Scheduler. Users will have access to visual summaries of performance across different timeframes, such as daily, weekly, and monthly views. The dashboard will include visualizations such as trend lines and comparison graphs to facilitate quick assessment of performance against set goals. This feature is essential for users who require at-a-glance insights into their retail operations without having to dive into individual reports, promoting quicker, data-driven decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Performance Metrics Dashboard to view daily sales performance for the past week during a team meeting.

Given that the user is logged into the system, when they navigate to the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then they should see visual summaries of daily sales performance for each day of the past week displayed clearly with trend lines and comparison graphs.

A manager wants to evaluate weekly performance metrics for the retail store to assess the effectiveness of a recent promotion.

Given that the manager has access to the dashboard, when they select the weekly view for the past month, then they should see aggregated visual data representing sales performance with the ability to compare it against the previous month.

Users need to identify monthly inventory turnover ratios to optimize stock levels for the upcoming month.

Given that the user selects the monthly view on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they assess the visual data presented, then they should be able to see the inventory turnover ratio clearly indicated with contextual insights and suggested actions.

A company director requires a quick overview of overall performance metrics across all locations to report to stakeholders.

Given that the director is logged into the system, when they access the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then they should see a consolidated summary of performance metrics across all locations presented visually with options for in-depth analysis if needed.

A user sets up an automated report of performance metrics to be delivered weekly with specific KPIs.

Given that the user has configured the Automated Reporting Scheduler, when they specify the KPIs to be included and set the delivery schedule, then the system should generate the report accurately and deliver it on the specified schedule without errors.

After implementation, the support team wants to verify that the dashboard visualizations load correctly across different devices including tablets, desktops, and mobile phones.

Given that the dashboard is accessed through a variety of device types, when the dashboard is loaded, then all visualizations must render correctly and function properly with responsive design across all platforms.

Integration with Third-Party Analytics Tools

"As a data analyst, I want to integrate RetailRevolution with third-party analytics tools so that I can perform in-depth analysis and leverage advanced features that enhance my reporting capabilities."

Description

This requirement enables seamless integration with popular third-party analytics tools, allowing data from the Automated Reporting Scheduler to be exported for deeper analysis. Users can leverage additional analytics capabilities such as forecasting, trend analysis, and advanced statistical reporting by connecting their RetailRevolution account with tools like Google Analytics, Tableau, or Power BI. This integration will enhance the depth of analysis available to retail managers, allowing for richer insights and broader contextual understanding of their data, thus driving more impactful business decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules an automated report to run weekly, and connects their RetailRevolution account to Google Analytics for data export.

Given a user has an active RetailRevolution account, when they select Google Analytics as the export option and set a report frequency to weekly, then the system should generate and send the report on the specified schedule without manual intervention.

A retail manager wants to analyze inventory trends using Tableau after scheduling a monthly report.

Given a user has scheduled a monthly report and selected Tableau as the export tool, when the report is generated, then the data should be correctly formatted and accessible within Tableau, allowing for immediate analysis.

User configures multiple third-party analytics tools for different report types in the Automated Reporting Scheduler.

Given a user has access to multiple analytics tools, when they configure the Automated Reporting Scheduler to export different report types to various tools (like Power BI and Google Analytics), then all reports should be correctly directed to the specified tools without errors.

A user manually triggers a report generation and exports the data to both Microsoft Excel and Power BI.

Given a user can trigger a manual report, when they request this generation while opting for multiple export formats, then both Excel and Power BI should receive the report data accurately and in real-time.

A sales manager reviews the insights from Google Analytics to adjust inventory strategy based on the reports received.

Given the automated reports are being generated and sent weekly to the sales manager, when they access the reports in Google Analytics, then they should see relevant insights that reflect real-time data from RetailRevolution and enable informed business decisions.

User encounters a failure in report generation due to incorrect configuration and seeks to troubleshoot the issue.

Given a user attempts to set up report generation with an incorrect API key for third-party integration, when they save this configuration, then the system should display a clear error message indicating the nature of the error and provide guidance on how to correct it.

Custom KPI Creation

This feature enables users to define and monitor their own KPIs based on specific business goals and objectives. By allowing for Custom KPI Creation, users can ensure they are tracking what matters most to their business, providing greater flexibility and personalization in their reporting practices.

Requirements

Custom KPI Definition

"As a retail manager, I want to define custom KPIs so that I can track performance metrics that are most relevant to my business goals."

Description

The Custom KPI Definition requirement allows users to create specific metrics tailored to their unique business goals. This functionality empowers retailers to track performance indicators that are directly relevant to their operations, such as sales per square foot or inventory turnover. Implementing this requirement equips users with a customizable dashboard where they can easily visualize and monitor their defined KPIs over time, leading to more informed decision-making. It enhances the overall usability of the RetailRevolution platform by providing flexibility in reporting and ensuring that users can keep tabs on metrics that drive business success.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a custom KPI for 'Sales per Square Foot' from the dashboard.

Given the user is logged into RetailRevolution, when they navigate to the Custom KPI creation section and input the parameters for 'Sales per Square Foot', then the system should save the custom KPI and display it on the user's dashboard.

User modifies an existing custom KPI definition from the dashboard.

Given the user has an existing custom KPI, when they select the KPI for 'Inventory Turnover' and update its parameters, then the system should reflect the updated KPI on the dashboard with the new parameters.

User deletes a custom KPI from their dashboard.

Given the user wishes to remove the KPI for 'Weekly Foot Traffic', when they initiate the deletion process for that KPI, then the KPI should be successfully removed from the dashboard and not visible anymore.

User views the historical data for a custom KPI on the dashboard.

Given the user has created a custom KPI for 'Employee Sales Performance', when they click on the KPI to view detailed analytics, then the system should display a graph showing historical performance data for the specified period.

User shares a custom KPI report with team members.

Given the user has created a custom KPI report, when they select the sharing option and enter team members' email addresses, then the system should send an email with the KPI report to the specified recipients.

User sets alerts for a custom KPI threshold.

Given the user has created a custom KPI for 'Stock Levels', when they set a threshold for low stock levels and save it, then the system should generate alerts when stock levels fall below this threshold.

KPI Alerts and Notifications

"As a retail owner, I want to receive alerts when my KPIs are outside of the set thresholds so that I can take immediate action to address issues as they arise."

Description

The KPI Alerts and Notifications requirement enables the system to automatically notify users when their defined KPIs reach certain thresholds. This feature provides proactive insights that help retail managers stay informed about critical changes in performance, such as dipping sales or overstock situations. By allowing users to set thresholds and receive notifications via email or in-app alerts, this requirement helps maximize operational efficiency and prevent potential issues before they escalate, ultimately facilitating quicker response times and more agile management decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a new KPI for average sales per day and defines a threshold that triggers an alert when sales dip below a specified amount.

Given the user has created a KPI for average sales per day, when sales drop below the defined threshold, then the user receives an instant notification via email and in-app alert.

Retail manager wants to monitor stock levels for high-demand products and creates a KPI to track inventory on hand, setting a threshold for reordering.

Given the manager sets up a KPI to track inventory levels for certain products, when the inventory reaches the reorder threshold, then the system sends an automated email alert to the manager.

The user has ongoing KPIs for sales, inventory levels, and customer satisfaction, and wants to receive weekly summaries of their status.

Given the user has active KPIs, when the end of the week occurs, then the system compiles and sends a summary report of all KPIs via email detailing their current status and any alerts triggered during the week.

The system is configured to alert users about multiple KPIs, and a user wants to modify the alert preferences for one particular KPI.

Given the user wants to change the alert threshold for a specific KPI, when the user updates these settings, then the new threshold is saved, and notifications reflect the updated criteria.

A retail manager needs to assess whether the KPI alerts provided actionable insights for the last quarter.

Given the manager reviews the notifications received for KPIs over the last quarter, when they access the KPI alert history, then the log should display all alerts triggered with timestamps and relevant KPI details.

KPI Visualization Tools

"As a data analyst, I want the ability to visualize my custom KPIs so that I can easily communicate insights and trends to my team and stakeholders."

Description

The KPI Visualization Tools requirement includes advanced graphical representations of the custom KPIs defined by users. This feature will enable retailers to visualize their performance data through charts, graphs, and dashboards, making it easier to identify trends and patterns at a glance. Effective visual tools promote better comprehension of data, aiding in presentations and discussions with stakeholders. It enhances the user experience by providing intuitive access to performance data, supporting more strategic decision-making based on insightful analytics.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the KPI Visualization Tools to create a new dashboard for tracking sales performance over the last quarter.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, When they navigate to the KPI Visualization Tools, Then they should be able to create a new dashboard and select from multiple predefined chart types to visualize their custom KPIs.

A user wants to share their KPI dashboard with stakeholders in order to present sales trends during a monthly review meeting.

Given the user has created a KPI dashboard, When they select the option to share, Then the dashboard should be successfully shared via email or generate a shareable link that stakeholders can access without needing an account.

The user wants to customize the KPIs displayed in their dashboard for better alignment with current business goals.

Given the user is viewing their existing KPI dashboard, When they access the customization settings, Then they should be able to add, remove, and rearrange KPIs within the dashboard, saving their changes seamlessly.

A retail manager monitors the KPI dashboard for any stock-related KPIs to identify potential issues.

Given the KPI dashboard is displaying various KPIs, When the manager selects the stock-related KPI visualizations, Then they should clearly see trends indicating stock levels, and receive alerts for any KPIs that deviate from set thresholds.

The user seeks to understand the historical performance trends of their custom KPIs to inform future sales strategy.

Given the user requests historical performance data from the KPI Visualization Tools, When they filter KPIs by date range, Then they should be able to view and compare historical data with visual representations like line graphs or bar charts.

An account manager wants to export the visualized KPI data for a quarterly business report.

Given the user has accessed their KPI dashboard, When they choose to export the data, Then they should have the option to download their current dashboard’s visualizations as a PDF or Excel file without any data loss.

KPI Benchmarking

"As a business strategist, I want to benchmark my KPIs against industry standards so that I can evaluate my performance and identify areas for improvement."

Description

The KPI Benchmarking requirement allows users to compare their defined KPIs against industry standards or historical data. This feature gives retailers the context necessary to assess their performance relative to competitors or their own past achievements. By integrating benchmarking data, users can identify areas for improvement and set realistic performance goals. This requirement supports strategic growth by motivating businesses to not only track their KPIs but also to improve them based on actionable insights and industry performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User defines custom KPIs for sales volume and profit margin for their retail business.

Given the user has access to the Custom KPI Creation feature, When they input their desired KPIs (sales volume and profit margin), Then the system should successfully save these KPIs and display them in the user's dashboard.

User compares their defined KPIs against industry benchmarks.

Given the user has created their custom KPIs, When they select the KPI Benchmarking feature, Then the system should display the comparative industry benchmarks alongside the user's KPIs in a clear graphical format.

User reviews historical KPI performance to identify trends over time.

Given the user has established KPIs with historical data, When they access the KPI Benchmarking report, Then the system should show a chart displaying the user's KPI trends over the last year, enabling easy comparison.

User receives actionable insights prompted by KPI performance compared to benchmarks.

Given the user has viewed their KPIs against industry benchmarks, When a KPI falls below the benchmark, Then the system should provide suggested actions to improve that KPI and a notification alerting the user.

User customizes the time frame for KPI benchmarking analysis.

Given the user wants to view KPIs over a selected period, When they set the desired time frame for analysis in the KPI Benchmarking feature, Then the system should update the displayed data to reflect only that specified period.

User exports KPI benchmark reports for further analysis.

Given the user has accessed their KPI benchmarking results, When they click on the export button, Then the system should generate a CSV file containing all the KPI data and benchmarks for download.

KPI Sharing and Collaboration

"As a team leader, I want to share my KPI reports with my team members so that we can collaboratively work towards our performance goals and ensure everyone is aligned."

Description

The KPI Sharing and Collaboration requirement enables users to share their custom KPI dashboards and reports with team members or stakeholders within the platform. This fosters collaboration and alignment across the organization by ensuring all relevant parties have access to the same data. Users can set permissions and controls to manage who can view or edit specific KPIs, enhancing teamwork while maintaining data security. This requirement is crucial for creating a transparent culture of performance tracking and accountability among teams.

Acceptance Criteria

User sharing custom KPI dashboard with team members through the platform.

Given that the user is on the KPI dashboard page, when they choose to share the dashboard, then a sharing link is generated that can be copied to share with team members, and they receive an email notification regarding the access.

User setting permissions for shared KPIs to control access.

Given that the user has shared their KPI dashboard, when they go to the permissions settings, then they can set specific viewing or editing rights for each team member, ensuring that only authorized personnel can make changes.

Team members receiving and accessing shared KPI dashboards.

Given that a team member has received a sharing link for a KPI dashboard, when they click on the link, then they should be directed to the dashboard with the appropriate permissions as set by the user.

User tracking the engagement of shared KPI dashboards among team members.

Given that the user has shared a KPI dashboard, when team members view or edit the dashboard, then the user should receive notifications summarizing the engagement and any changes made by team members.

User collaborating in real-time on KPI dashboard metrics with a team member.

Given that two users are accessing the same KPI dashboard, when one user makes changes to a metric, then the other user should see the updates in real-time without refreshing the page.

User removing access to shared KPI dashboards.

Given that the user wants to revoke access to a previously shared KPI dashboard, when they navigate to the permissions settings, then they should be able to remove individual team members from the access list successfully, and those members should no longer see the dashboard.

User receiving alerts for changes in KPI performance after sharing.

Given that the user has shared the KPI dashboard, when any changes occur to the performance of the KPIs displayed, then the user should receive an alert notifying them of the changes in performance metrics, ensuring they stay informed.

Mobile-Ready Dashboard

The Mobile-Ready Dashboard ensures that users can access and interact with their customized reports on any device, at any time. This feature enhances user convenience and accessibility, allowing for decision-making on the go, which is essential for busy retail professionals.

Requirements

Responsive Design Optimization

"As a retail manager, I want the Mobile-Ready Dashboard to be optimized for all devices so that I can easily access and analyze my reports while moving between locations, ensuring I can make timely decisions based on real-time data."

Description

The Responsive Design Optimization requirement focuses on ensuring that the Mobile-Ready Dashboard dynamically adjusts its layout and functionality based on the screen size and orientation of the device being used. This requirement enhances user experience by providing a seamless view of reports and data analytics on smartphones, tablets, or any other devices without compromising on clarity or functionality. The implementation involves utilizing flexible grid systems and media queries in the design, ensuring that users have access to critical information efficiently in various contexts such as in-store or off-site, whether it is a detailed inventory analysis or sales performance metrics, thereby increasing user satisfaction and enhancing decision-making capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Mobile-Ready Dashboard on a smartphone while at a retail location to review real-time inventory levels.

Given the user is on a smartphone, when they access the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then the dashboard should display a layout optimized for mobile screens, showing critical inventory data in a clear and readable format.

A retail manager reviews sales performance metrics using a tablet during a business meeting.

Given the user is using a tablet, when they navigate to the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then the dashboard should adjust its layout dynamically to fit the tablet’s screen size, ensuring all data is easily viewable and interactive.

A user is off-site and tries to access the Mobile-Ready Dashboard on a laptop.

Given the user is accessing the dashboard on a laptop, when they log in to the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then the layout should expand appropriately to utilize the larger screen size, maintaining usability and clarity without overwhelming the user with information.

A user changes the orientation of their smartphone from portrait to landscape while viewing the Mobile-Ready Dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard on their smartphone, when the orientation is changed from portrait to landscape, then the dashboard layout should automatically adjust to utilize the screen space efficiently, ensuring all elements are accessible without resizing issues.

A user accesses the Mobile-Ready Dashboard while on a low-bandwidth connection in a remote area.

Given the user is connected to a low-bandwidth network, when they access the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then the dashboard should load essential data first and optimize content loading to enhance performance and usability under restricted conditions.

A user receives a notification alert on their mobile device indicating a critical stock level that needs attention.

Given the user has set critical stock alerts, when they view the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then the dashboard should highlight these alerts prominently, ensuring the user can easily identify and address the stock issue immediately.

Customizable Alert Notifications

"As a store owner, I want to customize my alert notifications so that I am promptly informed about any significant changes in inventory or sales metrics, allowing me to respond quickly and appropriately to market demands."

Description

The Customizable Alert Notifications requirement allows users to set personalized notifications based on their defined parameters such as inventory levels, sales trends, or specific KPIs directly from the Mobile-Ready Dashboard. This feature enables users to receive timely updates and alerts via push notifications or emails, ensuring they never miss critical information regardless of their location. Implementation consists of integrating a user-friendly configuration panel within the dashboard where users can select triggers, choose notification channels, and set alert thresholds, which directly enhances proactive management of inventory and sales performance and fosters a more responsive retail environment.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets custom alert notifications for low inventory on a specific product.

Given that the user is on the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, when they navigate to the alert configuration panel and set a threshold for low inventory on a specific product, then they should receive an email notification when the inventory level falls below the set threshold.

User configures alerts based on sales trends for a particular SKU.

Given that the user has access to the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, when they select a specific SKU and define parameters for sales trends in the notification settings, then they should receive push notifications on their mobile device when the sales trend indicates an upward or downward movement based on their defined parameters.

User chooses between email and push notifications for alerts.

Given that the user is in the notification configuration panel, when they select their preferred notification channel (email or push notification) for specific alerts, then the system should correctly send notifications through the chosen channel upon triggering the alert conditions.

User tests the alert notification system for accuracy.

Given that the user has configured multiple alert conditions for inventory levels, when an alert is triggered based on one of the conditions, then the notification should be received within 5 minutes and be accurate to the defined parameters in the configuration settings.

User updates alert parameters from their mobile device.

Given that the user is on their mobile device using the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, when they change the threshold for a previously set alert notification, then the changes should be saved successfully and reflected in the notification settings immediately.

User accesses a history of past notifications received.

Given that the user has received push notifications and emails from the alert system, when they navigate to the notification history section in the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, then they should see a comprehensive log of all alerts received, including timestamps and details of the alert conditions.

User receives alerts for multiple defined KPIs at once.

Given that the user has set alerts for multiple KPIs on the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, when any of the KPIs reach their defined thresholds simultaneously, then the user should receive separate notifications for each KPI without delays or overlap.

Data Synchronization Across Devices

"As a retail employee, I want the data on the Mobile-Ready Dashboard to synchronize in real-time across all my devices, so that I can ensure I am always working with the most current information, no matter whether I am at my desk or on the sales floor."

Description

The Data Synchronization Across Devices requirement ensures that all reports and user interactions within the Mobile-Ready Dashboard are consistently updated in real-time across all devices. This requirement guarantees that whenever a user makes changes or views reports on one device, those changes are immediately reflected on all other devices. The implementation will utilize cloud-based technologies and APIs to ensure reliable data transfer and synchronization processes, fostering a unified user experience. This capability is critical for maintaining accurate and up-to-date information across the retail operation, thereby enabling informed decision-making and collaboration among team members regardless of their physical location.

Acceptance Criteria

User views and modifies inventory reports on a mobile device while in the store, and the changes automatically sync across their desktop at headquarters and other authorized mobile devices.

Given that a user updates inventory levels on a mobile device, When they access the same report on any device, Then the updated inventory levels should be displayed instantly without refreshing.

A user accesses the Mobile-Ready Dashboard from different devices throughout their workday, including a tablet, smartphone, and desktop, to track sales trends.

Given that a user is logged into the Mobile-Ready Dashboard from multiple devices, When they check sales trends, Then all devices should reflect the same real-time data simultaneously.

An inventory manager sets a low stock alert for a particular item on their smartphone while on the sales floor, expecting the alert settings to apply across all devices immediately.

Given that a user saves a low stock alert on one device, When they switch to another device, Then the low stock alert settings should be identical across all devices without delay.

A user generates a sales report on their desktop and then views the same report on their mobile device after a few minutes.

Given that a user creates and saves a sales report on the desktop, When they navigate to the report on their mobile device, Then the report should include any recent changes or updates made within one minute.

During a team meeting, a user presents data from the Mobile-Ready Dashboard on a projector using a laptop while team members access the same report live on their tablets.

Given that the user is presenting a report, When any team member updates the report on their tablet, Then the presentation on the laptop should automatically refresh to reflect those changes for all attendees.

A user needs to check inventory status on their smartphone while moving between different store locations, relying on real-time updates for decision-making.

Given that a user is reviewing inventory data on their smartphone, When they switch between locations, Then the inventory data must refresh and update within 10 seconds to reflect the current status at the new location.

An authorized user modifies configuration settings on their mobile device to customize their view on the Mobile-Ready Dashboard, while other users are active on different devices.

Given that a user updates dashboard configuration settings on a mobile device, When other users log in on their devices, Then they should see the updated configuration applied immediately without needing to log out and back in.

User-Friendly Analytics Interface

"As a data analyst, I want a user-friendly analytics interface that allows me to create custom reports quickly, so that I can focus on extracting valuable insights without being hindered by complex tools."

Description

The User-Friendly Analytics Interface requirement focuses on creating an intuitive dashboard layout that visually represents data analytics in a way that is easy to understand and manipulate. This includes functionalities such as drag-and-drop widgets for custom report creation, interactive charts, and filtering options. The implementation will involve user research to design interfaces that meet user needs optimally. The expected outcome is to enhance user engagement with the analytics tools, enabling users to derive insights quickly and make effective decisions, while minimizing the learning curve associated with data interpretation.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing Custom Reports on Mobile Device

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform on a mobile device, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should be able to view and interact with their customized reports without losing data integrity and functionality.

Creating a Custom Report Using Drag-and-Drop

Given a user is on the User-Friendly Analytics Interface, when they utilize the drag-and-drop feature to create a custom report, then the report should generate accurately reflecting the selected data metrics and filters applied.

Interacting with Interactive Charts on the Dashboard

Given a user is viewing an interactive chart on the analytics dashboard, when they select different data points or filter options, then the chart should dynamically update to reflect the new selections in real-time.

Storing User Preferences for Dashboard Layouts

Given a user has customized their dashboard layout, when they log back into RetailRevolution, then their previously saved dashboard layout should load automatically, preserving the user experience.

Filtering Data Based on Date Range

Given a user is using the filtering options on the analytics dashboard, when they select a specific date range, then the displayed data should update to show only metrics within that date range accurately.

Ensuring Accessibility Compliance for Dashboard Options

Given the User-Friendly Analytics Interface is being developed, when the accessibility features are audited, then all UI elements should meet WCAG 2.1 AA accessibility standards for visually impaired users.

Training Users on Dashboard Features

Given the development of the User-Friendly Analytics Interface, when a training session is conducted with end-users, then at least 80% of participants should report their confidence in using all key features of the dashboard.

Report Sharing and Collaboration Tools

Facilitating seamless communication, the Report Sharing and Collaboration Tools feature allows users to share their customized reports with team members and stakeholders directly through the dashboard. This functionality promotes collective decision-making and enhances team collaboration on inventory and performance-related matters.

Requirements

Custom Report Creation

"As a store manager, I want to create custom reports so that I can analyze inventory performance and make data-driven decisions to improve sales."

Description

The Custom Report Creation requirement allows users to generate tailored reports based on specific parameters such as product categories, sales history, and inventory levels. This functionality empowers users to customize the data they want to visualize, ensuring that they can focus on the metrics that matter most to their business. By enabling the creation of these personalized reports, users can gain deeper insights into their inventory management practices, optimize purchasing decisions, and ultimately enhance their operational efficiency. This feature will integrate seamlessly with existing data views, providing a cohesive user experience across the inventory management platform, thus fostering informed decision-making and strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a custom report by selecting multiple product categories and specifying a date range to analyze sales performance over the last quarter.

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Report Creation section, select multiple product categories, specify a start and end date for the last quarter, and click 'Generate Report', then the system should display a report that accurately reflects the selected categories' sales performance for the specified date range.

User saves a custom report for future access and editing.

Given a user has just created a custom report, when they click the 'Save' button and enter a report name, then the report should be saved in the user's report library and be accessible for future edits or sharing.

User shares a custom report with team members via the dashboard's sharing option.

Given a user has created a custom report, when they select the 'Share' option and input the email addresses of team members, then those members should receive an email notification with a link to the shared report, and the report should be visible in their shared reports section.

User customizes a report layout by rearranging and modifying the columns displayed.

Given a user has generated a custom report, when they drag and drop columns to rearrange them and select which columns to display or hide, then the report layout should update accordingly in real-time without the need to regenerate the report.

User applies filters to a custom report to view specific inventory levels.

Given a user is viewing a custom report, when they select filter options for inventory levels (e.g., Low, Medium, High), then the report should update to show only the data that meets those filter criteria, ensuring relevant insights are easily accessible.

User exports a custom report to a CSV file for offline analysis.

Given a user has created a custom report, when they click the 'Export' button and choose 'CSV', then the report should be downloaded as a CSV file that can be opened in spreadsheet applications without loss of data integrity.

User receives an error message when attempting to generate a report with invalid parameters.

Given a user is in the Report Creation section, when they input invalid parameters (e.g., a start date that is later than the end date), then the system should display a clear error message indicating the mistake and preventing the report from being generated until valid parameters are provided.

Report Sharing Functionality

"As a team leader, I want to share my custom reports with my team so that we can collaborate effectively on inventory strategies and performance reviews."

Description

The Report Sharing Functionality enables users to share their custom reports with team members and stakeholders directly from the dashboard. This feature supports various sharing options, including email, links, and real-time collaboration within the platform. By incorporating this functionality, RetailRevolution encourages collaborative decision-making and ensures important insights are communicated swiftly across the organization. This integration promotes teamwork, enhances transparency, and facilitates discussions around performance metrics, ensuring that everyone involved has access to the same information for more cohesive strategies and actions.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates sharing of a custom report via email to a team member from the dashboard.

Given a user has a custom report open, when they select the 'Share' option and enter a valid email address, then the report should be successfully sent to that email with a confirmation message.

User shares a report through a generated link that other users can access from the dashboard.

Given a user has a report they wish to share, when they select the 'Generate Link' option, then a shareable link should be created that allows access to the report without requiring a login, and the link must expire after 7 days.

Multiple team members collaborate on the same report in real-time from different devices.

Given two or more users are viewing the same report, when one user makes changes to the report, then all users should see the updates in real-time without needing to refresh their screens.

User receives notifications for any changes made to a shared report they are collaborating on.

Given a report is shared with multiple users, when any user makes changes, then all other users should receive an email notification summarizing the changes made.

User accesses shared reports from their dashboard easily.

Given reports have been shared with a user, when they log into their dashboard, then a dedicated section should display all reports shared with them, clearly indicating the origin of each report.

User can revoke access to a previously shared report.

Given a user has shared a report via a link, when they select 'Revoke Link' for that report, then the link should become invalid, and any user who tries to access it should receive a warning message.

User can see history of collaboration on a report.

Given a user opens a shared report, when they navigate to the 'History' tab, then they should see a log of all changes made, including the user who made each change and the timestamp.

Real-time Collaboration Tools

"As a data analyst, I want to collaborate in real-time with my colleagues on reports so that we can quickly refine our insights and act on them with the most current data available."

Description

Real-time Collaboration Tools provide a suite of features that enable multiple users to work on reports simultaneously, leave comments, and tag colleagues directly within the reporting interface. This in-platform collaboration fosters a dynamic working environment where team members can provide instant feedback and brainstorm new strategies based on live data. By integrating these tools, RetailRevolution enhances user engagement and ensures that the most relevant insights are captured and discussed in real-time, thus speeding up the decision-making process and aligning team objectives across different roles.

Acceptance Criteria

Collaborative Editing of Reports Among Team Members

Given multiple users have access to the reporting tool, When one user makes changes to a report, Then all other users should see the changes in real-time without delay.

Adding Comments and Tagging Colleagues in Reports

Given a user is viewing a report, When the user adds a comment and tags a colleague, Then the tagged colleague should receive a notification and be able to view the comment directly in the report.

Simultaneous Report Access by Multiple Users

Given a report is open for editing, When two or more users attempt to access the report at the same time, Then all users should be able to edit the report simultaneously without conflicts or data loss.

Saving and Version Control of Collaborative Reports

Given users are collaboratively editing a report, When one user saves the report, Then a new version should be created and accessible to all users, displaying the edit history.

Instant Chat Feature During Report Collaboration

Given users are collaborating on a report, When one user initiates a chat, Then all users should have access to the chat window to communicate without leaving the reporting interface.

Accessibility of Reports on Various Devices

Given a user accesses RetailRevolution on a mobile device, When they view a report, Then all collaborative features should be fully functional and accessible just like on a desktop.

Feedback Mechanism for Report Effectiveness

Given users are collaboratively working on a report, When the report is finalized and shared, Then users should have the option to provide feedback on the collaboration tools used.

Automated Report Scheduling

"As an operations manager, I want to set up automated report deliveries so that my team receives regular updates without manual intervention, allowing us to stay informed and responsive to our inventory needs."

Description

Automated Report Scheduling allows users to set schedules for generating and distributing reports at specific intervals (daily, weekly, monthly). This feature minimizes the manual effort required for report generation and ensures that stakeholders receive timely updates on key performance indicators without needing to log in to the platform. Users can customize the timing, format, and recipients of these automated reports, ensuring that information flows to the right people at the right time, enhancing overall operational efficiency and responsiveness to changes in inventory and sales performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules a weekly report on inventory levels to be sent every Monday morning at 9 AM to the inventory manager and sales team.

Given the user has configured a report for weekly scheduling, When the report is generated, Then it should be sent via email to all specified recipients at the set time.

A user prefers to receive daily sales performance reports in PDF format rather than Excel and updates the schedule accordingly.

Given the user has selected PDF format for the daily report, When the report is generated, Then it must be delivered in the PDF format as specified to the user's email.

A user wants to change the frequency of a report from weekly to monthly and ensure the changes are saved and executed.

Given the user changes the report schedule from weekly to monthly, When the user saves the changes, Then the new schedule should reflect in the system for the next report generation.

A stakeholder checks to ensure they have received the quarterly performance report that was scheduled to be delivered on the first of the month.

Given the report is scheduled for the first of the month, When the date reaches the scheduled time, Then the report should be delivered to the stakeholder's email as specified.

A user sets an automated report that includes both inventory and sales data and verifies that both data types are included in the output.

Given the user has included both inventory and sales data in the report setup, When the report is generated, Then both data types should be included in the report output that is sent to the recipients.

A store manager needs to ensure the automated report functionality works correctly for different departments within the organization.

Given the store manager has set automated reports for various departments, When each department's report is scheduled, Then all reports should be generated autonomously without errors for each specified recipient.

Data Visualization Options

"As a store owner, I want to visualize my reports with graphs and charts so that I can easily understand inventory trends and make better business decisions."

Description

The Data Visualization Options requirement incorporates various graphic representation formats (charts, graphs, heat maps) for users to visualize their reports. These visual tools will help users quickly interpret complex data sets and identify trends or anomalies in inventory and sales easily. By enhancing report presentations with dynamic visual elements, RetailRevolution allows users to communicate insights clearly and effectively to stakeholders, encouraging data-driven discussions and informed decision-making that enhances strategic planning and operational adjustments.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a sales report for the past month and utilizes various data visualization options available in the platform to present the data to the team in a meeting.

Given the user has access to the report sharing feature, when they choose to visualize their sales report using charts, graphs, or heat maps, then the report should accurately display the data in the selected format without errors.

A manager wants to share an inventory report with stakeholders via the dashboard using the collaboration tools, ensuring each visual element is clear and informative.

Given the user is logged into the dashboard, when they select the inventory report and choose to share it, then all visual elements (charts, graphs) must be viewable and maintain clarity when shared with external stakeholders.

An operations manager needs to analyze a heat map representing sales performance across different regions to identify high-performing areas.

Given the data visualization options are implemented, when the user selects the heat map for a specific time frame, then the heat map should accurately represent the data, highlighting regions with the highest and lowest sales clearly.

A finance team wishes to compile various report visuals to present at an annual meeting, making use of multiple graphic formats to convey key insights effectively.

Given the user accesses various reports, when they compile these reports utilizing different data visualizations, then the final presentation must include at least three different formats (e.g., bar chart, pie chart, line graph) that are all updated with the latest data.

A user is reviewing their custom reports to assess trend changes in inventory levels using visual tools provided by the platform.

Given the user opens their custom report, when they apply visual tools like trend lines or comparative graphs, then the visuals should adequately reflect changes over the specified period and allow for easy interpretation of trends.

Insight Exchange Hub

The Insight Exchange Hub serves as a central platform for retailers to share valuable inventory insights and trends. Users can post detailed analyses, trends, and performance metrics, fostering a collaborative learning environment. This feature promotes transparency and encourages retailers to learn from one another's successes and challenges, ultimately enhancing collective knowledge and improving business outcomes.

Requirements

Real-time Insight Sharing

"As a retailer, I want to share my inventory insights and trends in real-time so that I can help others learn from my successes and challenges while also gaining valuable information from my peers."

Description

The Real-time Insight Sharing requirement enables users to post and access inventory insights, including detailed analyses, trends, and performance metrics. This functionality promotes immediate information exchange, allowing retailers to respond quickly to trends and adjust their strategies as needed. It enhances the collaborative aspect of the Insight Exchange Hub, fostering a community where users learn from each other's experiences and adapt to market changes. The implementation will include a user-friendly interface for posting insights, along with a notification system to alert users to new shared insights relevant to their interests, thereby driving engagement and collective growth.

Acceptance Criteria

User posting a new inventory insight to the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user is logged into the Insight Exchange Hub, when they submit an insight post including title, description, and category, then the post should be successfully saved and displayed in the insights feed for all users to see.

User receiving notifications for new insights that match their interests.

Given a user has selected their interests in their profile settings, when a new insight is posted that matches their selected interests, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the new post.

User accessing and viewing insights shared by others in the Hub.

Given a user is on the Insight Exchange Hub, when they navigate to the insights section, then they should be able to see a list of all shared insights with options to filter by date, category, or popularity.

User editing an existing insight post.

Given a user has permission to edit their posted insights, when they select an existing insight and make changes to the title or description, then the modified insight should be updated and reflect the changes in the insights feed.

User liking or commenting on an insight post to engage with the community.

Given a user is viewing an insight post, when they click the 'like' button or submit a comment, then the action should be recorded and displayed on the post, updating the like count or showing the new comment immediately.

User searching for specific insights using keywords.

Given a user is on the Insights page, when they enter a keyword into the search bar and submit the search, then the system should return a list of insights that contain the keyword in the title or content.

System generating analytics on the most viewed and engaged insights.

Given the system has access to insights interaction data, when an admin requests an analytics report, then the system should provide a summary report displaying the top 5 most viewed insights and corresponding engagement metrics.

Performance Metrics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to view a dashboard of my performance metrics so that I can easily gauge my business health and make informed decisions to optimize inventory management."

Description

The Performance Metrics Dashboard requirement involves the development of a comprehensive dashboard that visually represents key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory management. This dashboard will integrate with the existing features of RetailRevolution to provide users with instant access to relevant metrics such as stock turnover rates, sales forecasts, and seasonal trends. By offering visual analytics, retailers can quickly assess their performance in context and make data-driven decisions. This feature is critical for users to evaluate their strategies effectively and identify areas for improvement, fostering a culture of continuous enhancement.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Key Performance Indicators on the Performance Metrics Dashboard

Given that a user accesses the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they load the page, then they should see a visual representation of at least 5 key performance indicators (KPIs) such as stock turnover rates and sales forecasts.

Filtering Performance Metrics by Date Range

Given that a user wants to analyze sales trends, when they select a date range on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then the displayed KPIs should update to reflect only the data within the selected date range.

Exporting Dashboard Data to External Formats

Given that a user is reviewing data on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they click on the export button, then they should be able to download the KPI data in both CSV and PDF formats.

Receiving Alerts for Anomalies in Performance Metrics

Given that a user has set specific thresholds for KPIs, when an anomaly occurs (e.g., sales drop by more than 20% compared to the average), then the user should receive an automated alert notification through the system.

Comparing Current Metrics to Previous Periods

Given that a user is viewing the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select a comparison option, then the dashboard should visually display a comparison of the current KPIs against the metrics from the previous period.

Accessing Dashboard from Multiple Devices

Given that a user accesses the Performance Metrics Dashboard from a mobile device, when they log in, then they should see the same KPIs and graphs as on a desktop version without loss of functionality.

Customizing KPI Display Preferences

Given that a user is on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select their preferred KPIs to display, then the dashboard should rearrange to show those selected KPIs first, allowing users to prioritize their insights.

Collaborative Analysis Tools

"As a retailer, I want to collaboratively analyze insights shared by others so that I can engage in discussions and deepen my understanding of successful inventory strategies."

Description

The Collaborative Analysis Tools requirement focuses on providing users with a suite of tools to collaboratively analyze inventory insights posted by others. This would include features such as comment sections, tagging for relevant topics, and the ability to flag insights for further discussion. The goal is to create a vibrant discussion space where retailers can dissect shared insights, derive collective learning, and build upon each other’s observations. This feature will enhance user engagement and facilitate deeper understanding of market dynamics and operational efficiencies.

Acceptance Criteria

User posts an inventory insight analysis in the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user has access to the Insight Exchange Hub, when they submit an inventory insight analysis, then the analysis should be visible to all other users within the hub.

User comments on a posted analysis in the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user views an analysis, when they enter a comment and submit it, then the comment should appear beneath the analysis with the user’s name and timestamp.

User tags a relevant topic to an insight in the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user is creating or editing an insight, when they add tags, then those tags should be saved and displayed with the insight, allowing others to filter by those topics.

User flags an insight for further discussion.

Given a user identifies an insight that needs further discussion, when they select the flag option, then the insight should be marked for discussion and visible to all users in the discussion section.

Users access a collaborative analysis tool to view insights shared by peers.

Given the user is logged into the Insight Exchange Hub, when they navigate to the collaborative analysis section, then they should see a list of all insights shared by other users, sorted by date.

User searches for specific insights using filter options.

Given a user is in the insight listing page, when they apply filter options (e.g., date, tags), then the displayed insights should match the selected filters accurately.

User receives notifications for new comments or tags in insights they follow.

Given a user follows certain insights, when new comments or tags are added to those insights, then the user should receive a notification in their dashboard.

Multilingual Support

"As a retailer, I want to access the Insight Exchange Hub in my preferred language so that I can participate fully without language barriers."

Description

The Multilingual Support requirement aims to make the Insight Exchange Hub accessible to a more diverse user base by providing language options for users from different geographical regions. This will involve implementing localization features in the user interface, enabling users to post and view insights in their preferred languages. This will not only improve user experience but will also enhance community engagement across different markets. By fostering inclusivity through language options, RetailRevolution can facilitate a wider exchange of insights and learning opportunities among retailers worldwide.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects their preferred language from a dropdown menu on the Insight Exchange Hub before posting an insight.

Given a user is logged into the Insight Exchange Hub, when they navigate to the language settings, then they should see a dropdown menu with at least five language options including English, Spanish, French, German, and Chinese.

A user posts an insight in their preferred language and it is correctly displayed in the forum.

Given a user selects Spanish from the language dropdown and posts an insight, when another user views the post, then the post should be displayed in Spanish without any translation errors.

Users can search for insights in their preferred language and retrieve relevant results.

Given a user is set to French language preference, when they search for insights on 'inventory trends', then they should only see posts that are available in French or with translated content.

A user modifies their language preference and the interface updates accordingly.

Given a user has their language preference set to German, when they change their preference to Italian, then all navigational elements and text interfaces should refresh and display in Italian.

Users can provide feedback on language accuracy through a feedback form.

Given a user reads an insight in their preferred language, when they find inaccuracies in the translation, then they can submit a feedback form indicating the issue, which should be recorded in the system.

Multilingual support is tested on various devices to ensure consistent user experience across platforms.

Given the Insight Exchange Hub is accessed from a mobile device, tablet, and desktop, when a user selects a language preference, then the layout and text must render correctly across all devices.

Admin can manage and add new languages to the platform as needed.

Given an admin accesses the multilingual support settings, when they choose to add a new language, then the new language option should appear in the user interface within 24 hours with all relevant content.

Insight Rating System

"As a user, I want to rate and review insights shared by others so that I can highlight helpful contributions and ensure high-quality content in the hub."

Description

The Insight Rating System requirement allows users to rate and review the insights shared within the Insight Exchange Hub. This feature will utilize a simple star rating or thumbs up/thumbs down mechanism to gauge the usefulness and accuracy of shared insights. It is vital for maintaining high-quality content within the hub, as users will be encouraged to share valuable insights that contribute positively to the community. The feedback generated from this system will also help identify top contributors and potentially guide users to the most impactful insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User rates an insight after reading it on the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user views an insight, when they click on the star rating system and select a rating, then the system should record the rating and display the updated average rating on the insight.

User views the overall ratings of all insights in the Insight Exchange Hub.

Given a user navigates to the Insight Exchange Hub, when they filter insights by rating, then the system should display the insights in descending order based on their average ratings.

Admin reviews insights that received the highest ratings.

Given an admin accesses the Insight Exchange Hub, when they view insights sorted by highest ratings, then the system should list the top 10 insights based on user ratings.

User submits a thumbs up/thumbs down for an insight they found useful or not.

Given a user reads an insight, when they click on the thumbs up or thumbs down button, then the system should log the feedback and update the total count of thumbs up or down for that insight accordingly.

User submits a comment with their rating to provide qualitative feedback.

Given a user rates an insight, when they also write a comment and submit it, then the system should associate the comment with the user's rating and display it alongside the respective rating.

Users view the most helpful insights based on user ratings.

Given multiple insights rated by users, when a user navigates to the 'Most Helpful Insights' section, then the system should display insights that have an average rating above 4 stars, sorted from highest to lowest.

Users receive notifications about their insight ratings in the hub.

Given a user has rated an insight, when their rating is logged, then the system should send a confirmation notification to the user confirming their rating has been recorded.

Trend Analytics Marketplace

The Trend Analytics Marketplace allows users to buy and sell trend analysis reports and inventory forecasts tailored to specific product categories or geographic regions. Retailers can monetize their expertise by offering insights based on their unique experiences while gaining access to valuable knowledge from others. This feature encourages a dynamic exchange of information that supports informed decision-making and strategic planning.

Requirements

User Registration and Profile Management

"As a retail manager, I want to register and manage my profile so that I can easily buy and sell trend analysis reports tailored to my business needs."

Description

This requirement enables users to register for an account and manage their profiles within the Trend Analytics Marketplace. It includes functionalities such as creating a new account, logging in, and updating personal information, preferences, and payment methods. This feature is essential for ensuring a secure and personalized user experience, allowing users to tailor their engagement with the marketplace, and facilitating transactions for buying or selling reports. The integration with existing user databases will ensure consistency and security of user data across the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User Registration Process for First-Time Users

Given a new user visits the Trend Analytics Marketplace, when they fill out the registration form with valid details and submit the form, then their account should be created and they should receive a confirmation email.

User Login Process for Registered Users

Given a registered user has an existing account, when they enter their valid credentials on the login page and click the login button, then they should be successfully logged into their account and redirected to their profile dashboard.

Updating User Profile Information

Given a logged-in user is on their profile page, when they update their personal information (e.g., name, address) and save the changes, then the updated information should be reflected in their profile and a success message should be displayed.

Changing User Password

Given a logged-in user wants to change their password, when they enter their current password, a new password, and confirm the new password, then the password should be updated successfully, and they should receive a confirmation message.

Managing Payment Methods in User Profile

Given a user is on their profile management page, when they add a new payment method and confirm the changes, then the new payment method should be saved and displayed in their account details.

Validating Existing User Login with Incorrect Credentials

Given a registered user tries to log in with incorrect credentials, when they enter the wrong username or password and click the login button, then an error message should be displayed indicating invalid credentials and they should remain on the login page.

Integrating User Data with Existing Database

Given a new user has successfully registered, when their information is submitted, then the user details should be securely saved in the existing user database, ensuring no data inconsistency or security breach occurs.

Marketplace Listings and Search Functionality

"As a retailer, I want to search for specific trend analysis reports so that I can find insights that match my business needs quickly."

Description

This requirement focuses on the ability for users to create, view, and search for trend analysis reports in the Marketplace. It allows sellers to list their reports with detailed descriptions, pricing, and relevant tags for categorization. Buyers can search and filter listings based on various criteria such as product category, region, and report type. This feature enhances user experience by making it easy to discover relevant reports and encourages more transactions between buyers and sellers, maximizing the value of the marketplace.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new trend analysis report listing in the Trend Analytics Marketplace.

Given a user is authenticated and on the marketplace page, when they click 'Create Listing', enter all required fields (title, description, price, tags), and submit, then the report should appear in the listings with the correct details and the user should receive a confirmation message.

User searches for trend analysis reports by category.

Given a user is on the marketplace page, when they select a product category from the dropdown and click 'Search', then the marketplace should display only the listings related to the selected category.

User views the details of a specific trend analysis report.

Given a user is on the marketplace page, when they click on a report title from the listings, then they should be taken to a detailed view of the report that includes the description, pricing, seller information, and an option to purchase.

User filters marketplace listings by multiple criteria.

Given a user is on the marketplace page, when they select filters for product category, region, and report type and click 'Apply Filters', then the page should refresh and only show reports that match all selected criteria.

Seller updates an existing trend analysis report listing.

Given a seller is on their listing page, when they make changes to any of the fields (description, price, tags) and click 'Update Listing', then the changes should be reflected immediately in the marketplace and a success notification should be displayed.

User attempts to search for trend analysis reports using a keyword not present in any listings.

Given a user is on the marketplace page, when they enter a keyword that does not match any listings and click 'Search', then the system should display a message indicating no matching reports were found.

Review and Rating System

"As a buyer, I want to read reviews and see ratings of trend analysis reports so that I can make informed purchasing decisions."

Description

This requirement establishes a review and rating system for trend analysis reports within the Marketplace. Users can leave feedback and rate reports based on their usefulness and accuracy, thus providing valuable insights for future buyers. This feature supports quality assurance by encouraging sellers to maintain high standards for their reports and enhances trust among users by enabling them to make informed decisions based on peer reviews, ultimately leading to improved marketplace engagement.

Acceptance Criteria

User Submission of Review and Rating for Trend Analysis Report

Given a user has purchased a trend analysis report, when they access the report page, then they should be able to submit a review and a rating between 1 to 5 stars.

Displaying Average Rating for Trend Analysis Report

Given a trend analysis report has multiple user reviews, when a user views the report details, then the average rating based on all user reviews should be displayed prominently on the page.

User Filtering Reviews by Rating

Given a user is viewing the reviews for a trend analysis report, when they select a filter option for ratings, then only reviews that match the selected rating criteria should be displayed.

Verification of User Ratings Submission Limits

Given a user has submitted a rating for a trend analysis report, when they attempt to submit another rating for the same report, then the system should inform them that they can only submit one rating per report.

User Notification of Review Approval Process

Given a user submits a review for a trend analysis report, when the review is submitted, then the user should receive a notification indicating that their review is under approval and will be published once approved.

Reporting System for Inappropriate Reviews

Given a review has been submitted, when a user identifies the review as inappropriate, then they should have the option to report the review, triggering an internal review process by the platform administrators.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers to Monitor Feedback

Given a seller has submitted trend analysis reports, when they access their dashboard, then they should be able to view detailed analytics including the number of reviews, average ratings, and trends in user feedback over time.

Transaction and Payment Processing

"As a seller, I want to process payments securely for my reports so that I can confidently facilitate transactions within the marketplace."

Description

This requirement covers the implementation of a secure transaction and payment processing system for buying and selling reports in the Trend Analytics Marketplace. It includes handling payment methods, transaction confirmations, and ensuring compliance with financial regulations. This capability is essential for the marketplace’s operation, allowing users to execute transactions smoothly, protecting sensitive financial information, and providing a trustworthy environment for all users participating in buying and selling activities.

Acceptance Criteria

Successful execution of a transaction in the Trend Analytics Marketplace by a retailer purchasing a trend analysis report using a credit card.

Given that the retailer is on the payment page, when they enter valid credit card information and submit the payment, then the transaction should be processed successfully, and a confirmation message should be displayed, along with an email receipt sent to the retailer's registered email address.

A vendor listing their trend analysis report for sale in the Trend Analytics Marketplace and completing the payment setup.

Given that the vendor has created a report listing, when they select the payment options and complete the setup with required bank details, then the vendor should receive a confirmation that their payment method is securely linked and ready for transactions.

Ensuring compliance with financial regulations during transaction processing in the Trend Analytics Marketplace.

Given that a transaction is initiated, when the payment information is processed, then the system must conduct real-time fraud checks and validation against financial regulations, allowing only legitimate transactions to be completed.

Handling a failed transaction due to insufficient funds while a retailer attempts to purchase a report.

Given that the retailer's account has insufficient funds, when they submit their payment information, then the system should provide a clear error message indicating the payment failure and suggest alternate payment methods.

Issuing refunds for a successfully completed transaction in the Trend Analytics Marketplace.

Given that a retailer requests a refund for a purchased report, when the vendor approves the refund, then the transaction should be reversed, and the funds should be returned to the retailer's payment method, with notifications sent to both the retailer and vendor.

Sending transaction confirmations and receipts to users for purchases made in the Trend Analytics Marketplace.

Given that a transaction has completed successfully, when the payment is processed, then the system must automatically send a confirmation email with transaction details to the user within 5 minutes of the transaction.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers

"As a seller, I want to view analytics on my reports' performance so that I can optimize my offerings and marketing strategy."

Description

This requirement introduces an analytics dashboard for sellers to track their report performance within the marketplace. It includes metrics such as number of views, downloads, user ratings, and sales figures. This feature empowers sellers to gain insights into their offerings, understand buyer behavior, and make informed decisions about marketing their reports. By providing valuable data, this requirement contributes to the growth of sellers' businesses and enhances marketplace engagement overall.

Acceptance Criteria

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - Performance Overview Access

Given that a seller is logged into their account on the Trend Analytics Marketplace, when they navigate to the analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary of their report performance including total views, total downloads, total sales, and average user ratings for the last 30 days.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - Metric Filtering

Given that a seller is viewing their analytics dashboard, when they select a date range filter, then the dashboard should update to reflect metrics for only the selected time period, including views, downloads, sales, and ratings.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - User Ratings Display

Given a seller's analytics dashboard is displayed, when the seller examines the user ratings section, then they should see an average rating score as well as a breakdown of individual ratings (1 to 5 stars) for their reports.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - Comparative Analysis Tool

Given that a seller is on their analytics dashboard, when they choose to compare their report performance to the average of similar reports in the marketplace, then they should see a graphical representation that highlights the differences in views, downloads, and sales figures.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - Download Report Feature

Given that the seller is on their analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Download Report' button, then they should receive a CSV file containing their performance metrics for the selected period.

Analytics Dashboard for Sellers - Support and Help Access

Given that a seller is using the analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then a pop-up should provide guidance on how to interpret the metrics and access further resources.

Community Insight Ratings

Community Insight Ratings enables users to rate and review shared insights from fellow retailers. By providing feedback on the usefulness and applicability of shared information, this feature helps elevate quality content and encourages contributors to generate more valuable insights. This peer-review system fosters trust and reliability within the community, ensuring users can confidently leverage shared knowledge for their own inventory strategies.

Requirements

User Rating Submission

"As a retailer, I want to be able to rate and review insights shared by others so that I can contribute to the community and help others find valuable information that works for them."

Description

The User Rating Submission requirement enables users to easily submit ratings and reviews for shared insights. Users should have the ability to rate content on a scale (e.g., 1 to 5 stars) and provide textual feedback on their experience with the insight. This functionality fosters an engaging community environment, encouraging users to contribute constructively. It should integrate seamlessly with the existing community platform, ensuring that submitted ratings are stored in the database and reflect updated averages in real-time. Enhanced user contributions lead to improved content quality and community trust.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses a shared insight page within the RetailRevolution platform and sees the option to submit a rating and review for the insight.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to a shared insight page, then they should see the rating section allowing them to select a star rating and enter textual feedback.

User submits a rating and review for a shared insight after selecting a star rating and entering their feedback.

Given the user has selected a rating and entered feedback, when they click the submit button, then their rating and review should be successfully saved in the database and reflect updated averages immediately.

User submits a rating but does not enter any textual feedback before trying to submit.

Given the user selects a star rating but leaves the feedback text box empty, when they attempt to submit, then an error message should be displayed indicating that feedback is required before submission.

User views the average rating and reviews for a shared insight after new ratings have been submitted by other users.

Given that multiple users have submitted ratings and reviews, when the user views the shared insight page, then the average rating should display accurately alongside the individual reviews.

User attempts to submit a rating after the community insight's closed period for reviews.

Given the review period for the community insight has ended, when the user attempts to submit a rating, then they should receive a notification stating that the review period has closed and submissions are no longer accepted.

User views their own submitted ratings and reviews for the insights they have contributed to.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to their profile page, then they should see a section displaying all insights they have rated along with their corresponding feedback.

User evaluates if the submitted rating is accurately reflected in the community insight's overall score.

Given the user has just submitted a rating, when they refresh the shared insight page, then the overall average rating should reflect the new rating accurately.

Insight Rating Display

"As a user, I want to see ratings and reviews for insights so that I can quickly assess which information is most useful and relevant to my needs."

Description

The Insight Rating Display requirement focuses on presenting user ratings and reviews in a clear and user-friendly manner. This display will showcase the average rating, number of reviews, and recent comments from users for each insight. The design should ensure that the ratings are visually striking, encouraging more users to engage with the content. It must also be optimized for viewing on multiple devices, ensuring accessibility whether users are on desktop or mobile. A well-displayed rating system enhances content discoverability and aids users in making informed decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Average Ratings for Insights

Given a user viewing a shared insight, when the insight is opened, then the average rating must be displayed prominently at the top of the page, using a visually striking format such as stars or numerical value.

Number of Reviews Visibility

Given a user looking at an insight rating, when the insight is displayed, then the number of reviews must be clearly shown next to the average rating to inform user engagement level.

Comment Moderation System

"As a moderator, I want to manage user comments on insights so that I can ensure a safe and constructive discussion environment for all users."

Description

The Comment Moderation System is required to manage and oversee the quality of textual feedback submitted by users. This system should allow moderators to review, approve, or flag comments that are inappropriate, ensuring a trustworthy and respectful community environment. Additionally, automated filtering mechanisms can be integrated to catch spam or offensive content before it reaches users. By maintaining high-quality interactions, this requirement will enhance user engagement, fostering a positive user experience within the community.

Acceptance Criteria

Comment Moderation: Reviewing User Feedback for Appropriateness

Given a moderator accesses the comment moderation dashboard, when they view a list of user comments, then they should be able to approve, reject, or flag comments based on established community guidelines.

Automated Filtering of Offensive Content

Given the Comment Moderation System is online, when a user submits a comment containing predefined offensive keywords, then the system should automatically filter out or flag that comment before it is visible to other users.

User Notification for Flagged Comments

Given a comment has been flagged by a moderator, when the moderator takes action on the flag, then the user who submitted the comment should receive a notification stating whether their comment was approved or rejected, with reasons for the decision.

Statistics on Moderation Actions

Given that moderators have performed moderation actions over a period, when the moderator views the moderation report, then they should see statistics including the total number of comments reviewed, approved, flagged, and rejected with timestamps.

Escalation Process for Unresolved Comments

Given a comment has been flagged for review but is unresolved within a set time frame, when the moderator accesses the report, then the system should escalate the comment for further review by a senior moderator.

User Feedback on Moderation Decisions

Given a user receives a moderation decision on their comment, when they view the notification, then the user should have the option to provide feedback on the moderation process regarding its clarity and fairness.

Search Functionality for Comments in Moderation

Given that moderators are reviewing comments, when they input keywords into the search feature of the moderation dashboard, then the system should return relevant comments that match the search criteria, allowing efficient review.

Insight Reporting and Analytics

"As a user, I want to view analytics on the insights I have shared so that I can understand how well my contributions are being received by the community."

Description

The Insight Reporting and Analytics feature will provide users with key metrics regarding engagement levels for shared insights. This includes data such as the total number of ratings, average rating, comment frequency, and user engagement trends. This information will be crucial for users to understand what types of insights are resonating with the community, allowing them to make informed decisions about the content they share. The analytics should be presented in an intuitive dashboard format, facilitating easy access to important metrics over time.

Acceptance Criteria

View Engagement Metrics Dashboard for Shared Insights

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Insight Reporting and Analytics section, then they should see an engagement metrics dashboard displaying total ratings, average rating, comment frequency, and user engagement trends over the selected time frame.

Filter Engagement Data by Time Period

Given a user is on the engagement metrics dashboard, when they select a time period from the available filters, then the dashboard should refresh to display the engagement metrics corresponding to the selected time frame, including changes in total ratings, average ratings, and comment frequency.

Export Engagement Metrics Report

Given a user is viewing the engagement metrics dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then a downloadable report in CSV format containing all engagement metrics for the selected time frame should be generated and downloaded to the user's device.

Receive Notification for High Engagement Insights

Given a user subscribes to notifications for high engagement insights, when an insight reaches a predefined threshold of total ratings or comments, then the user should receive a notification via email or in-app alert indicating the high engagement status of that insight.

Display Insight Contribution Statistics

Given a user is reviewing their own contributions on the platform, when they access their profile, then they should see statistics on the total number of insights shared, average rating received, and total comments garnered for each insight.

Analyze User Engagement Trends Over Time

Given a user selects a specific insight on the dashboard, when they view the detailed engagement trends for that insight, then they should see a graphical representation of user engagement trends over time, indicating spikes or declines in engagement related to that insight.

Notification for New Insights and Reviews

"As a user, I want to receive notifications about new insights and reviews so that I can stay updated on relevant content and engage with the community effectively."

Description

The Notification for New Insights and Reviews requirement will facilitate timely updates for users regarding new insights and ratings on existing content. Users should receive notifications via email or within the application when new ratings are posted or when insights that match their interests are shared. This proactive communication enhances user engagement and encourages active participation in the community by keeping users informed of valuable new information.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives email notification for newly shared insights that match their selected interests.

Given a user has subscribed to specific insight categories, when a new insight is posted in those categories, then the user should receive an email notification within 15 minutes of the posting.

User receives in-app notifications for new reviews on existing insights they have interacted with.

Given a user has interacted with a specific insight, when a new review is added for that insight, then the user should receive an in-app notification immediately after the review is posted.

Users can manage their notification preferences effectively.

Given a user is in the notification settings section, when they select or deselect categories for notifications, then the changes should be saved and reflected immediately in their notification profile without needing to refresh the page.

Users receive a summary of recent insights and reviews weekly.

Given a user has opted in for weekly summaries, when the weekly summary is generated, then the user should receive an email containing the top 5 new insights and reviews from their selected categories every Monday at 8 AM.

Users can disable or enable notifications at any time.

Given a user is in their account settings, when they choose to disable or enable notifications, then the system should update their notification status and provide feedback confirming the change immediately.

Users see a badge indicating new insights and reviews in the application.

Given a user is logged into the application, when new insights or reviews are available, then the user should see a visible badge on the community insights page indicating the number of new items since their last visit.

Users receive instant notifications for urgent updates based on community ratings.

Given a user has selected to receive urgent notifications, when a highly rated insight is shared, then the user should receive an instant notification through their preferred notification channel (email or in-app).

Insight Contribution Rewards Program

"As a user, I want to earn rewards for contributing insights and feedback so that I feel motivated to engage more with the community and share valuable information."

Description

The Insight Contribution Rewards Program will incentivize users to actively participate by contributing valuable insights and providing ratings and reviews. Users can earn points for their contributions, which can later be redeemed for rewards such as discounts, recognition badges, or premium features. This requirement aims to foster a vibrant and active community, encouraging users to share quality content and helps maintain high levels of participation and engagement over time.

Acceptance Criteria

User participation in the Insight Contribution Rewards Program

Given a user contributes an insight and rates another insight, when the action is completed, then the user should receive points credited to their account according to the program rules.

Reward redemption process for community engagement

Given a user has accumulated enough points from contributions, when they choose to redeem points, then the system should allow them to select and successfully redeem rewards such as discounts or badges.

Visibility of points status and rewards available

Given a user accesses their profile within the platform, when they check the rewards section, then it should display the current points balance, earned rewards, and available rewards options.

Feedback submission on shared insights

Given a user reads a shared insight, when they submit feedback, then the system should confirm the submission and update the insight's ratings accordingly.

Gamification elements to enhance user engagement

Given the user engages frequently with the platform, when they reach certain milestones, then they should receive notifications of new badges or achievements unlocked.

Quality assessment of contributions in the rewards program

Given a user contributes insights, when those insights are rated by peers, then the system should calculate and update the contributor's 'quality score' based on feedback received.

Collaborative Best Practices Forum

The Collaborative Best Practices Forum is an interactive space where retailers can discuss and exchange strategies for effective inventory management. Users can pose questions, share tips, and discuss case studies on successful inventory practices. This feature promotes community engagement, allowing users to tap into a wealth of collective experiences that can help them refine their operations and overcome common challenges.

Requirements

User Registration and Profiles

"As a retailer, I want to register for a user account so that I can participate in discussions and benefit from the community’s collective knowledge."

Description

The User Registration and Profiles requirement enables retailers to create individual user accounts within the Collaborative Best Practices Forum. Users will provide necessary details such as name, email, and business information. This feature promotes personalization and allows users to maintain a profile where they can track their contributions, questions, and received answers. This functionality enhances community engagement and helps foster an interactive learning environment, allowing users to build reputations based on their activity and expertise. By having a personalized experience, users are more likely to participate actively in discussions, contributing to a richer repository of shared knowledge.

Acceptance Criteria

User Registration Process for Collaborative Best Practices Forum

Given a user navigates to the registration page, when they enter a valid name, email, and business information then they should receive a confirmation message that their account has been successfully created.

Profile Completion for Enhanced User Experience

Given a user has created an account, when they log in and navigate to their profile page, then they should be prompted to complete additional profile information such as profile picture and bio to enhance their community engagement.

Tracking Contributions and Interactions

Given a user is logged in to their account, when they post a question or answer on the forum, then their contributions should be visible on their profile with a timestamp and a count of total contributions.

Retrieving Lost Password

Given a user forgets their password, when they click on 'Forgot Password' and enter their registered email, then they should receive an email with instructions to reset their password.

User Deactivation Option

Given a user wants to deactivate their account, when they navigate to account settings and choose 'Deactivate Account', then their account should be deactivated and they should receive a confirmation message.

Email Verification for New Accounts

Given a user completes the registration process, when they check their email, then they should receive a verification link that, when clicked, confirms their email address and activates their account.

Discussion Threads and Notifications

"As a user, I want to create discussion threads so that I can engage with other retailers and gain insights from their experiences regarding inventory practices."

Description

The Discussion Threads and Notifications requirement allows users to initiate and participate in discussion threads on specific inventory management topics. Each thread will enable users to ask questions, share tips, or post findings. Additionally, this requirement includes notification settings, enabling users to receive alerts for replies or activities on their threads and followed discussions. This functionality keeps users engaged and ensures they stay updated on relevant conversations, fostering a more interactive and collaborative environment. By having structured discussions, users can easily track insights and advice while encouraging community participation.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a discussion thread on inventory optimization techniques.

Given a user is logged into the Collaborative Best Practices Forum, when they create a new thread with a title and content, then the thread should be visible to all users in the designated category immediately.

User receives notifications for replies on threads they participate in.

Given a user has posted in a discussion thread, when another user replies to that thread, then the original poster should receive a notification alerting them of the new reply within five minutes.

User follows a discussion thread for ongoing updates.

Given a user chooses to follow a discussion thread, when there are any new replies or activities, then the user should receive a summary notification via email and in-app alert when applicable.

User shares tips in a discussion thread about managing stock levels.

Given a user posts a tip in an existing thread, when the tip includes actionable insights and is relevant to the topic, then it should be marked as a 'Featured Tip' by a moderator after review.

User searches for specific discussion threads using keywords.

Given a user enters a keyword in the search bar, when they initiate the search, then the system should return relevant discussion threads that include the keyword in the title or content, ordered by most recent activity.

User views the list of all threads in a particular category.

Given a user navigates to a specific category in the forum, when they access the category page, then they should see a list of all active discussion threads with the number of replies and date last active clearly displayed.

User edits their own discussion thread after posting.

Given a user who is the creator of a discussion thread, when they select the edit option, then they should be able to modify the title and content of the thread and save the changes, which should update immediately for all users to see.

Resource Library and Case Studies

"As a retailer, I want access to a resource library so that I can study successful inventory management practices and apply them to improve my operations."

Description

The Resource Library and Case Studies requirement provides users with access to a centralized repository of valuable resources, including articles, videos, and documented case studies on successful inventory management practices. This feature will allow users to search for and categorize resources based on specific inventory challenges or topics of interest. By having curated content available, users can learn from real-world examples and best practices, enhancing their understanding and application of effective inventory management. This comprehensive resource library enables users to refine their strategies while promoting continuous learning within the community.

Acceptance Criteria

User access to the Resource Library and Case Studies for the first time.

Given a registered user logs into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the Resource Library, then they should see a categorized list of resources displayed on the page.

Searching for resources in the Resource Library based on a specific inventory challenge.

Given a user is on the Resource Library page, when they enter a keyword related to an inventory challenge into the search bar, then they should see a filtered list of resources that match the keyword search.

Viewing and accessing a case study in the Resource Library.

Given a user is browsing the Resource Library, when they select a specific case study, then they should be directed to a detailed view that includes the case study content, author information, and related resources.

Categorizing resources within the Resource Library.

Given an admin user accesses the Resource Library, when they select a resource and choose to edit it, then they should have the option to assign or change the category of that resource from a predefined list of categories.

Collecting user feedback on resources in the Resource Library.

Given a user has accessed a resource, when they choose to provide feedback, then they should be able to submit a rating (1-5 stars) and an optional comment, which is then stored in the system for review.

Accessibility of resources across devices in the Resource Library.

Given a user accesses the Resource Library from a mobile device, when they view any resource, then the resource content should be fully accessible and formatted correctly for the mobile screen.

Updating the Resource Library with new content regularly.

Given the platform administrator has new resources to add, when they upload the new content to the Resource Library, then the new resources should be visible in the library within 24 hours of submission.

Upvote and Feedback System

"As a user, I want to upvote helpful answers in discussions so that I can signal which information is most valuable to the community."

Description

The Upvote and Feedback System requirement introduces a mechanism for users to upvote helpful answers and provide feedback on shared tips or strategies. This feature will encourage quality contributions and help highlight the most effective solutions within the forum. Users can recognize posts that significantly address their queries or add value to discussions, thus promoting a culture of gratitude and recognition. The system will improve content visibility and help users navigate to the most beneficial insights promptly, enhancing overall community utility and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits an upvote on a helpful response in the Collaborative Best Practices Forum.

Given a user is logged in and has navigated to a post, when they click the upvote button, then the upvote count for that post should increase by one and the user should see a confirmation message indicating their vote has been recorded.

User provides feedback on a post in the forum.

Given a user is logged in and has read a post, when they enter feedback in the feedback text box and submit it, then their feedback should be displayed under the post and the user should receive a notification indicating their feedback was successfully submitted.

User views a list of posts sorted by upvotes.

Given a user is on the forum homepage, when they filter the post list by highest upvotes, then the posts should be displayed in descending order based on the upvote count, showing the most popular posts first.

System prevents users from upvoting the same post multiple times.

Given a user has already upvoted a post, when they attempt to upvote the same post again, then the system should not allow the upvote and should display a message indicating that they have already voted for this post.

User wants to see the top-rated posts in the forum.

Given a user is in the Collaborative Best Practices Forum, when they select the option to view top-rated posts, then the system should display a list of posts that have received the highest number of upvotes within the last 30 days.

Users respond to feedback left on their posts.

Given a user has received feedback on their post, when they view their own post, then they should see the feedback listed along with an option to reply, and upon replying, their response should appear under the initial feedback without any errors.

Moderation and Community Guidelines

"As a forum member, I want to understand the community guidelines so that I can engage respectfully and adhere to the expected standards of participation."

Description

The Moderation and Community Guidelines requirement ensures that the discussions within the Collaborative Best Practices Forum remain respectful and productive. This feature involves the establishment of clear community guidelines and the designation of moderators who can facilitate discussions, manage conflicts, and uphold the standards of participation. These guidelines will outline acceptable behavior, content boundaries, and provide mechanisms for reporting inappropriate posts. By maintaining a positive forum atmosphere, users can comfortably engage and contribute, leading to a healthy, vibrant community focused on shared learning.

Acceptance Criteria

Clear Community Guidelines are Established and Accessible to All Users

Given that a user visits the Collaborative Best Practices Forum, when they navigate to the Community Guidelines section, then they should be able to view a clearly written document outlining acceptable behavior and posting standards in an easily accessible format.

Moderators are Designated and Trained for Forum Management

Given that the Collaborative Best Practices Forum is active, when a moderator logs into the forum, then they should have access to tools for managing discussions and enforcing community guidelines effectively, supported by a training manual outlining their responsibilities and powers.

Reporting Mechanism for Inappropriate Content is Functional

Given that a user comes across an inappropriate post, when they click on the 'Report' button next to the post, then the user should be able to complete a simple reporting form, and the report should be logged in the moderation dashboard for follow-up action.

User Engagement in Forum Discussions is Measured

Given that the forum is live, when users contribute posts or comments, then the platform should track the number of posts, comments, and users participating each week, providing reports that show engagement levels over time.

Guidelines for Conflict Management are Established and Available

Given that a user participates in discussions, when they refer to the Community Guidelines, then they should find specific sections dedicated to conflict resolution, outlining processes for addressing disputes between members.

Feedback Mechanism for Community Guidelines is Implemented

Given that users have read the Community Guidelines, when they provide feedback on clarity or content, then their feedback should be collected for review by the moderators to improve guidelines in future iterations.

Regular Review of Community Guidelines is Scheduled

Given that the community actively engages in discussions, when a set interval (e.g., every 6 months) is reached, then the community guidelines should be reviewed and updated based on user feedback and emerging best practices.

Analytics and Engagement Metrics

"As a forum administrator, I want to view engagement metrics so that I can analyze user activity and enhance community participation effectively."

Description

The Analytics and Engagement Metrics requirement involves implementing tracking features to measure user engagement within the forum. This includes data on active users, popular discussion topics, and the effectiveness of shared resources. Administrators will utilize these insights for future enhancements and to better serve user needs by tailoring content and discussions based on trends. By having access to engagement metrics, the team can evaluate the forum's performance, leading to data-driven decisions to improve user experience and community growth.

Acceptance Criteria

User views topic engagement metrics for the Collaborative Best Practices Forum.

Given a user is logged into the forum, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary of active users, most popular discussion topics, and top shared resources over the past month.

Admin reviews overall user engagement trends to evaluate forum performance.

Given an admin has access to engagement metrics, when they generate a report, then the report should include data on active users, time spent on discussions, and the frequency of resource sharing.

User searches for popular inventory management topics in the forum.

Given a user is on the forum home page, when they enter a keyword related to inventory management in the search bar, then they should receive results that highlight the most discussed topics from the past month.

Admin identifies key areas for forum improvement based on user feedback.

Given the admin has access to user engagement metrics, when they analyze the data, then they should be able to identify at least three areas for improvement based on low engagement topics.

User receives notifications about new discussions in popular topics.

Given a user has opted in for notifications, when a new discussion is started in a popular topic, then the user should receive a notification via email and in-app alert.

Admin sets up periodic engagement metric reviews for ongoing evaluation.

Given the admin wants to ensure continuous improvement, when they create a review schedule, then it should include quarterly assessments of engagement metrics and follow-up actions.

Customizable Insight Alerts

Customizable Insight Alerts notify users of new insights, trends, or reports that match their specified interests or business needs. Users can set preferences based on product categories, seasonal trends, or geographic regions to receive tailored information that directly impacts their inventory management practices. This proactive approach ensures users stay informed and can quickly adapt to changing market conditions.

Requirements

User Preference Management

"As a retail manager, I want to personalize my alert preferences for insights and trends so that I can receive notifications tailored to my business context and improve my inventory management decisions."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with the capability to manage their preferences for Customizable Insight Alerts easily. Users should be able to select product categories, trends, or regions that align with their business focus. The feature will allow for dynamic updates and modifications to user preferences, ensuring that they receive only the most relevant alerts, thus enhancing user engagement and satisfaction. The effective implementation of this requirement will ensure that the alerts system is tailored to individual user needs, minimizing irrelevant notifications and maximizing actionable insights.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to customize my insight alerts based on product categories so that I receive notifications only about the products that matter to my business.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the 'Preferences' section, then they can select or deselect product categories and save their preferences successfully.

As a retail owner, I want to adjust my insight alerts to receive information about seasonal trends relevant to my business to help in planning inventory effectively.

Given the user has access to the 'Insight Alerts' settings page, when they choose specific seasonal trends and confirm their selections, then the system updates their preferences and confirms the changes with a success message.

As a user of RetailRevolution, I want to be notified of insights relevant to my store’s geographic region, ensuring that I stay informed about local market trends.

Given the user has configured their geographic preferences in the insight alerts settings, when new insights are generated related to their specified regions, then they should receive alerts in their notification center promptly.

As a retail manager, I want to receive alerts in my email about new insights that are tailored to my preferences, helping me stay updated without logging into the platform.

Given the user has opted to receive email notifications for alerts, when new insights matching their preferences are generated, then an email notification should be sent to the user's registered email address with relevant information.

As a store manager, I want the ability to modify my preferences anytime so that I can adapt to changing business needs quickly.

Given the user is on the 'Preferences' settings page, when they alter their preferences and save the changes, then the system should reflect the new preferences accurately and notify the user of a successful update.

As a user who uses multiple devices, I want my insight alert preferences to sync across all devices so I can manage my alerts seamlessly regardless of where I log in.

Given the user has updated their preferences on one device, when they log into their account on another device, then the updated preferences should be reflected in the alert settings without discrepancies.

As a business analyst, I want to analyze the effectiveness of the customizable insight alerts based on user engagement metrics to improve the feature continuously.

Given the customizable insight alerts are active, when metrics such as open rates and click-through rates are collected, then the system should be able to generate a report summarizing user engagement to guide future improvements.

Real-time Alert Notification System

"As a shop owner, I want to receive real-time notifications about new trends and insights so that I can respond quickly to changes and optimize my inventory accordingly."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for a real-time notification system that delivers Customizable Insight Alerts as soon as relevant information becomes available. The system needs to integrate seamlessly with the existing cloud-based platform to ensure that users are promptly informed about important changes or insights that match their set preferences. Real-time notifications will enhance users' responsiveness to market trends and inventory needs, allowing for quicker strategic adjustments and decisions. This will require designing an efficient messaging system that supports immediate delivery across all user devices.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets preferences for receiving alerts on seasonal trends and is awaiting notifications as the season changes.

Given the user has set seasonal trend preferences, when a relevant trend report is available, then the user should receive a notification within 5 minutes of the report being generated.

User has selected multiple product categories for which they want notifications concerning new insights.

Given the user has selected product categories, when new insights are generated for those categories, then the user should receive an alert that includes the title and brief summary of each insight.

User modifies their alert settings to include geographic region preferences while logged into the platform.

Given the user has modified their geographic region preferences, when new insights related to that region become available, then the user should receive a notification within 10 minutes regarding the new insights.

A user logs in to the RetailRevolution platform after setting up their Customizable Insight Alerts.

Given the user has set up Customizable Insight Alerts, when the user logs into the platform, then they should see all pending notifications on their dashboard summarizing the insights available since their last login.

User experiences a critical stockout event and needs immediate insights to manage inventory response.

Given a stockout event occurs, when relevant inventory insights and alerts are generated, then the user should receive a push notification on all devices registered under their account within 3 minutes of the event.

User wants to validate the effectiveness of the alert notifications they receive in responding to inventory changes.

Given the user has received alert notifications for specific inventory changes, when those changes occur, then the user should be able to confirm that each alert corresponds to an actual inventory change within a specified timeframe (e.g., 24 hours).

User has set specific preferences for different store locations and expects to receive alerts tailored to these locations.

Given the user has set location-specific alert preferences, when insights related to those locations arise, then the user should receive alerts that are clearly labeled with the respective store location.

Insight Data Visualization

"As a data analyst, I want to visualize the trends and insights from my alerts so that I can easily interpret the data and make better-informed decisions regarding inventory management."

Description

This requirement entails developing an interactive data visualization interface that allows users to view their alerts in a clear and meaningful way. Users should be able to explore the insights and trends identified by the alerts through visual representations, such as graphs and charts, which will provide a better understanding of data and facilitate data-driven decision-making. The implementation of this feature is crucial for transforming raw data into actionable insights and enhancing user comprehension of their inventory dynamics.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Alerts via Data Visualization Interface

Given the user has set up their customizable insight alerts, when they log into the RetailRevolution platform, then they should see a dashboard displaying all active alerts in a visually appealing format, such as charts and graphs.

Filtering Insights Based on Preferences

Given that the user has selected specific product categories and geographic regions for alert notifications, when they view the data visualization interface, then all insights should be filtered according to the user’s preferences, showing only relevant trends and reports.

Interacting with Visual Data Representations

Given the user is viewing a graph representing inventory trends, when they hover over data points, then a tooltip should display detailed information about that specific data point, including exact figures and periods.

Exporting Data Visualizations

Given the user has analyzed the insights in the data visualization interface, when they select the export option, then they should be able to download the visualization in multiple formats (e.g., PDF, CSV, PNG).

Real-Time Updates of Insights

Given that new insights or trends have been identified which meet the user's alert criteria, when the data visualization interface is active, then the user should see these updates reflected in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

Accessing Visualization from Multiple Devices

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform from different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), when they navigate to the data visualization interface, then they should have a consistent experience with all visualizations properly displayed across all devices.

User Feedback on Visualizations

Given the user is viewing visual representations of their alerts, when they click on a feedback button, then they should be prompted to provide feedback on the visualizations, and their responses should be saved for future analysis.

Alert History and Analytics

"As a retail strategist, I want to access my alert history and analytics so that I can evaluate past notifications and refine my inventory strategy for better outcomes."

Description

This requirement specifies the need to retain a history of all Customizable Insight Alerts received by the user. This feature will allow users to review past alerts, analyze the data and trends over time, and gain insights into the effectiveness of their inventory strategies. By providing analytics on past alerts, users will be able to identify patterns and refine their preferences to improve future alert usefulness. This historical data will serve as a valuable tool for performance assessment and inventory planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews the alert history after a seasonal promotion to analyze the effectiveness of their inventory strategy.

Given the user accesses the alert history, when they select a specific time frame for the seasonal promotion, then they should see all relevant alerts received during that period, including product categories and insights.

User sets preferences for customized alerts based on geographic regions and receives notifications of relevant alerts over time.

Given the user has set preferences for geographic regions, when alerts are generated, then the user should only receive notifications related to their specified regions, and all alerts should be stored in the alert history.

User examines the analytical data on past alerts to identify trends in inventory management.

Given the user accesses the analytics dashboard, when they review the historical alert data, then they should see visual graphs depicting trends over time and insights on the effectiveness of past alerts.

User refines their alert preferences after reviewing past alerts and analyzing their effectiveness.

Given the user has accessed their alert history and analytics, when they update their preferences based on identified gaps, then those preferences should be saved and reflected in the next alert cycle.

User attempts to search the alert history using different filters to find specific alerts.

Given the user accesses the alert history, when they apply filters such as date range, product category, or alert type, then only alerts matching the filters should be displayed on the screen.

User receives an alert for a new trend that matches their established preferences.

Given the user has set specific alert criteria, when a new relevant trend arises, then the user should receive an immediate notification, which is also logged in their alert history.

User completes a performance assessment meeting using insights derived from alert history and analytics.

Given the user has compiled information from the alert history and analytics, when they present their findings, then the information must clearly demonstrate how past alerts influenced inventory decisions and highlight areas for improvement.

Multi-Channel Alert Delivery

"As a busy retailer, I want to receive my alerts through various channels like email and SMS so that I can stay updated on important insights even when I'm not logged into the app."

Description

This requirement encompasses the capability to deliver Customizable Insight Alerts through multiple channels, including email, SMS, and in-app notifications. Users should have the flexibility to choose their preferred method of receiving alerts to ensure that they stay informed at all times, regardless of their location or device. By implementing a multi-channel delivery system, the platform will enhance user engagement and ensure critical insights reach users promptly, increasing the likelihood of timely action based on alerts.

Acceptance Criteria

User Configuration of Alert Preferences

Given a user has access to the Customizable Insight Alerts feature, when they navigate to the alert preferences section, then they can select their preferred channels (email, SMS, in-app notifications) and set specific preferences for product categories and regions, and save these preferences successfully.

Receiving Alerts via Email

Given a user has set their alert preference to receive insights via email, when a relevant insight is generated, then the user receives an email notification containing the necessary information within 5 minutes of the insight being triggered.

Receiving Alerts through SMS

Given a user has opted to receive alerts via SMS, when a new trend or report is available, then the user receives an SMS message with a summary of the alert and a link to access more details within 5 minutes of the alert being generated.

Receiving In-App Notifications

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform and has selected in-app notifications for alerts, when new insights matching their preferences are generated, then they should receive an in-app notification that is prominently displayed on their dashboard.

Managing Alert Preferences

Given a user has registered preference settings for Customizable Insight Alerts, when the user decides to change these settings, then they should be able to update their preferred channels and categories, and these changes should reflect immediately upon saving.

Alert Delivery Timeout Handling

Given an alert is generated but fails to be delivered through the user's first preferred channel, when the system attempts delivery via the next preferred channel, then the user receives the alert without exceeding a total delivery time of 10 minutes from the original alert generation.

Testing Alert Delivery Across Channels

Given a user has set different channels for receiving alerts, when a test alert is triggered, then the user will receive notifications across all chosen channels to ensure consistent delivery within the designated timeframes.

Data Collaboration Tools

Data Collaboration Tools facilitate the sharing of performance metrics and inventory data among retailers within the platform. Retailers can team up to analyze shared data sets, identify industry trends, and co-create strategic insights. This feature encourages collaborative problem-solving and enables collective intelligence to drive better inventory management practices.

Requirements

Real-Time Data Sync

"As a retailer, I want to see real-time updates on shared inventory data so that I can collaborate effectively with my partners and make informed decisions based on the latest information."

Description

The Real-Time Data Sync requirement ensures that any changes made to inventory data or performance metrics by one retailer are instantly reflected across all collaborating partners on the platform. This functionality minimizes data discrepancies and promotes accurate, up-to-date insights for all users involved. The feature will not only enhance trust among retailers but also enable timely decision-making based on the most current data trends and metrics. It will seamlessly integrate with RetailRevolution’s existing database infrastructure, fostering a synchronized data environment that benefits all users by providing consistent information across the board.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time synchronization of inventory updates across collaborating retailers when a product is sold out.

Given a retailer X sells the last item of a shared product, when the inventory is updated, then all collaborating partners must see the updated stock level as '0' within 5 seconds.

Data synchronization reflecting changes in inventory quantities for collaborative analysis.

Given that retailer Y increases their stock quantity of a shared product, when the update is made, then all other retailers must see the new quantity accurately reflected in their dashboards within 10 seconds.

Adjustment of performance metrics affecting inventory shared among partners.

Given that retailer Z adjusts their performance metric settings related to a shared product, when the changes are saved, then all collaborating partners should see the updated metrics within 10 seconds.

Notification system for real-time data sync updates among retailers.

Given that a data sync occurs, when the sync is complete, then all relevant stakeholders must receive a notification confirming the successful update and reflecting the new data changes within 5 seconds.

Verification of absence of data discrepancies after inventory updates.

Given multiple retailers are collaborating, when any retailer makes an inventory update, then all partners must have matching inventory data showing the same values with no discrepancies within 5 seconds post-sync.

Testing for integration with existing database infrastructure for real-time syncing.

Given the current database environment, when a real-time inventory change is made, then the data must be reflected accurately across all collaborating partners' systems without data loss or corruption.

End-user experience after real-time data sync implementation.

Given that the real-time sync functionality is implemented, when a retailer accesses their dashboard, then they should see the most current and accurate inventory data reflecting any recent updates made by collaborators.

Shared Analytics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to access a shared analytics dashboard so that I can analyze collective data and gain insights into industry trends that can improve my inventory management."

Description

The Shared Analytics Dashboard requirement provides a centralized, user-friendly interface where retailers can access aggregated performance metrics and inventory trends derived from collaborative data sharing. This dashboard will allow retailers to visualize key indicators, compare their metrics against industry benchmarks, and identify performance gaps. This feature not only enhances transparency but also promotes strategic discussions among retailers to improve collective inventory management practices. By leveraging historical and predictive analytics, this dashboard will empower retailers to make data-driven decisions tailored to their business needs.

Acceptance Criteria

User Access and Permissions Management for Shared Analytics Dashboard

Given a retailer is logged into RetailRevolution, when they access the Shared Analytics Dashboard, then they should only see data and metrics that they have permission to view and share with specific retail partners.

Real-time Data Visualization in Shared Analytics Dashboard

Given that data has been shared among retailers, when a retailer views the Shared Analytics Dashboard, then they should see real-time visualizations of key performance metrics and inventory trends that update without requiring a page refresh.

Historical Data Comparison on the Shared Analytics Dashboard

Given a retailer accesses the Shared Analytics Dashboard, when they select a time period for comparison, then they should be able to visualize and analyze their performance metrics against aggregated historical data from peer retailers during that same time period.

Industry Benchmarking Feature in Shared Analytics Dashboard

Given that a retailer is using the Shared Analytics Dashboard, when they select the benchmarking feature, then they should be able to compare their performance metrics against industry-standard benchmarks provided by RetailRevolution for similar business types.

Predictive Analytics Insights on the Shared Analytics Dashboard

Given that the Shared Analytics Dashboard is accessed, when retailers view the predictive analytics section, then they should see forecasts regarding inventory trends and performance metrics based on historical data and collaboration inputs.

User Feedback Loop for Shared Analytics Dashboard Improvements

Given the dashboard is being used by multiple retailers, when they provide feedback through the designated survey feature, then the feedback should be collected and analyzed for potential improvements to the dashboard's features and usability.

Export Options for Shared Analytics Dashboard Data

Given a retailer wants to analyze their data further, when they access the Shared Analytics Dashboard, then they should have the option to export the data visualizations and metrics in multiple formats (e.g., CSV, PDF) for external use.

Collaborative Insights Reports

"As a retailer, I want to generate and discuss collaborative insights reports with my partners so that we can identify trends and challenges together and improve our overall inventory management strategies."

Description

The Collaborative Insights Reports requirement enables retailers to create, share, and discuss detailed reports based on the analysis of shared inventory and sales data. This feature facilitates joint problem-solving by allowing users to identify common challenges and brainstorm solutions based on collaborative evidence, trends, and data insights. The reports will include customizable metrics and visualizations, enabling each retailer to focus on elements pertinent to their needs while still fostering collective intelligence. This will enhance the ability to forecast trends, optimize inventory levels, and make strategic decisions together.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to create a collaborative insights report based on shared inventory and sales data during a quarterly review meeting.

Given that retailers have access to shared inventory and sales data, when they initiate the creation of a collaborative insights report, then they should be able to select metrics and visualizations relevant to their analysis and generate a report successfully.

A group of retailers is analyzing common challenges in their inventory levels and wants to brainstorm solutions using the insights from the collaborative report.

Given that a collaborative insights report has been generated, when the group of retailers accesses the report for discussion, then they should be able to comment on each section and propose actionable solutions based on data collected.

An individual retailer needs to customize the metrics displayed in the collaborative insights report to better fit their specific business needs.

Given that the retailer is viewing the collaborative insights report, when they adjust the customization settings for the metrics and visualizations, then the report should update in real time to reflect these changes without errors.

Retailers want to download the collaborative insights report for offline analysis and presentations.

Given that a collaborative insights report is completed, when the retailer selects the option to download the report, then the system should provide an option to download in multiple formats (PDF, Excel, etc.) successfully.

Retailers want to identify trends over time using the shared data from the collaborative insights report during their strategic planning sessions.

Given that the retailers are using the collaborative insights report, when they navigate to trend analysis features, then they should be able to view graphical representations of trends over a specified period and export this data for further use.

Retailers wish to share the collaborative insights report with external partners for feedback.

Given that a collaborative insights report has been finalized, when the retailer opts to share the report through email, then the designated recipients should receive a functional link to access the report without any data breaches.

The platform needs to ensure that only authorized retailers can access the collaborative insights reports created by their peers.

Given that a collaborative insights report has been generated, when an unauthorized user attempts to access the report, then they should receive an access denied message and not be able to view the report.

Role-Based Access Control

"As an administrator, I want to control access to specific data sets and reports so that I can ensure data security and appropriate sharing among retail partners."

Description

The Role-Based Access Control requirement establishes different user roles within the collaborative environment, allowing administrators to manage access levels to sensitive data and analytics based on user responsibilities. This functionality is essential for maintaining data security and ensuring that only authorized personnel can access specific insights and reports. By defining clear roles such as administrator, analyst, and viewer, this feature promotes collaborative efforts while safeguarding essential information. It enhances trust and compliance among retailers using the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Assignment for Data Collaboration Tools

Given an administrator has logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the role management section, then they should be able to create, edit, or delete user roles with specified access levels for data collaboration tools.

Access Control for Analysts in Data Collaboration

Given an analyst user role is defined in the RetailRevolution system, when an analyst attempts to access performance metrics and inventory data, then they should only see data that is relevant to their assigned role without seeing sensitive information meant for administrators.

View-only Access for Users

Given a viewer user role is assigned within RetailRevolution, when a viewer attempts to access shared inventory data, then they should be able to view the information but not modify or share it further, ensuring data integrity.

Audit Trail for Role-Based Access

Given the role-based access has been set up, when any user accesses or attempts to modify sensitive data, then an audit trail should be created to log the user's actions, including timestamps and role details for compliance purposes.

Role Management Efficiency

Given multiple user roles exist in the RetailRevolution platform, when an administrator manages roles and permissions, then the process should take no more than five minutes for basic role updates, ensuring efficient user management.

Dynamic Role Adaptation

Given a user’s responsibilities change, when an administrator updates their role accordingly, then the user should immediately see the data and reports that align with their new role without delay.

Role-Based Access Testing

Given various user roles in the RetailRevolution platform, when a user in each role attempts to access different data sets, then each user should only be able to access data permitted by their assigned role passively through user testing.

Feedback Mechanism for Data Collaboration

"As a retailer, I want to provide feedback on the data collaboration tools so that I can influence improvements and ensure the platform meets my collaborative needs effectively."

Description

The Feedback Mechanism for Data Collaboration requirement incorporates a structured process for retailers to provide input on the effectiveness of shared data initiatives. This feature allows users to suggest improvements, report inaccuracies, and share experiences concerning collaborative tools and insights. By facilitating open communication, this requirement enhances the overall quality of data collaboration, ensuring continuous improvement of the shared environment. The feedback collected will be analyzed regularly to inform future feature updates and enhancements, promoting a user-driven development approach.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Submission Process for Collaborative Tools

Given a retailer accesses the Feedback Mechanism, when they submit feedback regarding shared data initiatives, then the feedback should be successfully recorded and acknowledged by the system.

Reporting Inaccuracies within Shared Data Sets

Given a retailer identifies an inaccuracy in shared data, when they report the issue through the Feedback Mechanism, then the report should create a ticket for review within the admin system and notify related parties.

Collecting User Experiences on Data Collaboration

Given multiple retailers have interacted with the Data Collaboration Tools, when they provide their experiences via the Feedback Mechanism, then the system should aggregate the feedback for analysis and generate a summary report.

Regular Review of Feedback for Continuous Improvement

Given feedback has been collected over a specified period, when the review is conducted by the development team, then the findings should inform at least three enhancements to the Data Collaboration Tools feature.

User Notification of Feedback Implementation

Given feedback has been implemented, when the retailer logs into the system, then they should receive a notification of changes made and their connection to the submitted feedback.

Accessibility of Feedback Mechanism on Various Devices

Given a retailer is accessing RetailRevolution on a mobile device, when they navigate to the Feedback Mechanism, then the interface should be fully functional and user-friendly, mirroring the desktop experience.

Impact Assessment of Feedback on User Satisfaction

Given feedback has been collected and addressed, when a satisfaction survey is distributed to users, then at least 70% of respondents should indicate improved satisfaction with the Data Collaboration Tools.

Sentiment Analysis Engine

The Sentiment Analysis Engine utilizes advanced natural language processing algorithms to evaluate customer reviews and comments, categorizing sentiment as positive, negative, or neutral. This feature provides retailers with insights into customer perceptions of their products, enabling them to identify strengths and weaknesses in their inventory. By understanding customer sentiment, retailers can make informed decisions about product selection and marketing strategies, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Requirements

Real-time Sentiment Monitoring

"As a retailer, I want to monitor customer sentiment in real-time so that I can quickly address any negative feedback and improve my product offerings accordingly."

Description

The Real-time Sentiment Monitoring requirement enables the Sentiment Analysis Engine to process customer reviews and comments in real-time. This functionality allows retailers to receive immediate feedback on customer perceptions, helping them to identify trending opinions about their products as they occur. Implementing this requirement will enhance the retailers' ability to respond quickly to negative sentiments, adjust marketing strategies proactively, and improve overall customer satisfaction. The integration with the existing dashboard will provide easy access to sentiment data, allowing for timely decision-making and a refined inventory approach based on live insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time updates for sentiment analysis results are displayed on the retailer's dashboard immediately after the customer review is processed.

Given a customer review is submitted, when the review is processed by the Sentiment Analysis Engine, then the dashboard should reflect updated sentiment data within 5 seconds.

Retailers are able to filter sentiment results by date range to analyze trends over time.

Given the sentiment data is available, when a retailer selects a specific date range, then the sentiment results should display only the reviews falling within that range.

The system notifies retailers of negative sentiment trends to allow for immediate action.

Given a significant increase in negative sentiment is detected, when the threshold is passed, then the retailer should receive a real-time notification through the dashboard and optionally via email.

Sentiment categories (positive, negative, neutral) are accurately displayed for easier understanding.

Given customer reviews are analyzed, when results are displayed, then each review sentiment must be correctly categorized and labeled as positive, negative, or neutral on the dashboard.

Retailers can compare sentiment data across different products to identify performance trends.

Given multiple products are being reviewed, when a retailer requests a comparative analysis, then the sentiment data for each product should be displayed side-by-side on the dashboard for easy comparison.

The Sentiment Analysis Engine allows for historical sentiment analysis to track changes in customer perception over time.

Given the historical sentiment data, when a retailer selects to view sentiment trends for the past year, then the dashboard should show a clear visual representation of sentiment changes over that period.

Sentiment Categorization Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a dashboard that categorizes customer sentiment so that I can easily understand which products need attention based on customer feedback."

Description

The Sentiment Categorization Dashboard requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface that visualizes the results of sentiment analysis. This dashboard will categorize customer sentiments into positive, negative, and neutral segments, displaying trends over time and highlighting which products are generating the most positive or negative feedback. It will provide actionable insights for inventory management and marketing strategies by allowing retailers to see patterns and make informed decisions. This requirement is critical in enabling retailers to optimize their offerings based on customer feedback and enhance customer engagement by addressing concerns identified in the analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer accesses the Sentiment Categorization Dashboard to evaluate customer feedback continuously throughout the week to adapt marketing strategies based on customer sentiment trends.

Given that the retailer is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they access the Sentiment Categorization Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of sentiment analysis categorized as positive, negative, or neutral for each product.

During a weekly review, the retailer analyzes the trends in customer sentiment over the last month to determine which products need attention for improvement.

Given that the retailer is on the Sentiment Categorization Dashboard, when they select the date range for the past month, then the dashboard should update to show trend graphs displaying the sentiment breakdown over that period.

The retailer receives an alert when a product receives a surge of negative sentiment to take immediate action.

Given that the sentiment threshold for alerts is set, when the dashboard identifies a product with negative sentiment exceeding that threshold, then the retailer should receive a notification indicating the specific product and the sentiment score.

The retailer intends to compare customer sentiment across different time periods to evaluate changes in product perception.

Given that the retailer chooses two different time ranges on the dashboard, when they submit the comparison request, then the dashboard should provide a side-by-side analysis of sentiment for the selected products over both periods.

The retailer wants to identify the top three products generating positive feedback to promote in their marketing campaigns.

Given that the retailer is viewing the Sentiment Categorization Dashboard, when they filter the products by positive sentiment, then they should see a ranked list of the top three products with the highest positive feedback scores.

Retailer needs to export the sentiment analysis report for quarterly review meetings with stakeholders.

Given that the retailer has accessed the dashboard, when they select the export feature, then the system should generate a downloadable report in a standard format (CSV, PDF) containing all sentiment data displayed on the dashboard.

Automated Reporting System

"As a retailer, I want an automated reporting system for sentiment analysis so that I can easily review trends and make data-driven decisions for my product strategy."

Description

The Automated Reporting System requirement is to develop a feature that generates regular reports summarizing customer sentiment data over selected periods. Retailers will receive insights into overall sentiment trends, key product performance, and actionable recommendations for inventory adjustments and marketing efforts. This functionality will facilitate regular performance reviews and strategic planning based on customer feedback, making it integral to the product’s goal of data-driven decision-making in retail operations. The ease of access to these reports will also help retailers keep track of customer sentiment changes moving forward.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers need to schedule a weekly report on customer sentiment that summarizes positive, negative, and neutral sentiments for all products sold during the week, to review in their Monday morning meeting.

Given the retailer has selected a weekly reporting timeframe, when the report is generated, then it should include sentiments categorized as positive, negative, and neutral, along with a total count for each category and a comparative analysis with the previous week.

A retailer wants to review customer sentiment data for a specific product over a month to assess customer feedback related to the product's recent marketing campaign.

Given the retailer has chosen a specific product for the monthly report, when the report is generated, then it should display sentiment trends for that product, including total counts of each sentiment category and actionable recommendations based on the analysis.

Retailers are preparing for a quarterly business review and need comprehensive reports on customer sentiment for all products over the last three months to identify trends in customer preferences and adjust inventory accordingly.

Given a quarterly report timeframe is selected, when the report is generated, then it should include sentiment trends over three months, a comparative analysis with previous quarters, and recommendations for inventory adjustments based on observed trends.

A retail manager is interested in customer feedback specifically for seasonal products right after the holiday season to determine if restocking is necessary.

Given the manager selects the post-holiday reporting period for seasonal products, when the report is generated, then it should include sentiment data specifically for those products, highlighting any significant changes in customer feelings and suggestions for future inventory decisions.

The system must allow a user to customize the frequency of sentiment reports based on their business needs, such as daily, weekly, or monthly.

Given the user accesses the report settings, when they choose a frequency option for report generation, then the system should save the user's preference and automatically generate reports according to that schedule.

A retailer is utilizing the sentiment analysis reports to justify reallocation of marketing resources towards products with predominantly positive sentiment.

Given the retailer accesses the sentiment report, when the report indicates a product with over 75% positive sentiment, then recommendations to increase marketing efforts for that product should be present in the report findings.

Custom Sentiment Analysis Filters

"As a retailer, I want the ability to set custom filters for sentiment analysis so that I can analyze customer perceptions according to specific categories relevant to my business."

Description

The Custom Sentiment Analysis Filters requirement allows retailers to set personalized filter parameters for sentiment analysis, enabling them to focus on specific products, regions, or customer demographics. By tailoring the analysis to relevant segments, retailers can gain deeper insights into their customer base and how different groups perceive their products. This feature will enhance the capability of the Sentiment Analysis Engine, allowing for more precise strategies based on segmented data, which is key for targeted marketing and stock management efforts. Implementing this requirement will empower retailers to respond effectively to varied customer sentiments across different segments.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to filter sentiment data by specific products to analyze how customer feelings vary across their inventory, allowing them to tailor marketing efforts for those products.

Given a retailer selects a specific product from the inventory, when they apply the custom sentiment filter, then the Sentiment Analysis Engine should display sentiment analysis results specific to that product only.

Retailers are interested in understanding customer sentiment by region to adapt their marketing strategies to local preferences and trends.

Given a retailer selects a specific region from the available options, when they apply the custom sentiment filter, then the Sentiment Analysis Engine should only show sentiment results from customers in that region.

Retailers need to segment sentiment analysis based on customer demographics such as age or purchase history to refine their targeting efforts.

Given a retailer sets demographic parameters in the custom filter, when they run sentiment analysis, then the Sentiment Analysis Engine should categorize sentiment data according to the specified demographics.

Retailers wish to combine multiple filter parameters (e.g., product and region) to gain a comprehensive view of sentiment for specific scenarios.

Given a retailer has selected multiple filter criteria, when they run the sentiment analysis, then the Sentiment Analysis Engine should aggregate and display sentiment data that meets all selected filters.

Retailers need to save custom filter settings for future analysis to streamline their workflows.

Given a retailer successfully creates a custom filter setup, when they choose to save this setup, then the system should allow them to name and save the filter for future use.

Retailers want to remove a previously saved custom filter when it is no longer needed.

Given a retailer views their list of saved custom filters, when they select a filter to delete, then the system should remove that filter from the saved list permanently.

Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool

"As a retailer, I want a tool that analyzes the impact of customer sentiment on sales so that I can understand how to adjust my inventory and marketing strategies based on customer feedback."

Description

The Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool requirement focuses on developing features that correlate customer sentiment with sales performance metrics. This tool will allow retailers to visualize and analyze how variations in customer sentiment directly impact sales figures. Implementing this tool will provide critical insights into customer behavior patterns, helping retailers understand that positive sentiment can drive sales and pointing out the products requiring immediate action when sentiment is negative. It enhances strategic planning and supports the overarching goal of aligning inventory management with customer desires and perceptions.

Acceptance Criteria

Visualization of sentiment impact on sales for a specific product after a marketing campaign.

Given a set of sales data and corresponding sentiment scores for a product, when the user accesses the Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool, then the system should display a graph showing the correlation between sentiment and sales figures over the specified period.

Analysis of customer sentiment before and after introducing a new product line.

Given customer review data before and after the product launch, when the retailer uses the Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool, then it should provide a comparative analysis visualizing sentiment changes and their corresponding impact on sales.

Real-time alerts for significant drops in customer sentiment for top-selling products.

Given the sentiment scores for top-selling products, when the sentiment score drops below a predefined threshold, then the system should trigger an alert to the retailer indicating the need for immediate action.

Integration of sentiment analysis with regular sales reporting.

Given a weekly sales report, when the user includes sentiment analysis, then the report should automatically integrate sentiment scores for each product and highlight products with negative sentiment alongside their sales metrics.

Performance evaluation of marketing strategies based on sentiment analysis.

Given data from multiple marketing campaigns, when the user applies the Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool, then the tool should return insights correlating customer sentiment with sales performance for each campaign, indicating successful vs unsuccessful strategies.

User training to effectively utilize the Sentiment Impact Analysis Tool.

Given a new user accessing the tool for the first time, when they complete the onboarding training program, then they should be able to successfully perform at least three key analyses independently.

Feedback Trend Tracker

The Feedback Trend Tracker analyzes feedback data over time to identify emerging trends in customer preferences and behaviors. By visualizing changes in customer opinions, retailers can detect shifts in demand and adapt their inventory strategies accordingly. This proactive approach ensures that retailers stay ahead of market changes, allowing them to optimize stock levels and align product offerings with consumer interests.

Requirements

Data Visualization Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to have a visual representation of customer feedback trends so that I can quickly identify shifts in demand and make informed decisions about inventory adjustments."

Description

The Data Visualization Dashboard provides an intuitive interface for retail managers to view and analyze feedback trends at a glance. This dashboard will aggregate customer feedback data from various sources, presenting it in easy-to-understand graphs and charts. By enabling users to visualize trends in customer preferences, patterns can be quickly identified, allowing for timely adjustments to inventory strategies. This dashboard not only enhances the decision-making process but also empowers retailers to respond proactively to market changes, optimizing stock levels efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail managers at a small store want to analyze customer feedback collected over the past month to identify emerging trends and make informed inventory decisions based on customer preferences and demands.

Given that the data visualization dashboard is loaded with the most recent customer feedback data, when the retail manager selects the 'Last Month' filter, then the dashboard displays graphs that accurately represent customer feedback trends for the selected period.

A retailer needs to present the latest customer feedback trends during a team meeting and wants to ensure the visualizations on the dashboard are clear, informative, and easy to understand for all team members participating in the meeting.

Given that the team meeting is scheduled, when the retail manager navigates to the dashboard, then all visual elements should be interactively displayed with tooltips, labels, and legends that clearly explain each data visualization component.

Retail managers are facing stockouts of popular items and want to quickly identify which products require restocking based on recent customer feedback trends visualized in the dashboard.

Given that customers have provided feedback regarding their interest in specific product categories, when the manager views the dashboard, then it should highlight the products with increasing positive feedback trends that correlate with their inventory levels in red to signal restocking urgency.

A retail manager wishes to compare feedback trends between two different product categories using the data visualization dashboard to make strategic decisions about product offerings.

Given that two product categories are selected for comparison, when the retail manager clicks on the 'Compare' option on the dashboard, then it displays side-by-side graphs that accurately depict the feedback trends for both categories over the selected time frame.

A retail manager is analyzing data from multiple sources and requires that the data visualization dashboard consistently updates to reflect any changes in feedback data in real-time.

Given that the dashboard is integrated with external feedback sources, when new feedback data comes in, then the dashboard should automatically refresh to display the most current trends without manual intervention.

To ensure that the team utilizes the most precise data when making inventory adjustments, the retail manager wants to validate that the dashboard accurately reflects feedback received from various sales channels.

Given that customer feedback is collected from multiple channels, when the dashboard aggregates this data, then it should accurately reflect contributions from each channel in the respective visualizations, showing no discrepancies in the totals.

Automated Feedback Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to automate the analysis of customer feedback so that I can save time and ensure I'm always aligned with customer preferences without manual effort."

Description

The Automated Feedback Analysis feature uses machine learning algorithms to process and analyze customer feedback data continuously. This system will identify key themes, sentiment analysis, and emerging trends, providing actionable insights without manual intervention. By automating the feedback analysis, retailers can save time, reduce errors, and stay ahead of customer preferences. The insights gained will inform inventory decisions and marketing strategies effectively, ensuring the product offerings align closely with customer needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated identification of key themes from customer feedback.

Given a dataset of customer feedback, when the Automated Feedback Analysis system processes the data, then it should accurately identify and categorize at least three key themes from the feedback with a confidence level of 85% or higher.

Continuous sentiment analysis of customer feedback.

Given a stream of incoming customer feedback, when the Automated Feedback Analysis feature is active, then it should provide real-time sentiment scores for the feedback, reporting on positive, negative, and neutral sentiments with a response time of less than 5 seconds.

Visualization of emerging feedback trends over time.

Given processed feedback data over the last three months, when the feedback trend visualization tool is accessed, then it should display a clear graphical representation of at least five emerging trends, indicating significant changes in customer sentiment or preferences during that period.

Automated alert system for trend detection.

Given a defined threshold for significant trend changes, when the Automated Feedback Analysis detects a change that meets or exceeds that threshold, then it should trigger an alert notification to the inventory management team via email or push notification.

Integration with inventory management alerts.

Given identified trends from the feedback analysis, when the system detects a shift that suggests increased demand for a product, then it should automatically suggest inventory adjustments to the inventory management system, reflecting a proposed increase in stock levels.

Reporting actionable insights for marketing strategies.

Given the results of feedback analysis, when a report is generated, then it should list at least three actionable insights based on customer preferences, complete with data points and potential strategies to align marketing efforts effectively.

User interface for analyzing feedback results.

Given a user accessing the feedback analysis dashboard, when they interact with the interface, then it should allow them to filter results by date range, sentiment, and theme, updating the visualizations and metrics in real-time without any lag of more than 2 seconds.

Integration with POS Systems

"As a retailer, I want the Feedback Trend Tracker to integrate with my existing POS system so that I can easily correlate sales with customer feedback and make data-driven inventory decisions."

Description

This requirement specifies the need for seamless integration of the Feedback Trend Tracker with existing Point of Sale (POS) systems used by retailers. By connecting sales data to feedback analysis, retailers can correlate sales performance with customer feedback trends. This integration will offer a comprehensive view of how customer opinions impact sales, allowing for more strategic inventory management and marketing initiatives. It will also facilitate real-time updates, enabling an agile response to changing customer needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Feedback Trend Tracker with Retail POS System for Sales Data Analysis

Given the Feedback Trend Tracker is connected to the POS system, when a sale is made, the corresponding customer feedback is recorded and visualized in the trend analysis reports, then retailers can see how sales correlate with customer opinions within a 5-minute refresh rate.

Real-time Updates from POS to Feedback Trend Tracker

Given the retailer's POS system has made a sale, when the sale occurs, then the Feedback Trend Tracker must automatically update to reflect the latest sales data and any associated customer feedback within a maximum of 2 minutes.

User Access and Security in POS Integration

Given a retailer is setting up the integration between their POS system and the Feedback Trend Tracker, when they access the integration settings, then they should be able to manage user permissions securely, allowing designated team members to view or edit integration settings.

Visualization of Sales and Feedback Correlation

Given the integration is live, when a retailer accesses the Feedback Trend Tracker dashboard, then they should be able to view a visual correlation between sales data and customer feedback trends through graphs and charts that are easily interpreted.

Error Handling During Integration Setup

Given a retailer is attempting to connect their POS system to the Feedback Trend Tracker, when an error occurs during setup, then the system should provide a clear and actionable error message guiding the user on how to resolve the issue.

Performance Testing of Integration under Load

Given multiple points of sale are operating simultaneously, when 100 transactions occur within a short period, then the Feedback Trend Tracker should handle all data inputs and updates without performance degradation or data loss.

Custom Alert Notifications

"As a retail manager, I want to receive alerts when there are significant changes in customer feedback trends so that I can respond quickly to potential issues before they affect sales."

Description

Custom Alert Notifications will allow users to set tailored alerts based on specific feedback trends or changes in customer sentiment. Retailers can configure the system to notify them of significant shifts, emerging trends, or negative feedback that requires immediate attention. This proactive feature ensures that retailers can react promptly to changing customer needs and preferences, minimizing the risk of stockouts or overstock situations. By having timely notifications, retailers can maintain optimal inventory levels and enhance customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a custom alert for negative feedback on a specific product.

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevolution platform, when they navigate to the 'Custom Alert Notifications' section and specify a product with a threshold for negative feedback, then the system should send an alert notification to the user's device if the negative feedback exceeds the specified threshold.

User configures alerts for emerging trends in customer sentiment.

Given a user is on the 'Feedback Trend Tracker' page, when they select a trend and set a custom notification for significant shifts in sentiment, then the system should generate notifications whenever there is a change in the trend that meets the predefined criteria set by the user.

User receives notifications for inventory adjustments based on customer feedback.

Given a user has set up a custom alert for significant shifts in customer preferences, when the trend data reflects a change in preference that requires inventory adjustments, then the user should receive a timely notification regarding the necessary stock changes.

User edits an existing custom alert for a specific feedback trend.

Given a user wants to modify an existing custom alert, when they access the alert management section and change the parameters of the alert (e.g., product, threshold, alert type), then the system should update the alert accordingly and confirm the changes to the user.

User deletes a custom alert notification they no longer need.

Given a user is in the 'Custom Alert Notifications' section, when they select an alert and choose to delete it, then the system should successfully remove the alert from their dashboard and notify the user of the deletion.

User tests the custom alert notification feature for various scenarios.

Given a user has created custom alerts for different trends, when they simulate the feedback conditions that trigger those alerts, then the system should accurately send notifications corresponding to each alert configuration.

User receives a summary of all active custom alerts.

Given a user navigates to the 'Custom Alerts' dashboard, when they request a summary of all active alerts, then the system should display a clear list outlining each alert, its parameters, and the feedback trends it monitors.

Reporting and Insights Generation

"As a retail owner, I want to receive regular reports on customer feedback trends and insights so that I can make strategic inventory and product decisions based on data."

Description

The Reporting and Insights Generation feature provides retailers with comprehensive reports that summarize feedback trends and their implications for inventory management. These reports will be generated at regular intervals, offering insights into long-term trends, seasonal effects, and customer behavior patterns. By delivering these reports through the platform, retailers can plan their inventory more effectively, ensuring they are stocked with the right products at the right time. This feature will support strategic decision-making and help enhance overall business performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Generation of Weekly Feedback Trend Reports

Given that feedback data is collected weekly, When a report is generated, Then the report should accurately reflect customer feedback trends over the past week, including any significant changes in preferences and behaviors, and should be accessible via the platform.

Monthly Data Analysis for Inventory Strategy

Given that the monthly interval has passed, When the monthly report is generated, Then the report must include an analysis of long-term trends, seasonal effects, and actionable insights for optimizing inventory management based on customer behavior patterns.

User Access and Navigation of Reports

Given that a retailer logs into the RetailRevolution platform, When they navigate to the Reporting section, Then they should be able to easily locate and download the most recent feedback trend report without technical issues.

Integration with Existing Reporting Tools

Given that retailers utilize third-party reporting tools, When the feedback trend reports are generated, Then they should be exportable in formats compatible with those tools (e.g., CSV, PDF) to facilitate further analysis.

Feedback Trend Report Scheduling

Given the retailers wish to receive regular updates, When a retailer sets up a schedule for report generation, Then they should receive reports automatically via email at the requested intervals without manual intervention.

Real-Time Notifications for Significant Trends

Given that significant changes in customer feedback are detected, When such changes occur, Then the system should send an immediate notification to the retailer's dashboard and via email to alert them of the need for inventory adjustment.

User Satisfaction with Reporting Feature

Given that retailers utilize the Reporting and Insights Generation feature, When a satisfaction survey is conducted post-usage, Then at least 80% of users should report being satisfied or very satisfied with the insights and usefulness of the reports generated.

Automated Feedback Reporting

Automated Feedback Reporting generates comprehensive reports summarizing customer feedback data at regular intervals. Retailers can customize report parameters to include metrics such as average ratings, common themes in comments, and sentiment scores. These reports provide an easy-to-digest overview of customer feedback, enabling retailers to quickly assess product performance and identify necessary adjustments to their inventory.

Requirements

Customizable Reporting Parameters

"As a retail manager, I want to customize the parameters of my feedback reports so that I can focus on the metrics that are most relevant to my product strategy and customer service goals."

Description

This requirement involves enabling users to customize the parameters of the automated feedback reports generated within RetailRevolution. Users should be able to select specific metrics they want to include in their reports, such as average ratings, common themes from customer comments, and sentiment scores. This customization will enhance the functionality of the feedback reporting feature by allowing retailers to focus on the most relevant data that aligns with their strategic goals. By tailoring report parameters, retailers can gain insights into customer sentiments that are specifically actionable for their inventory adjustment plans.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects metrics for a customer feedback report.

Given a user is in the reporting section, when they select specific metrics such as average ratings, common themes, and sentiment scores, then the report should include only the chosen metrics and exclude others.

User generates a report with selected metrics.

Given the user has customized their report parameters, when they request to generate a report, then the system should successfully produce a report reflecting the selected parameters without errors.

User modifies existing report parameters.

Given the user has an existing report setup, when they change the metrics in the customized parameters, then the report should update to reflect the new selections instantly.

User saves customized reporting parameters for future use.

Given the user has defined customized parameters for a report, when they click the save button, then the parameters should be saved and available for future report generation.

User receives an error when attempting to include unsupported metrics.

Given a user selects unsupported metrics due to system limitations, when they attempt to generate the report, then the system should display an error message informing them of the unsupported metrics.

User shares the generated feedback report with team members.

Given a user has generated a feedback report, when they use the share functionality, then the report should be successfully sent to the specified team members via email with all selected metrics included.

Scheduled Reporting Intervals

"As a store owner, I want to schedule my feedback reports to be generated weekly so that I can consistently track customer feedback without manual intervention."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a feature that allows retailers to set scheduled intervals for generating automated feedback reports. Retailers should have the flexibility to choose how often they want to receive these reports, whether daily, weekly, or monthly. Providing this capability ensures that retailers stay updated on customer feedback trends and can react quickly to any emerging issues or opportunities. It enhances the continuous feedback loop, enabling proactive decision-making that contributes to better inventory management and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer schedules a daily report to be generated for automated feedback reporting.

Given the retailer is in the settings menu, when they select 'Daily' from the scheduled report options and save the changes, then a daily automated feedback report should be generated at the specified time each day.

Retailer sets up a weekly report to track feedback trends every Monday.

Given the retailer has access to the scheduled reporting feature, when they choose 'Weekly' and select Monday as the report day, then a weekly report summarizing customer feedback should be delivered every Monday at the designated time.

Retailer wants to switch from monthly to weekly reporting.

Given the retailer has previously scheduled monthly reports, when they change the report frequency from 'Monthly' to 'Weekly' in the settings, then the system should confirm the change and set the next report to deliver on the next appropriate day in the week.

Retailer reviews the previous reports to validate the changes made to the scheduled frequency.

Given the retailer has made changes to their reporting schedule, when they check the report history, then they should see entries reflecting the new schedule as well as the reports generated prior to the change for verification.

Retailer aims to receive a report on specific feedback topics such as 'product quality' and 'customer service'.

Given the retailer is customizing their report, when they select specific metrics like 'product quality' and 'customer service' in the report parameters section, then the generated reports should only include feedback and summaries related to those selected topics.

Retailer receives an alert prior to the scheduled report generation.

Given the retailer has scheduled a report, when the report is set to be generated at a specified time, then an alert notification should be sent to the retailer's registered email address 30 minutes before the report generation occurs.

Retailer modifies the scheduled report settings to include additional metrics after a feedback review session.

Given the retailer recognizes the need for additional metrics following a review of feedback reports, when they modify the report specifications to include new metrics prior to the next scheduled report, then the upcoming report should reflect these additional metrics in the generated summaries.

Visual Data Analytics Dashboard

"As a data analyst, I want to view a visual dashboard of feedback metrics so that I can quickly understand customer sentiments and adjust our inventory strategy accordingly."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing an intuitive analytics dashboard that visually represents the data from the automated feedback reports. The dashboard will include graphs, charts, and key performance indicators (KPIs) that summarize the report findings in a user-friendly format. By visualizing the feedback data, retailers can quickly identify trends and patterns in customer comments and ratings, leading to more informed inventory adjustments. The dashboard will integrate seamlessly with the existing reporting feature, ensuring all data is up-to-date and easily accessible.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Data Visualization for Customer Feedback Trends

Given that the dashboard is integrated with the automated feedback reporting feature, when a user accesses the dashboard, then they should see a graphical representation of customer feedback trends including average ratings and sentiment scores over the last 30 days.

Real-time Updates on Feedback Metrics

Given that the dashboard is displaying feedback metrics, when new feedback is received, then the dashboard should automatically update the displayed data without requiring a manual refresh, within a 5-minute timeframe.

Customizable Reporting Parameters

Given that a retailer is using the dashboard, when they select customizable parameters for report generation, then the dashboard should allow them to filter feedback by date range, product category, and sentiment type, and accordingly reflect these changes in visual outputs.

User-Friendly Interface for Data Interaction

Given that a user is viewing the analytics dashboard, when they hover over elements in the graphs or charts, then they should see tooltips displaying detailed data points and additional metrics related to that specific element.

Compatibility with Diverse Devices

Given that the dashboard is accessed from different devices, when a user opens the dashboard on a mobile device or tablet, then it should automatically adjust its layout to ensure that all visual elements are legible and accessible without loss of functionality.

Export Functionality for Reports

Given that a user has generated a report through the dashboard, when they click on the export button, then they should be able to download the report in multiple formats (PDF, CSV, Excel) without any data loss or formatting issues.

Integration with Existing Inventory Management

Given that the feedback dashboard is part of the RetailRevolution platform, when a retailer views inventory performance metrics, then they should see recommendations for inventory adjustments based on feedback trends displayed on the dashboard.

Sentiment Analysis Integration

"As a retail analyst, I want to see sentiment analysis of customer feedback so that I can understand customer emotions toward our products and sharpen our inventory selection."

Description

This requirement involves integrating a sentiment analysis tool to automatically evaluate and categorize customer feedback based on sentiment (positive, negative, neutral). This powerful feature will lend insight into customer emotions toward specific products, enabling retailers to identify potential issues or opportunities at a glance. By integrating sentiment analysis into the automated feedback reporting, RetailRevolution will provide deeper insights that guide inventory decisions and improve product offerings to meet customer expectations.

Acceptance Criteria

Sentiment analysis tool evaluates customer feedback from multiple sources, including surveys, social media, and product reviews, to automatically categorize sentiment as positive, negative, or neutral after each reporting interval.

Given that the sentiment analysis tool is integrated, when customer feedback is submitted, then the system should categorize the feedback into positive, negative, or neutral with an accuracy rate of at least 85%.

Retailers can customize the parameters for sentiment analysis reports, including time intervals, products, and specific categories of feedback, to suit their operational needs.

Given the customization feature is accessible, when a retailer sets parameters for the sentiment analysis report, then the generated report should reflect those specific parameters accurately without errors.

Sentiment analysis results are reflected in automated feedback reporting, allowing retailers to quickly assess trends in customer sentiment over time.

Given that sentiment analysis is integrated with feedback reporting, when a report is generated, then the report should display trends in sentiment over time, with appropriate visualizations (e.g., graphs) that highlight significant changes.

The system provides a summary of sentiment scores for each product, enabling retailers to evaluate which products are performing well and which need attention.

Given that customer feedback is analyzed, when a retailer views the sentiment report, then they should see a clear summary of sentiment scores organized by product, with actionable insights for low-scoring items.

Retailers receive automated alerts for products that have a significant drop in sentiment scores, prompting immediate review and action.

Given that the alert system is functional, when a product's sentiment score drops below a predetermined threshold, then the retailer should receive an automated alert notifying them of the change.

The sentiment analysis tool is capable of processing feedback in real time, allowing for up-to-date sentiment monitoring as feedback is received.

Given that real-time processing of feedback is operational, when new customer feedback is entered into the system, then sentiment analysis should update within five minutes, reflecting the latest data in the reports.

Feedback Comparison Over Time

"As a business owner, I want to compare customer feedback over time so that I can evaluate the effectiveness of the changes I've made to my inventory and service."

Description

This requirement requires the development of a feature that allows retailers to compare feedback data over specified time frames. Retailers should be able to select different reporting periods (e.g., last month vs. this month) to visualize trends in customer satisfaction and product performance. By facilitating comparisons, this feature will support strategic decision-making, helping retailers to assess whether changes made in inventory or customer service have positively influenced customer feedback over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer accesses the feedback comparison feature to analyze customer feedback for the last month and compare it against the current month to identify trends and changes in customer satisfaction.

Given that the retailer is logged into the system, When they select 'Last Month' and 'This Month' as comparison periods, Then the system should display a comparative graph of average ratings and sentiment scores between the selected periods.

Retailer customizes the feedback comparison report by including specific metrics such as common themes in comments and positive/negative sentiment for the selected reporting periods.

Given that the retailer is on the feedback comparison page, When they select the metrics they wish to include, Then the report should update to reflect those selected metrics accurately in the comparison results.

Retailer examines the generated report for insights into product performance, focusing on whether changes to inventory or customer service have led to improved feedback scores.

Given that the retailer has viewed the feedback comparison report, When they analyze the data trends for both periods, Then they should be able to identify at least one actionable insight supported by the data regarding product performance or inventory adjustments.

Retailer runs the feedback comparison report at the end of a quarter to prepare for a strategy meeting, needing insights into customer feedback trends over time.

Given that the retailer has all data from previous quarters available, When they select quarterly reporting periods to compare, Then the system should generate a comprehensive report that highlights key changes and trends in customer feedback across those quarters.

Retailer needs to share the feedback comparison report with team members via email directly from the platform.

Given that the retailer has completed viewing the feedback comparison report, When they choose the option to share via email, Then the system should successfully send the report to the designated recipients with the correct data included.

Retailer wants to visualize the changes in common themes of customer feedback over the selected time frames to assess the impact of recent marketing campaigns.

Given that the retailer has selected the appropriate reporting periods for comparison, When the feedback comparison report is generated, Then the visual representation should accurately reflect the shift in common themes identified by customer feedback during those periods.

User Access Control for Reports

"As a business manager, I want to set user access controls for my feedback reports so that I can ensure sensitive customer information is protected and only shared with appropriate team members."

Description

This requirement involves implementing user access controls for the automated feedback reports. Retailers should be able to define who within their organization has access to view or modify these reports, ensuring sensitive customer data remains secure. This control will enhance the product’s usability by allowing businesses to manage how information is shared internally among teams, while complying with data protection regulations.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role-Based Access for Report Viewing

Given an administrator role, when accessing the user access control settings, then the administrator should be able to grant view permissions to specific users for the automated feedback reports.

Modification Permissions for User Roles

Given a user with modification permissions, when they attempt to edit report parameters, then the system should allow them to modify the parameters without restrictions.

Access Denial for Unauthorized Users

Given a user without access permissions, when they attempt to view or modify a report, then the system should display an access denied message and log the attempt.

Audit Trail for Access Changes

Given any changes made to user access settings, when the changes are saved, then the system should log the user, the timestamp, and the changes made in an audit trail report.

User Notification of Access Changes

Given an administrator who changes a user's access permissions, when the change is saved, then the system should automatically notify the user by email of their new access status.

Role Customization for Access Control

Given the role management section, when an administrator creates a new user role, then the administrator should be able to customize the permissions for viewing and modifying the reports as needed.

Data Protection Compliance for Report Access

Given the requirement for data protection compliance, when setting user permissions, then the system should ensure that sensitive customer data is only accessible to authorized roles in accordance with data protection regulations.

Automated Alerts for Negative Feedback

"As a customer service director, I want to receive alerts when negative feedback exceeds a specified threshold so that I can address customer concerns promptly and improve our service quality."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating an automated alert system that triggers notifications to retailers when negative feedback surpasses a defined threshold. Retailers will have the ability to set specific criteria for what constitutes negative feedback based on sentiment scores or comment keywords. This proactive feature aims to improve customer service by allowing retailers to respond quickly to issues signaled by customer feedback, thereby enhancing customer retention and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers receive automated alerts for negative feedback based on preset thresholds after they have implemented the system for management of customer feedback.

Given the retailer has defined their threshold for negative feedback, when negative feedback exceeds this threshold, then an automated alert is triggered and sent to the retailer via email or app notification.

Retailers can customize the criteria for what constitutes negative feedback based on sentiment analysis or specific keywords in customer comments.

Given the retailer is in the settings page, when they input text for sentiment threshold and keywords for negative feedback, then the system should save these settings correctly without errors.

Negative feedback reports are generated and sent to retailers at predefined intervals, enabling timely assessments of customer sentiment.

Given the retailer has set an interval for report generation, when it is the designated time, then a report summarizing the negative feedback received during that period is generated and sent to the retailer.

Retailers get a historical overview of negative feedback trends over time, helping them to identify patterns and recurring issues in customer feedback.

Given the retailer accesses the negative feedback dashboard, when they select a time range, then the system displays graphical trend data that includes historical negative feedback metrics for the selected period.

Alerts for negative feedback allow retailers to take immediate action on affected products, improving customer service response times.

Given a negative feedback alert is received, when the retailer views the details of the feedback, then they can respond to the feedback directly within the system or escalate the issue as needed.

Retailers have the ability to mute certain keywords to inhibit alerts for low-priority comments, ensuring focus on critical feedback.

Given the retailer is managing feedback alert settings, when they enter keywords to mute, then those keywords are excluded from triggering alerts for negative feedback in the future.

The system provides tutorials or guides on setting up the automated alert system effectively for new users, enhancing user experience.

Given a new retailer accesses the automated alerts feature for the first time, when they view the help section, then they should find comprehensive and easy-to-follow tutorials on how to set up alerts based on feedback.

Customer Preference Profile Creator

The Customer Preference Profile Creator compiles feedback data to create detailed profiles of customer preferences for various products. This feature segments customers based on their feedback and purchasing behavior, allowing retailers to tailor their inventory selections to specific customer segments. By leveraging these profiles, retailers can enhance marketing efforts and product recommendations, ultimately driving sales and improving customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Dynamic Customer Segmentation

"As a retailer, I want to automatically segment customers based on their preferences and purchasing behavior so that I can tailor my inventory and marketing efforts to better meet their needs and improve sales."

Description

The Dynamic Customer Segmentation requirement allows the platform to analyze customer feedback and purchasing data in real-time to create detailed customer profiles. This feature enhances retailer capabilities by automatically segmenting customers into categories based on preferences and behaviors. Retailers can leverage these insights to tailor inventory selections, develop targeted marketing strategies, and personalize communication. By effectively using segmentation, retailers are expected to improve customer satisfaction and increase sales through relevant product offerings that meet specific customer needs, ultimately enhancing the overall shopping experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Profile Creation Based on Feedback Data

Given that customer feedback has been collected, when the retailer accesses the Customer Preference Profile Creator, then it should generate a detailed customer profile that includes preferences and behavior based on the collected feedback.

Real-time Customer Segmentation

Given a database of customer purchasing data, when the retailer triggers the dynamic segmentation feature, then customers should be automatically categorized into at least three distinct segments based on their buying behavior and preferences.

Integration with Marketing Tools

Given that customer segments have been created, when the retailer uses the marketing tool to target specific segments, then the tool should provide relevant marketing insights tailored to each customer segment identified.

Accuracy of Customer Profiles

Given that customer profiles have been generated, when the retailer reviews the profiles, then at least 90% of the profiles should accurately reflect the customer's actual preferences and behaviors as cross-verified by sales data.

User Interface Usability

Given that the Customer Preference Profile Creator is implemented, when a retailer uses the interface, then it should allow for seamless navigation without requiring more than three clicks to access detailed customer segments.

Feedback Loop Mechanism

Given that customer profiles have been created, when a retailer updates inventory based on preferences, then there should be a mechanism to collect feedback on the new inventory which can refine customer profiles continuously.

Automated Feedback Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to automatically analyze customer feedback so that I can quickly identify trends and preferences, allowing me to optimize my product offerings and increase customer satisfaction."

Description

The Automated Feedback Analysis requirement integrates AI-driven analytics to process and analyze customer feedback from various sources, such as surveys, reviews, and purchase history. It delivers actionable insights to retailers about customer preferences and product performance. By streamlining the feedback analysis process, retailers can quickly identify trends and make informed inventory and marketing decisions, ultimately improving product offerings and customer experiences. This integration aims to create a continuous feedback loop that enhances product selection and discovery, driving customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Process and Analyze Customer Feedback from Surveys and Reviews

Given that I have customer feedback data from surveys and reviews, when the Automated Feedback Analysis is executed, then it should categorize feedback into positive, negative, and neutral sentiments and provide a report within 5 minutes.

Generate Actionable Insights for Product Performance

Given that the feedback analysis has been completed, when the retailer views the insights dashboard, then it should display key metrics including the top five products with the highest positive feedback and recommendations for improvement for products with negative feedback.

Create and Update Customer Preference Profiles

Given that customer feedback has been analyzed, when a profile for a specific customer segment is generated, then it should include at least three identified preferences and be updateable in real-time as new feedback comes in.

Integration with Marketing Tools for Targeted Promotions

Given that customer preference profiles are created, when they are integrated with the retailer's marketing tools, then it should enable the creation of targeted promotional campaigns based on at least three customer segments.

Monitor Trends Over Time Using Historical Data

Given historical feedback data from the past year, when the Automated Feedback Analysis runs, then it should identify at least three significant trends in customer preferences over that time frame.

Provide a Feedback Loop for Continuous Improvement

Given that feedback is collected continuously, when the system analyzes new feedback, then it should automatically update customer preference profiles and notify the retailer of any significant changes or emerging trends bi-weekly.

Utilize AI to Predict Future Customer Preferences

Given that enough historical feedback data is available, when the AI-driven analysis is initiated, then it should predict future customer preferences with at least 80% accuracy based on past behavior patterns.

Inventory Recommendation Engine

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated recommendations on inventory levels for specific products so that I can manage stock efficiently and meet customer demand without overstocking."

Description

The Inventory Recommendation Engine requirement implements a data-driven algorithm that suggests optimal product inventory levels based on customer preference profiles and historical sales data. This feature aims to reduce instances of overstocking and stockouts by providing retailers with automated recommendations on which products to stock and in what quantities. By leveraging these recommendations, retailers can improve stock management efficiency, reduce costs, and enhance customer satisfaction by ensuring popular items are always available, thereby driving sales.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer using the Inventory Recommendation Engine, I want to receive automated recommendations for inventory levels based on customer preference profiles and historical sales data.

Given that the retailer has integrated customer preference profiles and historical sales data, when the Inventory Recommendation Engine analyzes the data, then it should provide a list of recommended inventory levels for at least the top 10 products based on demand.

As a user of the Inventory Recommendation Engine, I need to view the generated inventory recommendations in a user-friendly dashboard.

Given that the Inventory Recommendation Engine has generated inventory recommendations, when the retailer accesses the dashboard, then they should see the recommendations displayed clearly with product names, recommended stock levels, and alerts for low or high stock.

As a retailer, I want the Inventory Recommendation Engine to adjust recommendations in real time based on sales fluctuations.

Given that real-time sales data is being fed into the Inventory Recommendation Engine, when a significant change in sales occurs for a product, then the engine should update the inventory recommendation within 30 minutes reflecting the new demand.

As a user, I want to receive alerts when inventory levels for recommended items are below a re-order threshold.

Given that inventory levels for recommended items have been monitored, when an item’s stock level falls below the established reorder threshold, then the system should trigger an alert to the retailer by email and/or in-dashboard notification.

As a retailer, I want to analyze the effectiveness of the inventory recommendations over time to improve future recommendations.

Given that a sufficient time has passed since the implementation of the Inventory Recommendation Engine, when the retailer reviews sales data compared to the recommendations, then the system should provide a report on the success rate of the recommendations in terms of decreased stockouts and overstock instances.

As a retailer, I want the system to allow customization of parameters influencing inventory recommendations.

Given that the retailer has access to the Inventory Recommendation Engine settings, when they adjust parameters such as preferred stock levels, lead times, and sales forecasts, then the system should incorporate these adjustments into future inventory recommendations immediately.

Customizable Reporting Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to customize my reporting dashboard to focus on key metrics that are important to my business so that I can quickly assess performance and make informed decisions."

Description

The Customizable Reporting Dashboard requirement offers retailers a visual interface to create and customize reports based on customer preference data and inventory performance metrics. This feature empowers users to access and visualize important business insights at a glance, enabling them to make data-driven decisions. Retailers can tailor reports to their specific needs, focusing on metrics that matter most to them, such as sales trends, customer behaviors, and inventory turnover, facilitating strategic planning and organizational growth.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers access the Customizable Reporting Dashboard after logging into the RetailRevolution platform to generate sales trend reports for a specific product category over the past quarter.

Given the retailer selects the 'Sales Trends' report type and the product category, when they specify the date range for the last quarter, then the dashboard displays a visual report showing sales trends with relevant metrics such as total sales, units sold, and average sale price for that category.

A retailer wants to customize their report to focus on customer behaviors, particularly analyzing customer feedback related to their purchasing history.

Given the retailer selects the 'Customer Behavior' report type and applies filters for specific customer segments based on feedback data, when they click 'Generate Report', then the dashboard outputs a customized report that details purchasing patterns and preferences for the selected segments.

A manager reviews the inventory turnover statistics in the Customizable Reporting Dashboard to assess the efficiency of stock management practices.

Given the manager accesses the dashboard and selects 'Inventory Turnover' as the report type, when they choose the desired time frame, then the report should visually represent inventory turnover rates with comparison to the previous period and highlight any products with low turnover.

During a strategy meeting, a retailer intends to present visual data on product performance to identify top-selling products and low-performance items.

Given the retailer selects 'Product Performance' on the dashboard, when they apply filters for the desired time frame and metrics, then the dashboard displays a clear visual comparison of top-selling versus low-selling products, including sales volume and customer ratings for each product.

A retailer aims to schedule automated reports for ongoing review of inventory metrics, ensuring they receive updates without manually generating reports each time.

Given the retailer accesses the report scheduling feature within the dashboard, when they set a frequency (daily, weekly, monthly) and the specific reports to be automated, then the system should successfully schedule the reports and send them via email as per the defined frequency.

A user attempts to modify an existing report by adding additional filters to refine the displayed data for a specific marketing campaign.

Given the user selects an existing report from the dashboard, when they add new filters relevant to the marketing campaign (such as 'Location' or 'Age Group') and save the changes, then the modified report should reflect the updated filters and display new data accordingly.

Real-Time Notification System

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time notifications about customer activity and inventory levels so that I can respond quickly to changes and better meet my customers' needs."

Description

The Real-Time Notification System requirement establishes a framework for sending alerts and notifications to retailers based on customer activity, inventory levels, and feedback. This feature ensures that retailers are promptly informed about critical changes, such as low stock alerts or significant shifts in customer preferences. By receiving real-time notifications, retailers can take immediate actions to adjust marketing strategies or inventory management, enhancing responsiveness and operational efficiency. This proactive approach is expected to improve overall customer experience by ensuring that retailers are always aligned with customers' needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Notification on Low Stock Levels

Given the inventory level for a specific product drops below the defined threshold, when the system detects this change, then a real-time notification is sent to the retailer's dashboard and via email.

Notification of Significant Customer Preference Shift

Given that customer feedback indicates a significant shift in preferences for a product, when the system analyzes feedback data, then a notification is generated and sent to the retailer within 5 minutes of detection.

Alert for Upcoming Product Launches Based on Customer Profiles

Given the scheduled launch of a new product, when the associated customer preference profiles indicate high interest, then a notification is triggered to alert retailers to prepare marketing efforts at least 48 hours in advance.

Integration with POS System for Real-Time Inventory Updates

Given integration with the existing POS system, when a sale is made, then the inventory data must update in the system within 1 minute to trigger real-time notifications for low stock.

Real-Time Notification Preferences Management

Given a retailer wishes to customize notification settings, when they adjust preferences in their account settings, then the changes should be saved and reflected in the notification system immediately without requiring a page refresh.

Automated Feedback Collection for Notification Triggers

Given that a notification trigger is set for customer feedback, when customers provide feedback through any channel, then the feedback should be logged and analyzed within 2 hours to determine if notifications need to be sent.

Multi-Channel Notification Delivery

Given a critical event that requires an alert, when the notification is generated, then it must be successfully delivered across multiple channels (dashboard, email, SMS) to ensure the retailer receives the necessary information.

Integration with POS Systems

"As a retailer, I want to integrate my POS system with RetailRevolution so that I can ensure accurate data transfer and real-time visibility into sales and customer preferences."

Description

The Integration with POS Systems requirement is designed to provide seamless connections between the RetailRevolution platform and existing point-of-sale systems used by retailers. This integration allows for the automatic transfer of sales data and customer feedback to the inventory management system, ensuring accuracy and real-time access to vital information. By eliminating manual entry and potential errors, this requirement enhances data integrity and streamlines operations, allowing retailers to make informed decisions based on a complete view of their sales and customer interactions.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of RetailRevolution with a standard POS system during a sales transaction.

Given a sales transaction at the POS, when the transaction is completed, then the data should be automatically sent to RetailRevolution including item sold, quantity, and transaction timestamp without manual entry.

Real-time synchronization of customer feedback collected at the POS and the RetailRevolution platform.

Given that a customer provides feedback at the POS, when the feedback is submitted, then it should be reflected in the RetailRevolution system within 5 seconds for immediate reporting.

Daily automated reporting of sales data from the POS to RetailRevolution.

Given that the POS system completes a sales day, when the automated report is generated, then it should include all transactions and send the total sales and returns data to RetailRevolution by 11 PM daily.

Validation of the data integrity after the integration between RetailRevolution and the POS system.

Given that sales data is transmitted to RetailRevolution, when the data is received, then the number of records in POS should match the number of records in RetailRevolution within a 1% error margin.

User access to the integrated inventory reports generated from POS data.

Given a retailer has logged into RetailRevolution, when they navigate to the inventory reports section, then they should see updated inventory levels reflecting POS sales in real-time.

System alerts for discrepancies in data synchronization between POS and RetailRevolution.

Given that a data synchronization issue occurs, when RetailRevolution detects a discrepancy, then an alert should be sent to the system administrator with details of the issue within 2 minutes.

Feedback Loop Integration

Feedback Loop Integration establishes a mechanism for retailers to engage with customers who provide feedback, enabling them to respond directly and foster a community atmosphere. This feature encourages ongoing customer interaction and shows consumers that their opinions are valued. By cultivating relationships with customers through feedback engagement, retailers can enhance brand loyalty and gain deeper insights into customer needs.

Requirements

Customer Feedback Collection

"As a retailer, I want to collect customer feedback effortlessly so that I can understand their needs better and improve my services accordingly."

Description

The Customer Feedback Collection requirement enables retailers to seamlessly gather customer feedback through various channels, including email surveys, social media, and in-store kiosks. This feature is designed to streamline the feedback process, ensuring that retailers can capture valuable insights from their customers efficiently. The collected feedback should be easily accessible and analyzable through the RetailRevolution platform, allowing businesses to identify trends, customer sentiments, and areas for improvement. This functionality is crucial for driving customer-centric changes and enhancing overall customer experience, ultimately leading to increased satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer feedback is collected through an email survey sent after a purchase is completed.

Given a customer completes a purchase, when an email survey is sent, then the customer should be able to provide feedback and submit it successfully via the email link.

In-store kiosks are available for customers to submit feedback during their visit.

Given a customer is at an in-store kiosk, when they select the feedback option, then they should be able to input their thoughts and submit them without errors.

Feedback collected from social media platforms is aggregated into the RetailRevolution system.

Given that a customer leaves feedback on social media, when the system retrieves these comments, then the feedback should appear in the RetailRevolution dashboard for analysis.

Retailers can analyze customer feedback through a visual dashboard in RetailRevolution.

Given that feedback has been collected, when a retailer navigates to the feedback analysis dashboard, then they should see visual representations of customer sentiments and trends over time.

Retailers can respond to customer feedback directly through the platform.

Given that feedback has been submitted by customers, when a retailer selects a feedback comment, then they should be able to write and send a response that the customer can see in their feedback history.

Customers can opt-in for feedback follow-up communications.

Given a customer submits feedback, when they are presented with an option to receive follow-up communications, then they should be able to choose 'yes' or 'no' and the selection should be recorded accurately in the system.

Feedback collection methods can be customized by retailers to suit their business needs.

Given that a retailer wants to customize their feedback collection options, when they access the settings in RetailRevolution, then they should be able to select from different feedback channels (email, social media, kiosks) and configure them accordingly.

Real-time Response Mechanism

"As a retailer, I want to respond to customer feedback immediately so that I can show customers that their opinions matter and build lasting relationships."

Description

The Real-time Response Mechanism requirement provides retailers with the ability to engage with customers who submit feedback instantly. This feature allows retailers to reply directly within the platform, creating an interactive and responsive customer engagement experience. The mechanism should include templates for common responses, ensuring that businesses can provide quick and effective feedback while also personalizing interactions. This capability enhances the customer experience by showing that their opinions are valued and promotes loyalty as customers feel heard and appreciated.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback via the RetailRevolution platform's feedback form.

Given a customer submits feedback through the feedback form, when the feedback is received, then the retailer should receive an instant notification of the feedback submission within the application.

Retailer accesses the feedback and prepares a response using a template.

Given the retailer views new feedback, when they select a template for response, then the template should populate the response field allowing for personalization prior to sending.

Response is sent to the customer through the platform after feedback is reviewed.

Given the retailer completes the response to the feedback, when they click 'Send', then the customer should receive the response within 2 minutes via their registered contact method in the RetailRevolution system.

Customer views the response to their feedback via their account.

Given a customer has received a response, when they log into their RetailRevolution account, then the response should be visible in their feedback history section, showing the date and time of the retailer’s reply.

Retailer gathers insights from customer feedback over time.

Given the retailer accesses the feedback analytics report, when they generate the report, then the report should highlight trends in customer feedback and categories of feedback received over the past month.

Retailer customizes response templates within the platform.

Given the retailer navigates to the template management section, when they create or edit a response template, then the changes should be saved and available for selection when responding to future feedback.

Retailer reviews the effectiveness of their responses in engaging customers.

Given the retailer checks the engagement metrics, when they view the statistics on customer follow-ups after receiving feedback responses, then they should see a correlation indicating increased engagement rates.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to access an analytics dashboard for customer feedback so that I can quickly assess customer sentiments and make informed operational decisions."

Description

The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement introduces a comprehensive visualization tool that aggregates customer feedback data into actionable insights. The dashboard will present metrics such as feedback volume, sentiment analysis, and response rates, enabling retailers to monitor customer satisfaction trends over time. It should be designed for easy interpretation, allowing managers and decision-makers to quickly understand customer sentiments and identify areas for improvement within their operations. This feature is vital for informed decision-making and strategic planning based on actual customer feedback.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I need to view the overall feedback trend for the past month in the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to understand customer sentiment regarding a newly launched product.

Given that I am on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I select the date range for the past month, then I should see a graphic representation showing the trend of customer feedback volume and overall sentiment scores for the selected period.

As a customer support representative, I want to analyze the response rates to feedback so that I can gauge the effectiveness of our feedback engagement.

Given that I access the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I filter feedback by the response status, then I should be able to see metrics displaying the percentage of feedback responded to versus total feedback gathered.

As a retail store owner, I want to identify key areas for improvement based on negative feedback trends shown in the dashboard.

Given that I am viewing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I focus on the sentiment analysis section, then I should be able to click on the negative sentiment results and see a breakdown of the individual feedback comments associated with those scores.

As a data analyst, I need to export the feedback analytics report in CSV format for further analysis outside the dashboard.

Given that I am on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I click on the 'Export' button, then I should receive a downloadable CSV file that includes all metrics displayed on the dashboard for the selected period.

As a marketing manager, I want to know the volume of feedback related to my promotional campaigns in the analytics dashboard to measure campaign success.

Given that I am viewing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I apply filters for the promotional campaign, then I should see the total feedback volume and sentiment analysis pertaining to that specific campaign.

As a shop assistant, I want to understand customer feedback sentiment over different periods to identify any emerging trends versus past performance.

Given that I am viewing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when I toggle between different time periods, then I should see a visual representation of sentiment changes over time, allowing comparison with previous periods.

As a product manager, I want to access the dashboard from my mobile device to track feedback metrics on the go during store visits.

Given that I am accessing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, when I log in, then I should have full access to all dashboard features and metrics displayed in a mobile-responsive format.

Community Engagement Features

"As a retailer, I want to create an online community for customers to share feedback and suggestions so that we can build a more engaged customer base and foster loyalty."

Description

The Community Engagement Features requirement allows retailers to create a feedback community where customers can discuss their experiences, suggest improvements, and interact with each other. This feature includes forums, discussion boards, and Q&A sections that foster a sense of belonging and community among customers. By integrating this into the RetailRevolution platform, retailers can enhance customer loyalty and encourage users to be advocates for the brand. This collaborative approach to customer engagement not only enriches the customer experience but also provides retailers with extensive qualitative insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction in the Feedback Community

Given a registered user, when they navigate to the community engagement feature, then they should be able to post a new discussion topic, reply to other users' posts, and like comments.

Feedback Submission Process

Given a customer on the RetailRevolution platform, when they provide feedback through the community feature, then they should receive a confirmation message and their feedback should be recorded in the backend system.

Review of Customer Feedback

Given a retailer with access to customer feedback, when they view the community engagement reports, then they should see categorized feedback and sentiment analysis for actionable insights.

Monitoring Community Engagement Metrics

Given the retailer's dashboard, when they access the community engagement metrics, then they should see the number of posts, replies, and user engagement levels over time.

Escalation of Customer Issues

Given a customer posting feedback indicating a problematic experience, when the retailer views this feedback, then they should have the option to escalate the issue or respond directly to the customer within the platform.

Customization of Community Topics

Given a retailer using the community engagement feature, when they want to customize discussion topics, then they should have the ability to create, edit, or delete topics based on customer interest.

User Notification System

Given a user in the feedback community, when there is a new reply to their post or a comment on their submission, then they should receive a notification via email and through the platform.

Automated Feedback Reminders

"As a retailer, I want to automate reminders for customer feedback so that I can consistently gather insights without putting extra burden on my team."

Description

The Automated Feedback Reminders requirement enables retailers to set up automatic notifications that remind customers to provide feedback after specific interactions, such as purchases or service experiences. This feature ensures a consistent flow of feedback, improving the chances of receiving valuable insights while minimizing the effort required from retailers. The reminders should be customizable, allowing businesses to tailor messages based on customer segments. This capability is key for continuous improvement efforts as it drives customer engagement without necessitating extensive manual follow-up.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Feedback Reminders for Post-Purchase Interactions

Given a customer completes a purchase, When the purchase is confirmed, Then an automated feedback reminder is sent to the customer within 24 hours.

Customizable Reminder Messaging for Different Customer Segments

Given a retailer sets up multiple customer segments, When creating feedback reminders, Then the retailer can customize the message content for each segment to align with their preferences and buying habits.

Monitoring Feedback Reminder Effectiveness

Given a retailer has activated automated feedback reminders, When reviewing analytics after one month, Then the retailer can access reports showing the percentage of customers who provided feedback as a result of the reminders sent.

Opt-Out Mechanism for Customers

Given a feedback reminder is sent to a customer, When the customer chooses to opt out, Then the system must immediately update the customer profile to stop future feedback reminder notifications.

Feedback Reminder Scheduling Options

Given a retailer wants to schedule feedback reminders, When setting up reminders, Then the retailer can choose specific days and times for reminders based on customer activity patterns.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a retailer, I want to integrate customer feedback with our CRM system so that we can enhance our marketing strategies and better meet customer expectations."

Description

The Integration with CRM Systems requirement establishes a connection between RetailRevolution and popular Customer Relationship Management (CRM) platforms. This integration will facilitate the seamless transfer of feedback data into existing customer profiles, allowing for enhanced personalization and targeted marketing efforts. Retailers will be able to leverage feedback insights alongside other customer data to better tailor their offerings and improve service. This feature is essential for creating a coherent view of customer interactions and maximizing the utility of collected feedback.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Multiple CRM Platforms

Given a retail business has selected a CRM platform for integration, when the RetailRevolution system is configured to connect with that CRM, then feedback data should seamlessly transfer to the respective customer profiles within the CRM.

Real-time Data Syncing

Given feedback is submitted through the RetailRevolution platform, when this feedback is processed, then the customer's CRM profile should reflect the updated feedback within 5 minutes.

User Interface for Managing Integrations

Given a retailer requires management capabilities for CRM integrations, when they access the integration settings in the RetailRevolution platform, then they should be able to add, edit, or remove CRM connections with an intuitive user interface.

Handling Duplicate Feedback Entries

Given multiple feedback submissions from the same customer, when the RetailRevolution system processes these submissions, then it should consolidate the feedback under the correct customer profile without creating duplicates.

Personalization of Marketing Campaigns

Given feedback data is integrated into the CRM, when a retailer analyzes customer profiles based on feedback insights, then they should be able to create targeted marketing campaigns that are tailored to customer preferences and needs.

Error Reporting and Notifications

Given an issue occurs during the CRM integration process, when that issue is detected, then the retailer should receive a notification detailing the error and instructions for resolution.

Inventory Alignment Insights

Inventory Alignment Insights uses customer feedback analytics to inform product replenishment and selection decisions. By correlating customer preferences with inventory data, this feature helps retailers optimize stock levels for products that receive high ratings or frequent requests. This ensures that retailers not only meet consumer demand effectively but also enhance customer satisfaction through better product availability.

Requirements

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a retail manager, I want to see aggregated customer feedback correlated with inventory data so that I can make informed decisions on product replenishment and selection, ultimately leading to improved stock levels and customer satisfaction."

Description

The Customer Feedback Integration requirement involves the aggregation and analysis of customer feedback from various sources, such as surveys, reviews, and social media. This alignment with inventory data allows retailers to identify trends in product preferences and make data-driven decisions about which items to replenish. As a result, this function enhances retailers' ability to align their stock with customer demand, improve satisfaction, and minimize wasted inventory. A seamless integration with existing customer relationship management (CRM) systems and the RetailRevolution platform is essential for real-time data utilization and reporting.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Customer Feedback with Inventory Management

Given that customer feedback is collected from surveys and reviews, When the data is aggregated and analyzed, Then the inventory levels for high-demand products must be updated in real-time based on customer preferences identified in the feedback.

Real-time Data Synchronization with CRM Systems

Given that the RetailRevolution platform integrates with existing CRM systems, When customer feedback is inputted into the CRM, Then the inventory data displayed in the RetailRevolution platform reflects these updates within 5 minutes.

User Notification for Inventory Replenishment Using Feedback Insights

Given that a product receives a high rating or frequent requests, When the inventory level for that product falls below the defined threshold, Then the system must automatically create a replenishment alert for the retailer.

Availability of Historical Feedback Data for Inventory Decisions

Given that feedback is collected continuously, When a retailer accesses historical data reports, Then the report must provide analytics on customer preferences over the past year to inform inventory decisions.

Reporting on Customer Satisfaction Post Product Replenishment

Given that products have been replenished based on feedback insights, When the replenished product is sold, Then a survey must be triggered post-purchase to evaluate customer satisfaction and perceived availability of the product.

Visibility of Feedback Correlation within Inventory Dashboard

Given that inventory data and customer feedback are integrated, When a user accesses the inventory dashboard, Then they must see visual correlations between customer feedback ratings and current stock levels for each product.

Dynamic Replenishment Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts when my inventory for high-demand products is low so that I can restock efficiently and prevent potential sales losses from stockouts."

Description

Dynamic Replenishment Alerts require a proactive system that monitors inventory levels in real-time and notifies retailers when stock for popular items falls below a predefined threshold. This feature will use the data derived from customer feedback and purchase patterns to adjust these thresholds dynamically based on demand forecasts. This ensures that retailers are alerted timely about replenishment needs, preventing stockouts and ensuring product availability to customers, thereby driving higher sales and improving customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic Replenishment Alerts Triggering Process

Given an inventory item with a predefined threshold, when the stock level falls below this threshold due to sales activity, then a dynamic replenishment alert should be generated and sent to the retailer's dashboard and email.

Real-Time Inventory Monitoring

Given that the system is monitoring inventory levels in real-time, when an item approaches its threshold, then the system should update the expected replenishment amount based on historical purchase patterns and customer feedback analytics.

Notifications Delivery Format

Given that a replenishment alert is triggered, when the retailer receives the alert, then the notification should include item details, current stock levels, and recommended reorder amounts, formatted for mobile and desktop views.

Integration with Customer Feedback

Given that the system has access to customer feedback data, when a popular item consistently receives high ratings, then its replenishment threshold should be adjusted dynamically to align with the increased demand forecast.

Feedback Loop for Stock Adjustments

Given historical sales and customer feedback data, when stock levels are adjusted based on replenishment alerts, then the system should record the outcomes of these adjustments to refine future threshold settings and alerts.

Testing Threshold Settings

Given that the retailer defines custom threshold settings in the system, when these settings are saved, then the new thresholds should be reflected in real-time inventory calculations and alert generation.

User Role Access to Alerts

Given that multiple user roles exist within the RetailRevolution system, when a replenishment alert is triggered, then only users with the appropriate access level should receive notifications, ensuring data security and relevance.

Sales Performance Dashboard

"As a store owner, I want to access a dashboard that shows sales performance alongside customer feedback, so that I can identify trends and make data-driven decisions on inventory management and marketing strategies."

Description

The Sales Performance Dashboard requirement creates an interactive reporting tool that integrates sales data with customer feedback and inventory analytics. It should allow users to visualize which products are performing well and correlate this information with customer ratings and requests. This dashboard will enable quick insights into business performance, helping management to identify top-performing items and those needing attention. The functionality will support drill-down capabilities for detailed analysis, empowering retailers to make strategic inventory decisions and optimize their offerings.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Performance Dashboard visibility for top-selling products based on sales data and customer feedback.

Given the dashboard is opened, when the user selects the 'Top-Selling Products' view, then the dashboard should display a list of at least the top 10 products ranked by sales volume alongside their average customer ratings.

Integration of sales data and customer feedback within the Sales Performance Dashboard.

Given that the Sales Performance Dashboard is integrated with the inventory system, when the user updates inventory data, then the sales data should refresh automatically within 5 seconds to reflect the changes for accurate analysis.

Ability to drill down into individual product performance using the Sales Performance Dashboard.

Given the user clicks on a product within the 'Top-Selling Products' list, then the dashboard should navigate to a detailed view showing sales trends, customer feedback, and inventory levels for that specific product.

User interface experience for data visualization within the Sales Performance Dashboard.

Given the Sales Performance Dashboard is loaded, when a user interacts with the graphs and charts, then the dashboard should allow for easy zooming, filtering by time period, and exporting data without error.

Static report generation from the Sales Performance Dashboard.

Given that the user requests a sales report for a specified time period, when the user clicks 'Generate Report', then the system should produce a downloadable PDF report that includes sales performance, customer ratings, and inventory status for that time frame.

Historical Trend Analysis

"As an inventory manager, I want to analyze historical sales and feedback data to identify trends in customer preferences over time, so that I can optimize inventory planning and avoid stock issues."

Description

The Historical Trend Analysis requirement involves developing a feature that compiles data over time to track changes in customer preferences and inventory turnover rates. This analysis will leverage previous sales data and customer feedback responses to forecast future demand, enabling retailers to prepare and adjust stock levels proactively. By giving retailers insights into past performances, they can better anticipate future trends and mitigate risks associated with inventory mismanagement.

Acceptance Criteria

Analysis of Customer Feedback Based on Historical Trends

Given a dataset containing customer feedback and sales data over the past 12 months, when the Historical Trend Analysis feature is executed, then it should generate a report that identifies at least five key trends in customer preferences and inventory turnover rates.

Forecasting Demand for High-Rated Products

Given a list of products with customer ratings and sales volume, when the Historical Trend Analysis feature is used, then it should accurately forecast future demand for at least three high-rated products with a confidence level of 85% or higher based on historical data.

Identifying Inventory Turnover Rates

Given historical inventory data for the past year, when the Historical Trend Analysis feature is applied, then it should calculate and display the average inventory turnover rate for each product category, allowing retailers to recognize slow-moving stock.

Proactive Stock Level Adjustments

Given forecasts generated by the Historical Trend Analysis, when stock levels are reviewed, then the system should provide recommendations for replenishment or reduction of stock levels for at least 5 products to maintain optimized inventory.

Integration with Inventory Management System

Given that the Historical Trend Analysis feature generates insights, when the results are integrated with the existing inventory management system, then it should successfully update stock level recommendations within the system in real-time.

Reporting Generated Insights to Retail Staff

Given completed analyses from the Historical Trend Analysis feature, when a retailer accesses the reporting dashboard, then the retailer should be able to see a summary of insights presented visually with charts and graphs for better understanding.

Automated Reporting on Stock Alignment

"As a retail analyst, I want automated reports that highlight the alignment between customer demand and existing inventory so that I can focus on areas that require stock adjustments and ensure product availability."

Description

The Automated Reporting on Stock Alignment requirement establishes a system that generates regular reports detailing the alignment of current stock levels with customer demand trends derived from feedback and purchase data. This feature should offer insights into discrepancies between stock on hand and customer needs, allowing for targeted actions to improve inventory accuracy and availability. Automation of reporting will save time and provide actionable insights without the need for manual data collection.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated report generation on stock alignment is executed at scheduled intervals, specifically daily at 8 AM, to provide an overview of stock levels in relation to customer demand for the previous day.

Given the reporting system is correctly configured, When the scheduled time to generate the report arrives, Then a report will be automatically generated and stored without manual intervention, providing a comprehensive summary of stock alignment including any discrepancies identified.

The generated reports must include specific metrics on stock levels, including items that are overstocked, understocked, and those that align perfectly with customer demand.

Given that the automated report is generated, When the report is analyzed, Then it must clearly show stock levels categorized into overstocked, understocked, and optimal items, with actionable insights for each category.

Stakeholders, such as managers and inventory specialists, should receive notifications via email upon completion of the report generation.

Given the report is generated, When the report’s processing is complete, Then an email notification should be sent to all designated stakeholders, ensuring they are informed of the report availability.

Users should have the ability to customize the report to include specific product categories based on their preferences.

Given the reporting feature, When a user selects specific product categories for the report, Then the generated report must reflect only those selected categories in the output.

The reporting system should allow users to view historical reports to track inventory trends over time.

Given the historical reporting feature is utilized, When a user requests to view previous reports, Then they should have access to at least the last 6 months of reports for comparison and analysis purposes.

Reports must provide a summary that highlights key insights and recommended actions based on the stock alignment findings.

Given a report is generated, When the report is reviewed, Then it should include a summary section that outlines key insights and specific recommended actions to address discrepancies in stock alignment.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Busy Boutique Owner

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Tech-Savvy E-commerce Strategist

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Sustainable Product Advocate

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Data-Driven Retail Analyst

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Innovative Franchise Owner

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

Demand Forecasting Engine

Requirements

Sales Data Integration

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Machine Learning Model Optimization

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User-friendly Forecast Dashboard

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Alert System

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Scenario Planning Tool

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Trend Analyzer

Requirements

Seasonal Trend Detection

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Inventory Alerts

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Analysis

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Trend Forecasting Dashboard

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User Customization of Trend Settings

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Inventory Adjuster

Requirements

Dynamic Inventory Forecasting

Description